2011 Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual M - General Motors · PDF fileBuick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (1,1) 2011 Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual M ... Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual

Black plate (1,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2011

2011 Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16Performance andMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22

Keys, Doors and Windows . . . 2-1Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21

Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1Additional Storage Features . . . 4-2

Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-25Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-39Universal Remote System . . . . 5-45

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20Rear Seat Infotainment . . . . . . . 7-36Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-16Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-28Drive Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-36Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39Object Detection Systems . . . . 9-42Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-62


2011 Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual M

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-33Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-92

Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 11-2Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . . 11-7

Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-10

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-16Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1


Introduction iii

The names, logos, emblems,slogans, vehicle model names,and vehicle body designs appearingin this manual including, but notlimited to, GM, the GM logo,BUICK, the BUICK Emblem, andLACROSSE are trademarks and/orservice marks of General MotorsLLC, its subsidiaries, affiliates,or licensors.

This manual describes featuresthat may or may not be on yourspecific vehicle either becausethey are options that you didnot purchase or due to changessubsequent to the printing of thisowner manual. Please refer to thepurchase documentation relatingto your specific vehicle to confirmeach of the features found on yourvehicle. For vehicles first soldin Canada, substitute the name“General Motors of Canada Limited”for Buick Motor Division wherever itappears in this manual.

Manufactured under licenseunder U.S. Patent #'s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380;5,978,762; 6,487,535 & otherU.S. and worldwide patentsissued & pending. DTS and theSymbol are registered trademarksand DTS Digital Surround and theDTS logos are trademarks of DTS,Inc. Product includes software.All Rights Reserved.

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 20859621 B Second Printing ©2010 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.


iv Introduction

Manufactured under license fromDolby® Laboratories. Dolby andthe double-D symbol are registeredtrademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

This product incorporates copyrightprotection technology that isprotected by U.S. patents and otherintellectual property rights. Use ofthis copyright protection technologymust be authorized by Macrovision,and is intended for home and other

limited viewing uses onlyunless otherwise authorized byMacrovision. Reverse engineeringor disassembly is prohibited.

"Made for iPod" means that anelectronic accessory has beendesigned to connect specificallyto iPod and has been certifiedby the developer to meet Appleperformance standards. Apple isnot responsible for the operationof this device or its compliance withsafety and regulatory standards.

iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, andiPod touch are trademarks of AppleInc., registered in the U.S. and othercountries.

Canadian Vehicle Owners

Propriétaires Canadiens

A French language copy of thismanual can be obtained from yourdealer or from:

On peut obtenir un exemplaire dece guide en français auprès duconcessionnaire ou à l'adressesuivante:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

1-800-551-4123Numéro de poste 6438de langue françaisewww.helminc.com

Using this ManualTo quickly locate informationabout the vehicle, use the Indexin the back of the manual. It is analphabetical list of what is in themanual and the page numberwhere it can be found.


Introduction v

Danger, Warnings, andCautionsWarning messages found on vehiclelabels and in this manual describehazards and what to do to avoid orreduce them.

Danger indicates a hazard with ahigh level of risk which will result inserious injury or death.

Warning or Caution indicates ahazard that could result in injury ordeath.

{ WARNING

These mean there is somethingthat could hurt you or otherpeople.

Notice: This means there issomething that could result inproperty or vehicle damage.This would not be coveredby the vehicle's warranty.

A circle with a slash through itis a safety symbol which means“Do Not,” “Do not do this,” or“Do not let this happen.”

SymbolsThe vehicle has components andlabels that use symbols instead oftext. Symbols are shown along withthe text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specificcomponent, control, message,gauge, or indicator.

M : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see your owner manualfor additional instructions orinformation.

* : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see a service manualfor additional instructions orinformation.


vi Introduction

Vehicle Symbol Chart

Here are some additional symbolsthat may be found on the vehicleand what they mean. For moreinformation on the symbol,refer to the Index.

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

# : Air Conditioning

! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)

% : Audio Steering Wheel Controlsor OnStar®

$ : Brake System Warning Light

" : Charging System

I : Cruise Control

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

O : Exterior Lamps

# : Fog Lamps

. : Fuel Gauge

+ : Fuses

3 : Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger

j : LATCH System ChildRestraints

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure

} : Power

/ : Remote Vehicle Start

> : Safety Belt Reminders

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor

d : Traction Control

M : Windshield Washer Fluid


In Brief 1-1

In Brief

Instrument PanelInstrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Initial Drive InformationInitial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-4Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Heated and VentilatedSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . 1-9Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10Sensing System forPassenger Airbag . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10Steering WheelAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-13Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15

Vehicle FeaturesRadio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-17Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-18Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . 1-20Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20Universal Remote System . . . 1-20Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

Performance and MaintenanceTraction ControlSystem (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22

Electronic StabilityControl (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22

Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-22Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23

Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-23Driving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24

OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24


1-2 In Brief

Instrument Panel


In Brief 1-3

A. Air Vents on page 8‑8.

B. Head-Up Display (HUD) onpage 5‑29 (If Equipped).

C. Turn and Lane‐Change Lever.See Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals on page 6‑4.

Driver Information CenterButtons. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑25.

D. Instrument Cluster onpage 5‑10.

Driver Information CenterDisplay. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑25.

E. Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑3.

F. Infotainment Display Screen.

G. Infotainment on page 7‑1.

H. Exterior Lamp Controls onpage 6‑1.

Fog Lamps on page 6‑5(If Equipped).

Instrument Panel IlluminationControl on page 6‑5.

I. Front Storage on page 4‑1.

J. Data Link Connector (DLC)(Out of View). See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 5‑17.

K. Cruise Control on page 9‑39.

L. Steering Wheel Adjustment onpage 5‑2.

M. Horn on page 5‑3.

N. Steering Wheel Controls onpage 5‑2 (If Equipped).

O. Ignition Positions (Key Access)on page 9‑17 or IgnitionPositions (Keyless Access) onpage 9‑19.

P. Heated and Ventilated FrontSeats on page 3‑10.

Q. Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8‑1(If Equipped).

Dual Automatic ClimateControl System on page 8‑4(If Equipped).

R. Power Door Locks onpage 2‑11.

Hazard Warning Flashers onpage 6‑4.

Passenger Sensing System onpage 3‑37.

S. Parking Brake on page 9‑33.

T. Shift Lever Position Indicator.See Automatic Transmission onpage 9‑28.

U. Shift Lever. See Shifting IntoPark on page 9‑25.

V. Traction Control System (TCS)on page 9‑36.

Electronic Stability Control(ESC) on page 9‑37.

Ultrasonic Parking Assist onpage 9‑42.

Rear Window Sunshade(If Equipped). See RearWindow Sunshade onpage 2‑20.

W. Glove Box on page 4‑1.


1-4 In Brief

Initial DriveInformationThis section provides a briefoverview about some of theimportant features that mayor may not be on your specificvehicle.

For more detailed information, referto each of the features which can befound later in this owner manual.

Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) SystemThe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter will work up to 20 m(65 ft) away from the vehicle.On vehicles with remote startthe distance will be greater.

Press the button to extend thekey. The key can be used for alllocks. This key is also used for theignition, if the vehicle does not havepush-button start

K : Press to unlock the driver dooror all doors.

Q : Press to lock all doors.

Lock and unlock feedback can bepersonalized.

V : Press and hold to open thetrunk.

7 : Press and release to locatethe vehicle. Press and hold formore than two seconds to soundthe panic alarm. Press again tocancel the panic alarm.

See Keys on page 2‑2 and RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2‑4.

Remote Vehicle StartFor vehicles with this feature, theengine can be started from outsideof the vehicle.

Starting the Vehicle

1. Aim the Remote Keyless Entrytransmitter at the vehicle.

2. Press Q.3. Immediately after completing

Step 2, press and hold/ untilthe turn signal lamps flash, or forabout 2 seconds if the vehicle isnot in view.


In Brief 1-5

When the vehicle starts, the parkinglamps will turn on and remain onas long as the engine is running.The doors will be locked andthe climate control system maycome on.

The engine will continue to run for10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a10-minute time extension. Remotestart can be extended only once.

Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start:. Aim the RKE transmitter at

the vehicle and press andhold/ until the parkinglamps turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the vehicle on and then off.

See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 2‑8.

Door LocksTo lock or unlock the doors:. From inside the vehicle, use

the door lock knob or the powerdoor lock controls, pull once onthe door handle to unlock it, anda second time to open it.

. From outside, use the key,or press Q or K on the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.See Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation onpage 2‑4.

See Door Locks on page 2‑10.

Power Door Locks

On vehicles with power door locks,the controls are located on thecenter of the instrument panel.

K : Press to unlock the doors.

Q : Press to lock the doors.

See Power Door Locks onpage 2‑11.

Trunk ReleaseThe trunk may be opened bypressingV on the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter orthe touchpad located on the rear ofthe trunk above the license plate.See Trunk on page 2‑12 for moreinformation.

WindowsOn vehicles with power windows,the switches are on the driver doorarmrest. Each passenger door hasa switch that controls only thatwindow.

Press the switch to lower thewindow. Pull the switch up toraise it.

For more information, see PowerWindows on page 2‑19.


1-6 In Brief

Seat Adjustment

Manual Seats

A. Seatback Recline Lever

B. Height Adjustment Switch

C. Seat Position Handle

To adjust the seat position:

1. Pull the handle (C) under thefront of the seat cushion.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release the handle.

3. Try to move the seat back andforth to be sure it is locked inplace.

Press and hold the top or bottom ofthe switch (B) to raise or lower theseat. Release the switch when thedesired height is reached.

To raise or recline the seatback, usethe lever (A) on the outboard side ofthe seat.

See Seat Adjustment on page 3‑4and Reclining Seatbacks onpage 3‑8 for more information.

Power Seats

To adjust the seat:. Move the seat forward or

rearward by moving thehorizontal control forwardor rearward.

. Raise or lower the front orrear part of the seat cushion bymoving the front or rear of thehorizontal control up or down.

. Raise or lower the entire seat bymoving the control up or down.

See Power Seat Adjustment onpage 3‑5.


In Brief 1-7

Power Reclining Seatbacks

To raise or recline the seatback,tilt the top of the vertical controlforward or rearward. See RecliningSeatbacks on page 3‑8.

Lumbar Adjustment

To adjust the lumbar support:. Press and hold the front or rear

of the control to increase ordecrease lumbar support.

. Press and hold the top or bottomof the control to raise or lowerlumbar support.

See Lumbar Adjustment onpage 3‑7.

Memory Features

On vehicles with the memoryfeature, the “1” and “2” buttonson the outboard side of the driverseat are used to manually saveand recall the driver seat andoutside mirror positions. Thesemanually stored positions arereferred to as Button Memorypositions.


1-8 In Brief

The vehicle will also automaticallysave driver seat and outsidemirror positions to the currentdriver Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter when the ignition isplaced in OFF. These automaticallystored positions are referred to asRKE Memory positions.

Storing Button Memory Positions

To save positions into ButtonMemory:

1. Adjust the driver seat, seatbackrecliner, and both outside mirrorsto the desired driving positions.

2. Press and release theMEM (Memory) button.

3. Press “1” until a beep sounds.

4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 for asecond driver using “2.”

To recall the manually savedButton Memory positions, pressand hold “1” or “2.” The driver seatand outside mirrors move to thepositions stored to those buttonswhen pressed. Releasing “1” or “2”before the stored positions arereached stops the recall.

To automatically recall RKE Memorypositions, unlock the driver doorwith the RKE transmitter, and openthe driver door. On vehicles withKeyless Access, opening the driverdoor when an RKE transmitteris present will activate the RKEMemory recall. If the driver dooris already open, pressing the RKEtransmitter K button will alsoactivate the RKE Memory recall.The driver seat and outside mirrorswill move to the previously savedRKE Memory positions.

See “Memory Seats” under PowerSeat Adjustment on page 3‑5 formore information.

Easy Exit Driver Seat

This feature moves the seatrearward allowing the drivermore room to exit the vehicle.

To activate, place the ignition inOFF and open the driver door. If thedriver door is already open, placingthe ignition in OFF will activate theeasy exit driver seat.

This feature is turned on or offusing the vehicle personalizationmenu. See “Driver Seat Easy Exit”under Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑39 for more information.


In Brief 1-9

Heated and VentilatedSeats

Heated and VentilatedSeat Buttons Shown,

Heated Seat Buttons Similar

If available, the buttons are on theclimate control panel. To operate,the ignition must be on.

Press L to heat the seat cushion

and seatback or {, if equipped,to ventilate the seat.

Press the button once for thehighest setting. With each pressof the button, the seat will changeto the next lower setting, and thento the off setting. The lights indicatethree for the highest setting and onefor the lowest.

For more information, see Heatedand Ventilated Front Seats onpage 3‑10.

Head RestraintAdjustmentDo not drive until the head restraintsfor all occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

To achieve a comfortable seatingposition, change the seatbackrecline angle as little as necessarywhile keeping the seat and thehead restraint height in the properposition.

For more information see HeadRestraints on page 3‑2 andSeat Adjustment on page 3‑4.


1-10 In Brief

Safety Belts

Refer to the following sections forimportant information on how to usesafety belts properly.. Safety Belts on page 3‑13.. How to Wear Safety Belts

Properly on page 3‑17.. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3‑22.. Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH System) onpage 3‑52.

Sensing System forPassenger Airbag

The passenger sensing system willturn off the right front passengerfrontal airbag under certainconditions. The driver airbags,seat‐mounted side impact airbags,and roof‐rail airbags are not affectedby the passenger sensing system.

The passenger airbag statusindicator will be visible on theinstrument panel when the vehicleis started. See Passenger SensingSystem on page 3‑37 for moreinformation.

Mirror Adjustment

Exterior

To adjust the mirrors:

1. Turn the control knob to theL (left) or R (right) selecting thedriver or passenger mirror.

2. Push the control knob to the left,right, up, or down to adjust themirror.


In Brief 1-11

Vehicles with the memory featurecan store a preferred mirror position.See “Memory Seats” under PowerSeat Adjustment on page 3‑5 formore information.

See Power Mirrors on page 2‑16.

Manual Foldaway Mirrors

Vehicles with manual foldedmirrors are folded inward toprevent damage when goingthrough an automatic car wash.To fold, pull the mirror toward thevehicle. Push the mirror outward,to return it to the original position.

Automatic Dimming Feature

The driver outside mirrorautomatically adjusts for the glareof the headlamps behind you.

See Power Mirrors on page 2‑16.

See Folding Mirrors on page 2‑17.

Interior

Adjust this mirror for a clear view ofthe area behind the vehicle. Holdthe mirror in the center to move itup, down, or side-to-side. To reduceheadlamp glare from behind, pushthe tab forward for daytime and pullit for nighttime use.

Vehicles with OnStar® have threecontrol buttons at the bottom of themirror. See your dealer for moreinformation on the system and howto subscribe to OnStar. See theOnStar® owner's guide for moreinformation about the servicesOnStar provides.

See Manual Rearview Mirror onpage 2‑18.

Steering WheelAdjustment

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever (A) down.

2. Move the steering wheel upor down.

3. Pull or push the steering wheelcloser or away from you.

4. Pull the lever (A) up to lock thesteering wheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.


1-12 In Brief

Interior LightingDome Lamps

The interior lamps control located inthe overhead console controls boththe front and rear interior lamps.

To operate, press the followingbuttons:

( : Turns the lamps off.

H : Turns the lamps on when anydoor is opened.

' : Keeps the lamps on allthe time.

Reading Lamps

There are front and rear readinglamps.

The front reading lamps are locatedin the overhead console.

#$ : Press to turn each lamp onor off.

The rear reading lamps are locatedin the headliner.

For more information on interiorlighting, see Instrument PanelIllumination Control on page 6‑5.

Exterior Lighting

The exterior lamp control is locatedon the instrument panel on theoutboard side of the steering wheel.

Turn the control to the followingpositions:

O : Turns off the exteriorlamps. The knob returns to theAUTO position after it is released.Turn to off again to reactivate theAUTO mode.

AUTO: Automatically turnsthe exterior lamps on and off,depending on outside lighting.


In Brief 1-13

The current status of the AUTOsystem is displayed in the DriverInformation Center (DIC) upleveldisplay. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑25.

; : Turns on the parking lamps,together with the sidemarker lamps,taillamps, license plate lamps, andinstrument panel lights.

2 : Turns on the headlamps,together with the parking lamps,sidemarker lamps, taillamps, licenseplate lamps, and instrument panellights.

For more information, see:. Exterior Lamp Controls on

page 6‑1.. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)

on page 6‑3.. Fog Lamps on page 6‑5.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The windshield wiper leveris on the side of the steeringcolumn. With the ignition inACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN,move the windshield wiper leverto select the wiper speed.

2: Fast wipes.

1: Slow wipes.

& : Turn the band up for morefrequent wipes or down for lessfrequent wipes.

9 : Turns the windshieldwipers off.

3 : Briefly move the wiper leverdown for a single wipe or hold downfor several wipes.

Windshield Washer

Pull the windshield wiper lever tospray windshield washer fluid andactivate the wipers.

See Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑3.


1-14 In Brief

Climate ControlsThe heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled withthese systems.

Automatic Climate Control System

A. Power

B. Temperature Control

C. Fan Control

D. Air Delivery Mode Control

E. Recirculation

F. AUTO

G. Defrost

H. Air Conditioning

I. Rear Window Defogger


In Brief 1-15

Dual Automatic Climate Control System

A. Power

B. Driver Temperature Control

C. Defrost

D. Fan Control

E. Air Delivery Mode Control

F. Recirculation/AutomaticRecirculation

G. Passenger Temperature Control

H. AUTO


J. Heated Steering Wheel

K. Air Conditioning

L. ZONE

See Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8‑1 (If Equipped)or Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8‑4 (If Equipped).

Transmission

Automatic Transmission

Driver Shift Control (DSC)

Driver Shift Control (DSC) allowsshifting an automatic transmissionsimilar to a manual transmission.DSC can be enabled through theshift lever. See Manual Mode onpage 9‑30.


1-16 In Brief

Vehicle Features

Radio(s)

VOL/O : Press to turn the systemon and off. Turn to increase ordecrease the volume.

RADIO/BAND: Press to choosebetween FM, AM, or XM™,if equipped.

TUNE: Turn to select radiostations.

g : Press to seek the previousstation or track.

l : Press to seek the next stationor track.

Buttons 1‐6: Press to save andselect favorite stations

INFO: Press to show availableinformation about the current stationor track.

For more information aboutthese and other radio features,see Operation on page 7‑7.

Storing a Favorite Station

Stations from all bands can bestored in the favorite lists in anyorder. Up to six stations can bestored in each favorite page andthe number of available favoritepages can be set.

To store the station to a positionin the list, press the correspondingnumeric button 1-6 until the stationcan be heard again.

For more information, see “Storingand Retrieving Favorites” in AM-FMRadio on page 7‑12.

Setting the Clock

Adjusting the Time

1. Press the CONFIG buttonand select Time Settings,or press H.

2. Select Set Time.

3. Turn the Menu knob to adjustthe highlighted number.

4. Press the SELECT button toselect the next number.

5. To save the time and return tothe Time Settings menu, pressthe BACK button at any time orpress the SELECT button afteradjusting the minutes.

Setting the 12/24 Hour Format

1. Press the CONFIG buttonand select Time Settings,or press H.

2. Highlight 12/24 Hour Format.

3. Press the SELECT button toselect the 12 hour or 24 hourdisplay format.

For detailed instructions on settingthe clock, see Clock (Without DateDisplay) on page 5‑5 or Clock (WithDate Display) on page 5‑6.


In Brief 1-17

Satellite RadioVehicles with an XM™ SatelliteRadio tuner and a valid XM SatelliteRadio subscription can receive XMprogramming.

XM Satellite Radio Service

XM is a satellite radio servicebased in the 48 contiguousUnited States and 10 Canadianprovinces. XM Satellite Radio hasa wide variety of programming andcommercial-free music, coast tocoast, and in digital-quality sound.A fee is required to receive the XMservice.

For more information refer to:. www.xmradio.com or call

1-800-929-2100 (U.S.).. www.xmradio.ca or call

1-877-438-9677 (Canada).

For more information, see SatelliteRadio on page 7‑15.

Portable Audio DevicesThis vehicle has a 3.5 mm (1/8 in)auxiliary input and a USB portlocated in the center console.External devices such as iPods®,laptop computers, MP3 players,CD changers, and USB storagedevices may be connected,depending on the audio system.

For more information, see AuxiliaryDevices (Radio with CD) onpage 7‑31 or Auxiliary Devices(Radio with CD/DVD and MEM) onpage 7‑34.

Bluetooth®

The Bluetooth® system allowsusers with a Bluetooth-enabledcell phone to make and receivehands-free calls using the vehicleaudio system, microphone, andcontrols.

The Bluetooth-enabled cell phonemust be paired with the in-vehicleBluetooth system before it can beused in the vehicle. Not all phoneswill support all functions.

See Bluetooth (Overview) onpage 7‑46 or Bluetooth(Infotainment Controls) onpage 7‑48 or Bluetooth (VoiceRecognition) on page 7‑53.


1-18 In Brief

Steering Wheel Controls

For vehicles with audio steeringwheel controls, some audio controlscan be adjusted at the steeringwheel.

b g : Press to interact withthe available Bluetooth, OnStar,or navigation system.

$i : Press to silence thevehicle speakers only. Press againto turn the sound on. For vehicleswith OnStar or Bluetooth systems,press to reject an incoming call,or to end a current call.

_ SRC ^ : Turn _ or ^ to select aradio band or audio source.

Turn _ or ^ to select the next orprevious favorite radio station, CD,DVD track/chapter (with navigation),or MP3 track.

Press SRC to change betweenradio and CD or DVD.

+ x −: Press + to increase or − todecrease the volume.

For more information, see SteeringWheel Controls on page 5‑2.

Cruise Control

The cruise control buttons arelocated on the steering wheel.

5 : Press to turn the cruise controlsystem on and off. An indicator lightwill turn on or off in the instrumentpanel cluster.


In Brief 1-19

\ : Press to disengage cruisecontrol without erasing the setspeed from memory.

RES/+ : Move the thumbwheelup to make the vehicle resumeto a previously set speed or toaccelerate.

SET/− : Move the thumbwheeldown to set the speed and activatecruise control or make the vehicledecelerate.

See Cruise Control on page 9‑39.

Navigation SystemIf the vehicle has a navigationsystem, there is a separateNavigation System Manual thatincludes information on the radio,audio players, and navigationsystem.

The navigation system providesdetailed maps of most majorfreeways and roads. After adestination has been set, thesystem provides turn-by-turninstructions for reaching thedestination. In addition, the systemcan help locate a variety of pointsof interest (POIs), such as banks,airports, restaurants, and more.

See the Navigation System Manualfor more information.

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The DIC display is located in thecenter of the instrument panelcluster. It shows the status of manyvehicle systems. The controls forthe DIC are located on the turnsignal lever.

A. SET/CLR: Press to set orclear the menu item whenit is displayed.

B. wx: Use the thumbwheelto scroll through the items ineach menu.

C. MENU: Press to get to theTrip/Fuel Menu and the VehicleInformation Menu. This buttonis also used to return to or exitthe last screen displayed onthe DIC.

For more information, see DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑25.


1-20 In Brief

Vehicle PersonalizationSome vehicle features can beprogrammed by using the audiosystem controls. These featuresinclude:. Climate and Air Quality. Comfort and Convenience. Collision/Detection Systems. Language. Lighting. Power Door Locks. Remote Lock/Unlock/Start

See Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑39.

Power OutletsThe accessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone or MP3 player.

There are two accessory poweroutlets. One is located under thearmrest inside the center consolestorage and the other is on the rearof the center floor console.

Remove the cover to access andreplace when not in use.

See Power Outlets on page 5‑7.

Universal Remote System

This system provides a wayto replace up to three remotecontrol transmitters used toactivate devices such as garagedoor openers, security systems,and home automation devices.

Read the instructions completelybefore attempting to programthe Universal Home Remote.Because of the steps involved,it may be helpful to have anotherperson available to assist you withprogramming the Universal HomeRemote.

See Universal Remote System onpage 5‑45.


In Brief 1-21

Sunroof

On vehicles with a sunroof, theswitch is located on the overheadconsole.

The sunroof only operateswhen the ignition is in ON/RUNor ACC/ACCESSORY, or inRetained Accessory Power (RAP).See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9‑24

Vent: The sunroof has anexpress-vent open feature.From the closed position, pressthe rear of the sunroof switch (B) tothe first detent to vent the sunroof.To close the sunroof, press the frontof the sunroof switch (A) to thesecond detent.

Express-open/Express-close:To express-open the sunroof fromthe closed or vent position, fullypress and release the rear of theswitch (B). The sunroof opensautomatically. To stop the sunroofpartway, press the switch a secondtime. To express-close the sunroof,fully press and release the front ofthe switch (A). The sunroof closesautomatically. To stop the sunroofpartway, press the switch asecond time.

If the sunshade is closed, it opensautomatically with the sunroofbut can also be express-opened/express-closed by using thesunshade control (C) or (D).The sunshade cannot be fullyclosed with the sunroof open.

To express-open the sunshade fromthe closed position, fully press andrelease the rear of the switch (C).The sunshade opens automatically.To stop the sunshade partway,press the switch a second time.To express-close the sunshadefully press and release the frontof the switch (D). The sunshadecloses automatically. To stop thesunshade partway, press the switcha second time.

Notice: Forcing the sunshadeforward of the sliding glasspanel may cause damage andthe sunroof may not operateproperly. Always close theglass panel before closingthe sunshade.

The sunroof glass panel cannot beopened or closed if the vehicle hasan electrical failure.

See Sunroof on page 2‑21.


1-22 In Brief

Performance andMaintenance

Traction ControlSystem (TCS)The traction control system limitswheel spin. The system turns onautomatically every time the vehicleis started.. To turn off traction control,

press and release g locatedon the console to the right ofthe shifter. i illuminates andthe appropriate DIC messageis displayed. See ElectronicStability Control (ESC)/TractionControl System (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light on page 5‑22.

. Press and release the buttonagain to turn on traction control.

For more information, see TractionControl System (TCS) onpage 9‑36.

Electronic StabilityControl (ESC)The Electronic StabilityControl (ESC) system assistswith directional control of thevehicle in difficult driving conditions.The system turns on automaticallyevery time the vehicle is started.. To turn off both traction control

and ESC, press and hold g,located on the console tothe right of the shifter, until gilluminates and the appropriateDIC message is displayed.See Electronic Stability Control(ESC)/Traction Control System(TCS) Indicator/Warning Light onpage 5‑22.

. Press and release the button toturn on both systems.

For more information, see ElectronicStability Control (ESC) onpage 9‑37.

Tire Pressure MonitorThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).

The TPMS warning light alerts youto a significant loss in pressureof one of the vehicle's tires. If thewarning light comes on, stop assoon as possible and inflate thetires to the recommended pressureshown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑12. The warninglight will remain on until the tirepressure is corrected.

During cooler conditions, the low tirepressure warning light may appearwhen the vehicle is first started andthen turn off. This may be an early


In Brief 1-23

indicator that the tire pressures aregetting low and the tires need to beinflated to the proper pressure.

The TPMS does not replace normalmonthly tire maintenance. It is thedriver’s responsibility to maintaincorrect tire pressures.

See Tire Pressure Monitor Systemon page 10‑56.

Tire Sealant andCompressor KitThis vehicle may come with a jackand spare tire or a tire sealant andcompressor kit. The kit can be usedto temporarily seal small puncturesin the tread area of the tire.

See Tire Sealant and CompressorKit on page 10‑72 for completeoperating information.

If the vehicle came with a jack andspare tire, see If a Tire Goes Flat onpage 10‑70.

Engine Oil Life SystemThe engine oil life system calculatesengine oil life based on vehicle useand displays the CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message when it is timeto change the engine oil and filter.The oil life system should be resetto 100% only following an oilchange.

Resetting the Oil Life System

1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN withthe engine off.

2. Press the DIC menu button onthe turn signal lever to enterthe Vehicle Information Menu.Use the thumbwheel to scrollthrough the menu items until youreach REMAINING OIL LIFE.

3. Press the SET/CLR button toreset the oil life at 100%.

4. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.

See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑13.

Driving for Better FuelEconomyDriving habits can affect fuelmileage. Here are some drivingtips to get the best fuel economypossible.. Avoid fast starts and accelerate

smoothly.. Brake gradually and avoid

abrupt stops.. Avoid idling the engine for long

periods of time.. When road and weather

conditions are appropriate,use cruise control.

. Always follow posted speedlimits or drive more slowly whenconditions require.

. Keep vehicle tires properlyinflated.

. Combine several trips into asingle trip.


1-24 In Brief

. Replace the vehicle's tires withthe same TPC Spec numbermolded into the tire's sidewallnear the size.

. Follow recommended scheduledmaintenance.

Roadside AssistanceProgramU.S.: 1-800-252-1112

TTY Users (U.S.): 1-888-889-2438

Canada: 1-800-268-6800

Mexico: 01-800-466-0818

As the owner of a new Buick, youare automatically enrolled in theRoadside Assistance program.

See Roadside Assistance Program(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑8or Roadside Assistance Program(Mexico) on page 13‑10 for moreinformation.

Roadside Service and OnStar(U.S. and Canada)

If you have an active OnStarsubscription, press theQ buttonand the current GPS location willbe sent to an OnStar Advisor whowill assess your problem, contactRoadside Assistance, and relayyour exact location to get the helpyou need.

Online Owner Center(U.S. and Canada)

The Online Owner Center is acomplimentary service that includesonline service reminders, vehiclemaintenance tips, online ownermanual, special privileges,and more.

Sign up today at:www.buickownercenter.com(U.S.) or www.gm.ca (Canada).

OnStar®

For vehicles with an active OnStarsubscription, OnStar uses severalinnovative technologies and liveAdvisors to provide a wide rangeof safety, security, navigation,diagnostics, and calling services.

Automatic Crash Response

In a crash, built‐in sensors canautomatically alert an OnStarAdvisor who is immediatelyconnected to the vehicle tosee if you need help.


In Brief 1-25

How OnStar Service Works

Q : Push this blue button toconnect to a specially trainedOnStar Advisor to verify youraccount information and toanswer questions.

] : Push this red emergencybutton to get priority help fromspecially trained OnStar EmergencyAdvisors.

X : Push this button for hands‐free,voice‐activated calling and to givevoice commands for Hands‐FreeCalling and Turn‐by‐TurnNavigation.

Automatic Crash Response,Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,Stolen Vehicle Assistance, VehicleDiagnostics, Remote Door Unlock,Roadside Assistance, Turn‐by‐TurnNavigation, and Hands‐Free Callingare available on most vehicles.

Not all OnStar services areavailable on all vehicles.For more information, seethe OnStar Owner's Guide;visit www.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada); contactOnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1‐888‐466‐7827) or TTY1‐877‐248‐2080; or pushtheQ button to speak with anOnStar Advisor 24 hours a day,7 days a week.

For a full description of OnStarservices and system limitations,see the OnStar Owner's Guide inthe glove box.

OnStar service is subject to theOnStar Terms and Conditionsincluded in the OnStar GloveBox Kit.

OnStar service requires wirelesscommunication networks and theGlobal Positioning System (GPS)

satellite network. Not all OnStarservices are available everywhereor on all vehicles at all times.

OnStar service can’t work unlessthe vehicle is in a place whereOnStar has an agreement witha wireless service provider forservice in that area, and thewireless service provider hascoverage, network capacity,reception, and technologycompatible with OnStar service.Service involving locationinformation about the vehiclecan’t work unless GPS signalsare available, unobstructed,and compatible with the OnStarhardware. The vehicle has to havea working electrical system andadequate battery power for theOnStar equipment to operate.


1-26 In Brief

OnStar service may not workif the OnStar equipment isn’tproperly installed or you haven’tmaintained it and the vehicleis in good working order and incompliance with all governmentregulations. If you try to add,connect, or modify any equipmentor software in the vehicle, OnStarservice may not work. Otherproblems OnStar can’t controlmay prevent service to you, suchas hills, tall buildings, tunnels,weather, electrical system designand architecture of the vehicle,damage to important parts of thevehicle in a crash, or wireless phonenetwork congestion or jamming.

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑20 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission(FCC) rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-210/220/310.

OnStar Steering WheelControls

This vehicle may have a Talk/Mutebutton that can be used to interactwith OnStar Hands-Free calling.See Steering Wheel Controls onpage 5‑2 for more information.

On some vehicles, the Talk buttoncan be used to dial numbers intovoice mail systems, or to dial phoneextensions. See the OnStar Owner'sGuide for more information.

Your Responsibility

Increase the volume of the radioif the OnStar Advisor cannot beheard.

If the light next to the OnStarbuttons is red, the system maynot be functioning properly.Push theQ button and request avehicle diagnostic check. If the lightappears clear (no light appears),your OnStar subscription hasexpired and all services have beendeactivated. Push theQ button toconfirm that the OnStar equipmentis active.


Keys, Doors and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors andWindows

Keys and LocksKeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-8Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

DoorsTrunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

Vehicle SecurityVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . 2-14Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Immobilizer Operation(Key Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

Immobilizer Operation(Keyless Access) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

Exterior MirrorsPower Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Park Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

Interior MirrorsManual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-18

WindowsWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20Rear Window Sunshade . . . . . 2-20

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21


2-2 Keys, Doors and Windows

Keys and Locks

Keys

{ WARNING

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe ignition key is dangerous formany reasons. Children or otherscould be badly injured or evenkilled. They could operate thepower windows or other controlsor even make the vehicle move.The windows will function with thekeys in the ignition and childrencould be seriously injured or killedif caught in the path of a closingwindow. Do not leave the keys ina vehicle with children.

{ WARNING

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe keyless access transmitteris dangerous for many reasons,children or others could be badlyinjured or even killed. They couldoperate the power windows orother controls or even make thevehicle move. The windows willfunction with the keyless accesstransmitter in the vehicle and theycould be seriously injured or killedif caught in the path of a closingwindow. Do not leave the keylessaccess transmitter in a vehiclewith children.

The key that is part of the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmittercan be used for the ignition andall locks if the vehicle is a keyaccess vehicle. If the vehicle hasthe keyless ignition, the key canbe used for the locks.



Press the button on the RKEtransmitter to extend the key.Press the button and the keyblade to retract the key.

See your dealer if a new key isneeded.

Notice: If the keys get lockedin the vehicle, it may have tobe damaged to get them out.Always carry a spare key.

If you are locked out of the vehicle,see Roadside Assistance Program(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑8or Roadside Assistance Program(Mexico) on page 13‑10.

Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) SystemSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑20 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission(FCC) rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-210/220/310.

If there is a decrease in the RKEoperating range:. Check the distance.

The transmitter may betoo far from the vehicle.

. Check the location. Othervehicles or objects may beblocking the signal.

. Check the transmitter's battery.See “Battery Replacement” laterin this section.

. If the transmitter is still notworking correctly, see yourdealer or a qualified technicianfor service.



Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System OperationThe transmitter functions will workup to 20 m (65 ft) away from thevehicle. On vehicles with remotestart the distance will be greater.

Keep in mind that other conditions,such as those previously stated,can impact the performance of thetransmitter.

RKE without Remote Start Shown

Q (Lock): Press to lock all doors.

The turn signal indicators mayflash and/or the horn may soundto indicate locking, see “LockingFeedback” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑39.

If the driver door is open when Q ispressed, all doors lock except thedriver door, if enabled through thevehicle personalization.

If the passenger door is openwhen Q is pressed, all doors lock.

Pressing Q may also armthe theft-deterrent system.See Anti-Theft Alarm System onpage 2‑14.

K (Unlock): Press to unlock thedriver door or all doors. See “DoorUnlock Options” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑39.

The turn signal indicators mayflash and/or the horn maysound to indicate unlocking.

See “Unlock Feedback” underVehicle Personalization onpage 5‑39.

Pressing K will disarmthe theft-deterrent system.See Anti-Theft Alarm System onpage 2‑14.

Memory seat positions may berecalled when unlocking the vehicle.See “Memory Seats” under PowerSeat Adjustment on page 3‑5 and“Remote Recall” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑39for more information.

V (Remote Trunk Release):Press and hold to unlock the trunk.

7 (Vehicle Locator/PanicAlarm): Press and releaseone time to locate the vehicle.The exterior lamps flash andthe horn chirps.

Press and hold 7 for at leasttwo seconds to sound the panicalarm. The horn sounds and theturn signals flash until 7 is pressedagain or the vehicle is started.



/ (Remote Vehicle Start): Forvehicles with this feature, press Qand then press and hold/ withinfive seconds to start the engine fromoutside the vehicle using the RKEtransmitter. See Remote VehicleStart on page 2‑8 for additionalinformation.

Keyless Access Operation

Some vehicles have a keylessaccess system that lets you lockand unlock the doors and accessthe trunk without removing the RKEtransmitter from your pocket, purse,briefcase, etc. The RKE transmittershould be within 1 m (3 ft) of thedoor or trunk being opened.

Keyless Unlocking

With the RKE transmitter within1 m (3 ft), approach the front doorand pull the handle to unlock andopen the door. If the transmitter isrecognized, the door will unlockand open.

Entering any door other than thedriver door will always cause allof the doors to unlock. This is notcustomizable.

To customize which doors unlockwhen the driver door is opened,see “Door Unlock Options” underVehicle Personalization onpage 5‑39.

Lock Sensor

When all doors are closed and theignition is off, the vehicle can belocked by pressing this area on thedoor handle. This feature will beavailable for several minutes afterthe vehicle has been turned off.



Keyless Trunk Opening

Lift up on the touch pad locatedabove the license plate to open thetrunk if the RKE transmitter is withinrange.

Programming Transmitters tothe Vehicle

Only RKE transmittersprogrammed to the vehiclewill work. If a transmitter is lostor stolen, a replacement canbe purchased and programmedthrough your dealer. The vehiclecan be reprogrammed so that lostor stolen transmitters no longerwork. Any remaining transmitterswill need to be reprogrammed.Each vehicle can have up tofive transmitters matched to it.

Programming with a RecognizedTransmitter (Keyless AccessVehicles Only)

A new transmitter can beprogrammed to the vehiclewhen there is one recognizedtransmitter. To program, thevehicle must be off and all ofthe transmitters, both currentlyrecognized and new, must bewith you.

1. Place the recognizedtransmitter(s) in the cupholder.

2. Insert the vehicle key of thenew transmitter into the key lockcylinder located on the outsideof the driver door and turn thekey to the unlock position fivetimes within 10 seconds.

The Driver InformationCenter (DIC) displays READYFOR REMOTE #2, 3, 4 or 5.

3. Place the new transmitterinto the transmitter pocket.The transmitter pocket islocated inside the centerconsole storage area underthe cupholder. The cupholderwill need to be pulled out toaccess the transmitter pocket.

4. Press the ignition. When thetransmitter is learned, the DICwill show that it is ready toprogram the next transmitter.

5. Remove the transmitter from thetransmitter pocket and press K.

To program additionaltransmitters, repeat Steps 3through 5.

When all additional transmittersare programmed, press and holdthe ignition for 10 seconds toexit programming mode.



Programming without aRecognized Transmitter(Keyless Access Vehicles Only)

If there are no currently recognizedtransmitters available, follow thisprocedure to program up to fivetransmitters. This feature is notavailable in Canada. This procedurewill take approximately 30 minutesto complete. The vehicle must beoff and all of the transmitters youwish to program must be with you.

1. Insert the vehicle key of thetransmitter into the key lockcylinder located on the outsideof the driver door and turn thekey to the unlock position fivetimes within 10 seconds.

The Driver Information Center(DIC) displays REMOTE LEARNPENDING, PLEASE WAIT.

2. Wait for 10 minutes until theDIC displays PRESS ENGINESTART BUTTON TO LEARNand then press the ignition.

The DIC displays will againshow REMOTE LEARNPENDING, PLEASE WAIT.

3. Repeat Step 2 two additionaltimes. After the third time allpreviously known transmitterswill no longer work with thevehicle. Remaining transmitterscan be relearned during thenext steps.

The DIC display shouldnow show READY FORREMOTE # 1.

4. Place the new transmitterinto the transmitter pocket.The transmitter pocket islocated inside the centerconsole storage area underthe cupholder. The cupholderwill need to be pulled out toaccess the transmitter pocket.

5. Press the ignition. When thetransmitter is learned the DICwill show that it is ready toprogram the next transmitter.

6. Remove the transmitter from thetransmitter pocket and press K.

To program additionaltransmitters, repeat Steps 4through 6.

When all additional transmittersare programmed, press and holdthe ignition for 10 seconds toexit programming mode.



Starting the Vehicle with a LowTransmitter Battery

If the transmitter battery is weak,the DIC may display NO REMOTEDETECTED when you try tostart the vehicle. The REPLACEBATTERY IN REMOTE KEYmessage may also be displayedat this time.

To start the vehicle:

1. Remove the cupholder from thecenter console storage area.

2. Place the transmitter in thetransmitter pocket with thebuttons facing up.

3. With the vehicle in P (Park) orN (Neutral), press the brakepedal and the ignition control.See Starting the Engine onpage 9‑20 for additionalinformation about the vehicle'skeyless ignition with push start.

Replace the transmitter batteryas soon as possible.

Battery Replacement

Replace the battery if the REPLACEBATTERY IN REMOTE KEYmessage displays in the DIC.See “Replace Battery in RemoteKey” under Key and Lock Messageson page 5‑36.

The battery is not rechargeable.To replace the battery:

1. Push the button on thetransmitter to extend the key.

2. Remove the battery cover byprying it with a finger.

3. Remove the battery by pushingon the battery and sliding ittoward the keyblade.

4. Insert the new battery, positiveside facing up. Push the batterydown until it is held in place.Replace with a CR2032 orequivalent battery.

5. Snap the battery cover back onto the transmitter.

Remote Vehicle StartIf available, this feature allows theengine to be started from outsidethe vehicle.

The/ button will be on the RKEtransmitter if the vehicle has remotestart.

Laws in some local communitiesmay restrict the use of remotestarters. For example, some lawsmay require a person using remotestart to have the vehicle in view.Check local regulations for anyrequirements.



Starting the Engine Using RemoteStart

To start the engine using the remotestart feature:

1. Aim the Remote Keyless Entrytransmitter at the vehicle.

2. Press Q.3. Immediately after completing

Step 2, press and hold/ untilthe turn signal lamps flash, or forabout 2 seconds if the vehicle isnot in view.

Once the vehicle is started, theparking lamps will turn on andremain on as long as the engineis running.

Turn the ignition to ON/RUN(key access), or select theON/RUN/START ignition position(keyless access), to drive thevehicle.

The engine will shut off after10 minutes unless a timeextension is done or the ignitionis put in ON/RUN (key access) orON/RUN/START (keyless access).

Vehicles with an automatic climatecontrol system will default to aheating or cooling mode dependingon the outside temperature during aremote start. When the key is turnedto ON/RUN (key access), or theON/RUN/START ignition positionis selected (keyless access), theclimate control system will turn onat the setting the vehicle was set towhen the vehicle was last turned off.Vehicles with heated or heated andventilated front seats can have thisfeature turn on automatically duringa remote start. See “Remote StartHeated Seats” and “Remote StartVented Seats” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑39for more information.

Extending Engine Run Time

For a 10-minute extension, repeatSteps 1 and 2 while the engine isstill running. The remote start canonly be extended once.

When the remote start is extended,the second 10 minutes will startimmediately.

For example, if the vehicle hasbeen running for five minutes, and10 minutes are added, the enginewill run for a total of 15 minutes.

A maximum of two remote starts orremote start attempts are allowedbetween ignition cycles.

The vehicle's ignition must beturned on and then back off beforethe remote start procedure can beused again.



Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start, do any ofthe following:. Aim the RKE transmitter at the

vehicle and press and hold/until the parking lamps turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the vehicle on and then off.

Conditions in Which Remote StartWill Not Work

The remote start will not operate if:. The key is in the ignition (key

access) or the ignition is in anyposition other than OFF (keylessaccess).

. The transmitter is in the vehicle(keyless access).

. The hood is not closed.

. The hazard warning flashersare on.

. There is an emission controlsystem malfunction.

. The engine coolant temperatureis too high.

. The oil pressure is low.

. Two remote vehicle starts havealready been used.

. The vehicle is not in P (Park).

Door Locks

{ WARNING

Unlocked doors can bedangerous.

. Passengers, especiallychildren, can easily openthe doors and fall outof a moving vehicle.The chance of being thrownout of the vehicle in a crashis increased if the doorsare not locked. So, allpassengers should wearsafety belts properly andthe doors should be lockedwhenever the vehicle isdriven.

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

. Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A child canbe overcome by extreme heatand can suffer permanentinjuries or even death fromheat stroke. Always lock thevehicle whenever leaving it.

. Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen slowing or stoppingthe vehicle. Lock the doorsto help prevent this fromhappening.

To lock and unlock the door, usethe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter or the key from theoutside and the door lock knobor switch from the inside.

From inside the vehicle with thedoors locked, pull once on the doorhandle to unlock it, and a secondtime to open it.

Manually locking the driver dooralso automatically locks all otherdoors.

For more information see:. Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

System Operation on page 2‑4.. Power Door Locks on page 2‑11.. Vehicle Personalization on

page 5‑39.

Power Door Locks

K (Unlock): Press to unlock alldoors.

Q (Lock): Press to lock all doors.

See “Power Door Locks” in VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑39.



Delayed LockingWhen locking the doors withthe power lock switch and adoor is open, the doors will lockfive seconds after the last door isclosed. You will hear three chimesto signal that the delayed lockingfeature is in use.

Pressing the power lock switchtwice or the lock button on theRKE transmitter twice will overridethe delayed locking feature andimmediately lock all the doors.

This feature will not operate if thekey is in the ignition.

This feature can be programmed byusing the Driver Information Center(DIC). See “Delayed Door Lock”under Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑39.

Safety Locks

Press the button on the driver doorarmrest to activate the safety lockson the passenger rear doors.

This switch also disables the rearpower windows.

Once activated, the light, located onthe switch, illuminates and goes outwhen deactivated.

If the light flashes, the feature maynot be working properly.

Doors

Trunk

{ WARNING

Exhaust gases can enter thevehicle if it is driven with theliftgate, trunk/hatch open, orwith any objects that passthrough the seal between thebody and the trunk/hatch orliftgate. Engine exhaust containsCarbon Monoxide (CO) whichcannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousnessand even death.

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

If the vehicle must be driven withthe liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:

. Close all of the windows.

. Fully open the air outletson or under the instrumentpanel.

. Adjust the Climate Controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside airand set the fan speed to thehighest setting. See ClimateControl System in the Index.

. If the vehicle has a powerliftgate, disable the powerliftgate function.

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑27.

Remote Trunk Release

To open the trunk from the outsidethe vehicle, pressV on theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter, or press the touchpadabove the license plate.

Emergency Trunk ReleaseHandle

Notice: Do not use theemergency trunk release handleas a tie-down or anchor pointwhen securing items in the trunkas it could damage the handle.The emergency trunk releasehandle is only intended to aid aperson trapped in a latched trunk,enabling them to open the trunkfrom the inside.

There is an emergency trunkrelease handle located inside thetrunk on the trunk latch. On somevehicles, the release handle can beaccessed by folding the rear seatcenter seatback. See Rear Seats onpage 3‑11. Pull the release handleto open the trunk from the inside.



Vehicle SecurityThis vehicle has theft-deterrentfeatures; however, they do not makeit impossible to steal.

Anti-Theft Alarm SystemThis vehicle has an anti-theft alarmsystem.

Arming the System

To arm the system, press Q on theRKE transmitter.

The alarm automatically arms afterabout 30 seconds. The securitylight, located on the instrumentpanel, flashes.

PressV on the RKE transmitter toopen the trunk without setting off thealarm. The system rearms when thetrunk is closed.

Disarming the System

To disarm the system, do one of thefollowing:

. Press K on the RKE transmitter.

. Approach the vehicle withthe RKE transmitter (keylessaccess).

. Start the engine.

The alarm automatically disarms.

How to Detect a TamperCondition

If K is pressed and the hornsounds, an attempted break-inhas occurred while the systemwas armed.

If the alarm has been activated, theTHEFT ATTEMPTED message willappear on the DIC. See Key andLock Messages on page 5‑36 foradditional information.

ImmobilizerSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑20 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission(FCC) rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-210/220/310.

Immobilizer Operation(Key Access)This vehicle has a passivetheft-deterrent system.

The system does not have to bemanually armed or disarmed.

The vehicle is automaticallyimmobilized when the key isremoved from the ignition.

The system is automaticallydisarmed when the vehicle isstarted with the correct key.



The key uses a transponder thatmatches an immobilizer control unitin the vehicle and automaticallydisarms the system. Only thecorrect key starts the vehicle.The vehicle may not start if thekey is damaged.

The security light, located in theinstrument panel cluster, comes onif there is a problem with armingor disarming the theft-deterrentsystem.

When trying to start the vehicle, thesecurity light comes on briefly whenthe ignition is turned on.

If the engine does not start and thesecurity light stays on, there is aproblem with the system. Turn theignition off and try again.

If the engine still does not start, andthe key appears to be undamagedor the light continues to stay on,try another ignition key.

If the engine still does not startwith the other key, the vehicle needsservice. If the vehicle does start,the first key may be damaged.See your dealer who can servicethe theft-deterrent system andhave a new key made.

Do not leave the key or devicethat disarms or deactivates thetheft-deterrent system in the vehicle.

Immobilizer Operation(Keyless Access)This vehicle has a passivetheft-deterrent system.

The system does not have to bemanually armed or disarmed.

The vehicle is automaticallyimmobilized when the transmitterleaves the vehicle.

The immobilization system isdisarmed when the ignition buttonis pushed in and a valid transmitteris found in the vehicle.

The security light, located in theinstrument panel cluster, comes onif there is a problem with armingor disarming the theft-deterrentsystem.



The system has one or moretransmitters that are matched toan immobilizer control unit in yourvehicle. Only a correctly matchedtransmitter will start the vehicle.If the transmitter is ever damaged,you may not be able to start yourvehicle.

When trying to start the vehicle, thesecurity light comes on briefly whenthe ignition is turned on.

If the engine does not start and thesecurity light stays on, there is aproblem with the system. Turn theignition off and try again.

If the RKE appears to beundamaged, try anothertransmitter. Or, you may tryplacing the transmitter in thetransmitter pocket located in thecenter console. See “No RemoteDetected” under Key and LockMessages on page 5‑36.

If the engine does not start withthe other transmitter or when thetransmitter is on the pocket in thecenter console, your vehicle needsservice. See your dealer who canservice the theft-deterrent systemand have a new transmitterprogrammed to the vehicle.

Do not leave the key or devicethat disarms or deactivates thetheft-deterrent system in the vehicle.

Exterior Mirrors

Power Mirrors

To adjust the mirrors:

1. Turn the control knob to theL (left) or R (right) selecting thedriver or passenger mirror.

2. Push the control knob to the left,right, up, or down to adjust themirror.



Vehicles with the memory featurecan store a preferred mirror position.See “Memory Seats” under PowerSeat Adjustment on page 3‑5 formore information.

Folding Mirrors

Manual Foldaway Mirrors

The mirrors on vehicles with manualfolded mirrors are folded inwardto prevent damage when goingthrough an automatic car wash.To fold, pull the mirror toward thevehicle. Push the mirror outwardto return it to the original position.

Automatic Dimming Feature

The driver outside mirrorautomatically adjusts for the glareof the headlamps behind you.

Turn Signal Indicator

The vehicle may have a turn signalindicator lamp built into the mirrorhousing. The turn signal lampflashes with the use of the vehicle'sturn signal and hazard flashers.

Heated MirrorsFor vehicles with heated mirrors:

< (Rear Window Defogger):Press to heat the mirrors.

See “Rear Window Defogger” underAutomatic Climate Control Systemon page 8‑1 for more information.

Park Tilt MirrorsIf the vehicle is equipped withmemory mirrors, there is an optionto have the mirrors tilt down, whenin R (Reverse), to more easily seethe ground near the vehicle.

When the vehicle is shifted toR (Reverse), both the driver andpassenger mirrors will tilt downward.They will return to their previousposition when the vehicle is shiftedout of R (Reverse), the ignition isturned to OFF, or the vehicle is leftin R (Reverse) for an extendedperiod of time.

This feature can be turned on or off.See Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑39.



Interior Mirrors

Manual Rearview MirrorAdjust the inside rearview mirrorfor a clear view of the area behindyour vehicle. To avoid glare of theheadlamps from behind, push thetab forward for daytime and pull itfor nighttime use.

Vehicles with OnStar® have threecontrol buttons at the bottom of themirror. See your dealer for moreinformation about OnStar and howto subscribe to it. See the OnStarOwner's Guide for more informationabout the services OnStar provides.

Windows

{ WARNING

Leaving children, helplessadults, or pets in a vehiclewith the windows closed isdangerous. They can beovercome by the extreme heatand suffer permanent injuriesor even death from heat stroke.Never leave a child, a helplessadult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,especially with the windowsclosed in warm or hot weather.

The vehicle aerodynamics aredesigned to improve fuel economyperformance. This may result in apulsing sound when either rearwindow is down and the frontwindows are up. To reduce thesound, open either a front windowor the sunroof (if equipped).



Power Windows

The power window switches locatedon the driver door control all fourwindows. The passenger doorshave a window switch that controlsthat window. Push the switch downto open the window. Pull the frontof the switch up to close it.

The switches work whenthe ignition is in ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY, or in RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). SeeRetained Accessory Power (RAP)on page 9‑24.

Express Window Operation

Windows with an express-upor down feature allow the frontwindows to be lowered or raisedwithout holding the switch. Rearwindows only have express-down.Pull a window switch up or pushit down all the way, release it,and the window goes down or upautomatically. Stop the windowby pushing or pulling the switch.

Rear Window Lockout

The rear window lockout buttonis on the driver door. Press v todisable the rear window controls.The light on the button comes onindicating the feature is in use.The rear windows can still be raisedor lowered using the driver windowswitches when the lockout feature isactive. To restore power to the rearwindows, press the button again.The light on the button goes out.If the light flashes, the featuremay not be working properly.

This switch also activates thesafety locks. See Safety Locks onpage 2‑12.



Programming the PowerWindows

If the battery on the vehicle hasbeen recharged, disconnected,or is not working, you will need toreprogram each front power windowfor the express-up feature to work.Before reprogramming, replace orrecharge the vehicle's battery.

To program each front window:

1. With the ignition in ON/RUNor ACC/ACCESSORY, or inRetained Accessory Power(RAP), close all doors.

2. Press and hold the powerwindow switch until the windowis fully open.

3. Pull the power window switch upuntil the window is fully closed.

4. Continue holding the switch upfor approximately two secondsafter the window is completelyclosed.

The window is now reprogrammed.Repeat the process for the otherwindows.

Sun Visors

Pull the sun visor down to blockglare. Detach the sun visor fromthe center mount to pivot to the sidewindow, or to extend along the rod,if available.

Rear Window SunshadeOn vehicles with a rear windowsunshade, the switch is on theconsole to the right of the shifter.

The sunshade only operateswhen the ignition is in ON/RUNor ACC/ACCESSORY.

To open the sunshade, press andrelease the switch. The sunshadewill fully extend. To close thesunshade, press and release theswitch again. The sunshade willfully close.

If the vehicle is shifted intoR (Reverse) when the sunshade isextended, it will automatically close.



Roof

Sunroof

On vehicles with a sunroof, theswitch is located on the overheadconsole.

The sunroof only operateswhen the ignition is in ON/RUNor ACC/ACCESSORY, or inRetained Accessory Power (RAP).See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9‑24.

Vent

The sunroof has an express-ventopen feature. From the closedposition, press the rear of thesunroof switch (B) to the firstdetent to vent the sunroof.To close the sunroof, press thefront of the sunroof switch (A)to the second detent.

Express-Open/Express-Close

To express-open the sunroof fromthe closed or vent position, fullypress and release the rear of theswitch (B). The sunroof opensautomatically. To stop the sunroofpartway, press the switch a secondtime. To express-close the sunroof,fully press and release the front ofthe switch (A). The sunroof closesautomatically. To stop the sunroofpartway, press the switch asecond time.

If the sunshade is closed, it opensautomatically with the sunroofbut can also be express-opened/express-closed by using thesunshade control (C) or (D).The sunshade cannot be fullyclosed with the sunroof open.



To express-open the sunshade fromthe closed position, fully press andrelease the rear of the switch (C).The sunshade opens automatically.To stop the sunshade partway,press the switch a second time.To express-close the sunshadefully press and release the frontof the switch (D). The sunshadecloses automatically. To stop thesunshade partway, press the switcha second time.

Notice: Forcing the sunshadeforward of the sliding glasspanel may cause damage andthe sunroof may not operateproperly. Always close theglass panel before closingthe sunshade.

The sunroof glass panel cannot beopened or closed if the vehicle hasan electrical failure.

Anti-Pinch Feature

If an object is in the path ofthe sunroof while it is closing,the anti-pinch feature will detectthe object and stop the sunrooffrom closing at the point of theobstruction. The sunroof andsunshade will then return to theopen or vent position. To closethe sunroof once the obstructionhas been removed, refer to"Express-Open/Express-Close"earlier in this section. Dirt and debris may collect on

the sunroof seal or in the track.This could cause issues withsunroof operation and noise.It could also plug the water drainagesystem. Periodically open thesunroof and remove any obstaclesor loose debris. Wipe the sunroofseal and roof sealing area using aclean cloth, mild soap, and water.Do not remove grease from thesunroof.


Seats and Restraints 3-1

Seats andRestraints

Head RestraintsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Front SeatsSeat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-5Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Heated and Ventilated FrontSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Rear SeatsRear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11Rear SeatPass-Through Door . . . . . . . . 3-13

Safety BeltsSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27

Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-27Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-27Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-28

Airbag SystemAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-31When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34

How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34

What Will You See After anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37

Servicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41


3-2 Seats and Restraints

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-42

Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-43Replacing Airbag SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-43

Child RestraintsOlder Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44Infants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46

Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-49Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-51Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH System) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-61

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61

Securing Child Restraints(Front Passenger Seat) . . . . 3-63

Head RestraintsThe vehicle's front seats haveadjustable head restraints in theoutboard seating positions.

The vehicle's rear seats haveadjustable head restraints in theoutboard seating positions.

{ WARNING

With head restraints that arenot installed and adjustedproperly, there is a greaterchance that occupants will suffera neck/spinal injury in a crash.Do not drive until the headrestraints for all occupants areinstalled and adjusted properly.

Adjust the head restraint so that thetop of the restraint is at the sameheight as the top of the occupant'shead. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.



Front Seat

To raise or lower the head restraint,press the release button located onthe side of the head restraint andpull up or push the head restraintdown and release the button.

Pull and push on the head restraintafter the button is released to makesure that it is locked in place.

The front head restraints are notdesigned to be removed.

Rear Seat

Pull the head restraint up to raise it.To lower the head restraint, pressthe release button, located on thehead restraint post on the top of theseatback, while you push the headrestraint down.

Push down on the head restraintafter the button is released to makesure that it is locked in place.

If you are installing a child restraintin the rear seat, see “Securing aChild Restraint Designed for theLATCH System” under LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3‑52.



Front Seats

Seat AdjustmentSeat Position

{ WARNING

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust amanual driver seat while thevehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle andconfuse you, or make you pusha pedal when you do not want to.Adjust the driver seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

To adjust the seat position:

1. Pull the handle under the front ofthe seat cushion.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release the handle.

3. Try to move the seat back andforth to be sure it is locked inplace.

Height Adjustment

Press and hold the top or bottomof the switch to raise or lower theseat. Release the switch when thedesired height is reached.



Power Seat Adjustment

To adjust a power seat:. Move the seat forward or

rearward by sliding the controlforward or rearward.

. Raise or lower the front or rearpart of the seat cushion bymoving the front or rear ofthe control up or down.

. Raise or lower the entire seatby moving the entire control upor down.

Memory Seats

On vehicles with the memoryfeature, the “1” and “2” buttonson the outboard side of the driverseat are used to manually saveand recall the driver seat andoutside mirror positions. Thesemanually stored positions arereferred to as Button Memorypositions.

The vehicle will also automaticallysave driver seat and outsidemirror positions to the currentdriver Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter when the ignition isplaced in OFF. These automaticallystored positions are referredto as RKE Memory positions.See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2‑4for more information.

Storing Button Memory Positions

To save positions into ButtonMemory:

1. Adjust the driver seat, seatbackrecliner, and both outside mirrorsto the desired driving positions.

2. Press and release theMEM (Memory) button.

3. Press “1” until a beep sounds.

4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 for asecond driver using “2.”



Recalling Button MemoryPositions

To recall the manually savedButton Memory positions, pressand hold “1” or “2.” The driver seatand outside mirrors move to thepositions stored to those buttonswhen pressed. Releasing “1” or “2”before the stored positions arereached stops the recall.

If something has blocked thedriver seat while recalling amemory position, the recall maystop. Remove the obstruction;then press and hold the appropriatemanual control for the memory itemthat is not recalling for two seconds.Try recalling the memory positionagain by pressing the appropriatememory button. If the memoryposition is still not recalling,see your dealer for service.

Recalling RKE Memory Positions(Memory Remote Recall)

The Memory Remote Recallfeature can recall the driver seatand outside mirrors to previouslystored RKE Memory positionswhen entering the vehicle.

Every time the ignition is placedin OFF, the positions of the driverseat and outside mirrors areautomatically stored to the RKEtransmitter that was used to startthe vehicle. These positions arecalled RKE Memory positions andmay be different than the previouslymentioned Button Memory positionssaved to the “1” or “2” buttons.

To automatically recall RKEMemory positions, unlockthe driver door with the RKEtransmitter, and open the driverdoor. On vehicles with KeylessAccess, opening the driver doorwhen an RKE transmitter ispresent will activate the RKEMemory recall. If the driver dooris already open, pressing theRKE transmitter K button will alsoactivate the RKE Memory recall.The driver seat and outside mirrorswill move to the previously savedRKE Memory positions.



This feature is turned on or off usingthe vehicle personalization menu.See “Remote Recall” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑39 formore information.

To stop recall movement, pressone of the memory, power mirror,or power seat controls.

If something has blocked thedriver seat while recalling amemory position, the recall maystop. Remove the obstruction;then press and hold the appropriatemanual control for the memory itemthat is not recalling for two seconds.Try recalling the memory positionagain by opening the driver doorand pressing the RKE transmitter Kbutton. If the memory position isstill not recalling, see your dealerfor service.

Easy Exit Driver Seat

This feature moves the seatrearward allowing the drivermore room to exit the vehicle.

To activate, place the ignition inOFF and open the driver door. If thedriver door is already open, placingthe ignition in OFF will activate theeasy exit driver seat.

This feature is turned on or offusing the vehicle personalizationmenu. See “Driver Seat Easy Exit”under Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑39 for more information.

To stop recall movement, pressone of the memory or power seatcontrols.

If something has blocked the driverseat while recalling the exit position,the recall may stop. Remove theobstruction; then press and holdthe power seat control rearward fortwo seconds. Try recalling the exitposition again. If the exit position isstill not recalling, see your dealerfor service.

Lumbar Adjustment

To increase or decrease lumbarsupport, press and hold the frontor rear of the control.

To raise or lower lumbar support,press and hold the top or bottomof the control.

Release the control when theseatback reaches the desiredlevel of lumbar support.

See Power Seat Adjustment onpage 3‑5 for more information.



Reclining Seatbacks

{ WARNING

Sitting in a reclined position whenthe vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even when buckledup, the safety belts cannot dotheir job when reclined like this.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

The shoulder belt cannot do itsjob because it will not be againstyour body. Instead, it will be infront of you. In a crash, you couldgo into it, receiving neck or otherinjuries.

The lap belt cannot do its jobeither. In a crash, the belt couldgo up over your abdomen.The belt forces would be there,not at your pelvic bones. Thiscould cause serious internalinjuries.

For proper protection when thevehicle is in motion, have theseatback upright. Then sit wellback in the seat and wear thesafety belt properly.

Manual Reclining Seatbacks

{ WARNING

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust amanual driver seat while thevehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle andconfuse you, or make you pusha pedal when you do not want to.Adjust the driver seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

{ WARNING

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.



To recline the seatback:

1. Lift the recline lever.

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, and thenrelease the lever to lock theseatback in place.

3. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked.

To return the seatback to the uprightposition:

1. Lift the lever fully withoutapplying pressure to theseatback, and the seatback willreturn to the upright position.

2. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked.

Power Reclining Seatbacks

To adjust a power seatback,if equipped:. Tilt the top of the control

rearward to recline.. Tilt the top of the control forward

to raise.



Heated and VentilatedFront Seats

{ WARNING

If you cannot feel temperaturechange or pain to the skin, theseat heater may cause burnseven at low temperatures.To reduce the risk of burns,people with such a conditionshould use care when usingthe seat heater, especially forlong periods of time. Do notplace anything on the seat thatinsulates against heat, suchas a blanket, cushion, cover,or similar item. This may causethe seat heater to overheat.An overheated seat heater maycause a burn or may damagethe seat.

Heated and VentilatedSeat Buttons Shown,

Heated Seat Buttons Similar

If available, the buttons are on theclimate control panel. To operate,the ignition must be on.

Press L to heat the seat cushion

and seatback or {, if equipped,to ventilate the seat.

Press the button once for thehighest setting. With each pressof the button, the seat will changeto the next lower setting, and thento the off setting. The lights indicatethree for the highest setting andone for the lowest.

The passenger seat may takelonger to heat up.



Remote Start Heated andVentilated Seats

During a remote start, the heatedor ventilated seats, if equipped,can be turned on automatically.They are canceled when the ignitionis turned on. Press the button to usethe heated or ventilated seats afterthe vehicle is started.

The heated or ventilated seatindicator lights on the button donot turn on during a remote start.

The heated seat temperatureperformance of an unoccupied seatmay be reduced. This is normal.

The heated or ventilated seatswill not turn on during a remotestart unless they are enabled inthe vehicle personalization menu.See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 2‑8 and “Remote StartHeated Seats” or “Remote StartCooled Seats” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑39for more information.

Rear SeatsFolding the Seatback

Either side of the seatback can befolded down for more cargo space.Fold a seatback only when thevehicle is not moving.

Notice: Folding a rear seat withthe safety belts still fastened maycause damage to the seat or thesafety belts. Always unbuckle thesafety belts and return them totheir normal stowed positionbefore folding a rear seat.

To fold the seatback down:

1. Be sure the safety belt is in theretainer clip.



2. Pull on the lever on the top ofthe seatback to unlock it.

A tab near the seatback leverraises when the seatback isunlocked.

3. Fold the seatback down.

Repeat Steps 1 through 3 for theother seatback, if desired.

Raising the Seatback

{ WARNING

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

{ WARNING

A safety belt that is improperlyrouted, not properly attached,or twisted will not provide theprotection needed in a crash.The person wearing the belt couldbe seriously injured. After raisingthe rear seatback, always checkto be sure that the safety beltsare properly routed and attached,and are not twisted.

To raise a seatback:

1. Lift the seatback up and pushit rearward to lock it in place.Make sure the safety belt isin the retainer clip and isnot twisted or caught in theseatback.

A tab near the seatback leverretracts when the seatback islocked in place.

2. Push and pull the top of theseatback to be sure it is lockedinto position.

3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for theother seatback, if necessary.

When the seat is not in use, itshould be kept in the upright,locked position.



Rear SeatPass-Through Door

The vehicle may have a door in therear seat that provides access to thetrunk.

Lower the rear seat armrest toaccess the pass-through door. Pullthe release handle to open the door.To close, push and latch the door.

Safety BeltsThis section of the manualdescribes how to use safety beltsproperly. It also describes somethings not to do with safety belts.

{ WARNING

Do not let anyone ride wherea safety belt cannot be wornproperly. In a crash, if you oryour passenger(s) are notwearing safety belts, the injuriescan be much worse. You can hitthings inside the vehicle harderor be ejected from the vehicle.You and your passenger(s) canbe seriously injured or killed.In the same crash, you mightnot be, if you are buckled up.Always fasten your safety belt,and check that your passenger(s)are restrained properly too.

{ WARNING

It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area, inside or outsideof a vehicle. In a collision, peopleriding in these areas are morelikely to be seriously injured orkilled. Do not allow people to ridein any area of your vehicle thatis not equipped with seats andsafety belts. Be sure everyonein the vehicle is in a seat andusing a safety belt properly.

This vehicle has indicators as areminder to buckle the safety belts.See Safety Belt Reminders onpage 5‑14 for additional information.



In most states and in all Canadianprovinces, the law requires wearingsafety belts. Here is why:

You never know if you will be ina crash. If you do have a crash,you do not know if it will be aserious one.

A few crashes are mild, and somecrashes can be so serious thateven buckled up, a person wouldnot survive. But most crashes arein between. In many of them, peoplewho buckle up can survive andsometimes walk away. Withoutsafety belts they could have beenbadly hurt or killed.

After more than 40 years of safetybelts in vehicles, the facts are clear.In most crashes buckling up doesmatter ... a lot!

Why Safety Belts Work

When you ride in or on anything,you go as fast as it goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Supposeit is just a seat on wheels.

Put someone on it.



Get it up to speed. Then stop thevehicle. The rider does not stop.

The person keeps going untilstopped by something. In a realvehicle, it could be the windshield...

or the instrument panel...



or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow downas the vehicle does. You get moretime to stop. You stop over moredistance, and your strongest bonestake the forces. That is why safetybelts make such good sense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicleafter a crash if I am wearing asafety belt?

A: You could be — whether youare wearing a safety belt ornot. But your chance of beingconscious during and after anaccident, so you can unbuckleand get out, is much greater ifyou are belted. And you canunbuckle a safety belt, even ifyou are upside down.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, whyshould I have to wear safetybelts?

A: Airbags are supplementalsystems only; so they workwith safety belts — not insteadof them. Whether or not anairbag is provided, all occupantsstill have to buckle up to getthe most protection. That istrue not only in frontal collisions,but especially in side and othercollisions.

Q: If I am a good driver, and Inever drive far from home,why should I wear safetybelts?

A: You may be an excellent driver,but if you are in a crash — evenone that is not your fault — youand your passenger(s) can behurt. Being a good driver doesnot protect you from thingsbeyond your control, such asbad drivers.

Most accidents occur within40 km (25mi) of home. And thegreatest number of seriousinjuries and deaths occurat speeds of less than65 km/h (40 mph).

Safety belts are for everyone.



How to Wear Safety BeltsProperlyThis section is only for people ofadult size.

Be aware that there are specialthings to know about safety beltsand children. And there are differentrules for smaller children andinfants. If a child will be riding inthe vehicle, see Older Children onpage 3‑44 or Infants and YoungChildren on page 3‑46. Follow thoserules for everyone's protection.

It is very important for all occupantsto buckle up. Statistics show thatunbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who arewearing safety belts.

Occupants who are not buckled upcan be thrown out of the vehicle in acrash. And they can strike others inthe vehicle who are wearing safetybelts.

First, before you or yourpassenger(s) wear a safety belt,there is important informationyou should know.

Sit up straight and always keepyour feet on the floor in front of you.The lap part of the belt should be

worn low and snug on the hips,just touching the thighs. In a crash,this applies force to the strongpelvic bones and you would beless likely to slide under the lapbelt. If you slid under it, the beltwould apply force on your abdomen.This could cause serious or evenfatal injuries. The shoulder beltshould go over the shoulder andacross the chest. These parts ofthe body are best able to takebelt restraining forces.

The shoulder belt locks if there is asudden stop or crash.



Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose.It will not give as muchprotection this way.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously hurt if theshoulder belt is too loose. In acrash, you would move forwardtoo much, which could increaseinjury. The shoulder belt shouldfit snugly against your body.


A: The lap belt is too loose.It will not give nearly asmuch protection this way.



{ WARNING

You can be seriously hurt if thelap belt is too loose. In a crash,you could slide under the lapbelt and apply force on yourabdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries.The lap belt should be wornlow and snug on the hips,just touching the thighs.


A: The belt is buckled in the wrongbuckle.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured ifthe belt is buckled in the wrongplace like this. In a crash, the beltwould go up over your abdomen.The belt forces would be there,not on the pelvic bones. Thiscould cause serious internalinjuries. Always buckle the beltinto the buckle nearest you.




A: The belt is over an armrest.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured ifthe belt goes over an armrest likethis. The belt would be much toohigh. In a crash, you can slideunder the belt. The belt forcewould then be applied on theabdomen, not on the pelvicbones, and that could causeserious or fatal injuries. Be surethe belt goes under the armrests.


A: The shoulder belt is worn underthe arm. It should be worn overthe shoulder at all times.



{ WARNING

You can be seriously injuredif you wear the shoulder beltunder your arm. In a crash,your body would move too farforward, which would increase thechance of head and neck injury.Also, the belt would apply toomuch force to the ribs, which arenot as strong as shoulder bones.You could also severely injureinternal organs like your liver orspleen. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.


A: The belt is behind the body.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injuredby not wearing the lap-shoulderbelt properly. In a crash, youwould not be restrained by theshoulder belt. Your body couldmove too far forward increasingthe chance of head and neckinjury. You might also slideunder the lap belt. The beltforce would then be appliedright on the abdomen. That couldcause serious or fatal injuries.The shoulder belt should go overthe shoulder and across thechest.




A: The belt is twisted acrossthe body.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured by atwisted belt. In a crash, you wouldnot have the full width of the beltto spread impact forces. If a beltis twisted, make it straight so itcan work properly, or ask yourdealer to fix it.

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in the vehiclehave a lap-shoulder belt.

The following instructions explainhow to wear a lap-shoulder beltproperly.

1. Adjust the seat, if the seat isadjustable, so you can sit upstraight. To see how, see “Seats”in the Index.

2. Pick up the latch plate and pullthe belt across you. Do not let itget twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lock ifyou pull the belt across you veryquickly. If this happens, let thebelt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across youmore slowly.



If the shoulder portion of apassenger belt is pulled outall the way, the child restraintlocking feature may be engaged.If this happens, let the belt goback all the way and start again.

3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.

Pull up on the latch plate tomake sure it is secure. If the beltis not long enough, see SafetyBelt Extender on page 3‑27.

Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

If equipped with a shoulderbelt height adjuster, move itto the height that is right foryou. See “Shoulder Belt HeightAdjustment” later in this sectionfor instructions on use andimportant safety information.

4. To make the lap part tight,pull up on the shoulder belt.

It may be necessary to pullstitching on the safety beltthrough the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smalleroccupants.

To unlatch the belt, push the buttonon the buckle. The belt shouldreturn to its stowed position. Slidethe latch plate up the safety beltwebbing, when the safety belt is notin use. The latch plate should reston the stitching on the safety belt,near the guide loop on the side wall.

Before a door is closed, be surethe safety belt is out of the way. If adoor is slammed against a safetybelt, damage can occur to both thesafety belt and the vehicle.



Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

The vehicle has a shoulder beltheight adjuster for the driver andright front passenger seatingpositions.

Adjust the height so theshoulder portion of the belt ison the shoulder and not fallingoff of it. The belt should be closeto, but not contacting, the neck.Improper shoulder belt heightadjustment could reduce theeffectiveness of the safety belt ina crash. See How to Wear SafetyBelts Properly on page 3‑17.

Press the release button (A) andmove the height adjuster to thedesired position. The adjustercan be moved up by pushing theslide/trim up. After the adjuster isset to the desired position, try tomove it down without pushing therelease button to make sure it haslocked into position.

Safety Belt Pretensioners

This vehicle has safety beltpretensioners for front outboardoccupants. Although the safetybelt pretensioners cannot be seen,they are part of the safety beltassembly. They can help tightenthe safety belts during the earlystages of a moderate to severefrontal and near frontal crash ifthe threshold conditions forpretensioner activation are met.

Pretensioners work only once. If thepretensioners activate in a crash,the pretensioners and probablyother parts of the vehicle's safetybelt system will need to be replaced.See Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts After a Crash on page 3‑28.



Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides

This vehicle may have rear shoulderbelt comfort guides. If not, theyare available through your dealer.The guides may provide addedsafety belt comfort for older childrenwho have outgrown booster seatsand for some adults. When installedand properly adjusted, the comfortguide positions the belt away fromthe neck and head.

There is one guide for each outsidepassenger position in the rear seat.Here is how to install a comfortguide to the safety belt:

1. Remove the guide from itsstorage pocket on the side ofthe seat.

2. Place the guide over the belt,and insert the two edges of thebelt into the slots of the guide.



3. Be sure that the belt isnot twisted and it lies flat.The elastic cord must be underthe belt and the guide on top.

{ WARNING

A safety belt that is not properlyworn may not provide theprotection needed in a crash.The person wearing the belt couldbe seriously injured. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulderand across the chest. These partsof the body are best able to takebelt restraining forces.

4. Buckle, position, and releasethe safety belt as describedpreviously in this section. Makesure the shoulder portion of thebelt is on the shoulder and notfalling off of it. The belt shouldbe close to, but not contacting,the neck.



Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancySafety belts work for everyone,including pregnant women. Like alloccupants, they are more likely tobe seriously injured if they do notwear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should weara lap-shoulder belt, and the lapportion should be worn as lowas possible, below the rounding,throughout the pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus isto protect the mother. When a safetybelt is worn properly, it is more likelythat the fetus will not be hurt in acrash. For pregnant women, as foranyone, the key to making safetybelts effective is wearing themproperly.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle's safety belt will fastenaround you, you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not longenough, your dealer will order youan extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat youwill wear, so the extender will belong enough for you. To help avoidpersonal injury, do not let someoneelse use it, and use it only for theseat it is made to fit. The extenderhas been designed for adults.Never use it for securing child seats.To wear it, attach it to the regularsafety belt. For more information,see the instruction sheet thatcomes with the extender.

Safety System CheckNow and then, check that the safetybelt reminder light, safety belts,buckles, latch plates, retractors,and anchorages are workingproperly. Look for any other looseor damaged safety belt system partsthat might keep a safety belt systemfrom doing its job. See your dealerto have it repaired. Torn or frayedsafety belts may not protect you ina crash. They can rip apart underimpact forces. If a belt is torn orfrayed, get a new one right away.

Make sure the safety belt reminderlight is working. See Safety BeltReminders on page 5‑14 for moreinformation.

Keep safety belts clean and dry.See Safety Belt Care on page 3‑28.



Safety Belt CareKeep belts clean and dry.

{ WARNING

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them.In a crash, they might not be ableto provide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts After aCrash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the safetybelt system in the vehicle.A damaged safety belt systemmay not properly protect theperson using it, resulting inserious injury or even death ina crash. To help make sure thesafety belt systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soonas possible.

After a minor crash, replacement ofsafety belts may not be necessary.But the safety belt assemblies thatwere used during any crash mayhave been stressed or damaged.See your dealer to have the safetybelt assemblies inspected orreplaced.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the safety beltsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Have the safety belt pretensionerschecked if the vehicle has been in acrash, or if the airbag readiness lightstays on after you start the vehicleor while you are driving. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑14.



Airbag SystemThe vehicle has the followingairbags:. A frontal airbag for the driver.. A frontal airbag for the right front

passenger.. A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the driver.. A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the right frontpassenger.

. A roof-rail airbag for the driverand the passenger seateddirectly behind the driver.

. A roof-rail airbag for theright front passenger andthe passenger seated directlybehind the right front passenger.

The vehicle may have the followingairbags:. A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the rear seatpassenger seated directlybehind the driver.

. A seat-mounted side impactairbag for the rear seatpassenger seated directlybehind the right front passenger.

All of the airbags in the vehicle willhave the word AIRBAG embossedin the trim or on an attached labelnear the deployment opening.

For frontal airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear on the middlepart of the steering wheel for thedriver and on the instrument panelfor the right front passenger.

With seat-mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAG willappear on the side of the seatbackclosest to the door.

With roof-rail airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear along theheadliner or trim.

Airbags are designed to supplementthe protection provided by safetybelts. Even though today's airbagsare also designed to help reducethe risk of injury from the force of aninflating bag, all airbags must inflatevery quickly to do their job.



Here are the most important thingsto know about the airbag system:

{ WARNING

You can be severely injured orkilled in a crash if you are notwearing a safety belt— even ifthe vehicle has airbags. Airbagsare designed to work with safetybelts, but do not replace them.Also, airbags are not designed todeploy in every crash. In somecrashes safety belts are the onlyrestraint. See When Should anAirbag Inflate? on page 3‑32.

Wearing a safety belt during acrash helps reduce your chanceof hitting things inside the vehicleor being ejected from it. Airbagsare “supplemental restraints” tothe safety belts. Everyone in thevehicle should wear a safety beltproperly—whether or not there isan airbag for that person.

{ WARNING

Airbags inflate with great force,faster than the blink of an eye.Anyone who is up against, orvery close to, any airbag when itinflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Do not sit unnecessarilyclose to any airbag, as you wouldbe if you were sitting on the edgeof the seat or leaning forward.Safety belts help keep you inposition before and during acrash. Always wear a safety belt,even with airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possiblewhile still maintaining control ofthe vehicle.

Occupants should not lean onor sleep against the door or sidewindows in seating positions withseat-mounted side impact airbagsand/or roof-rail airbags.

{ WARNING

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbagwhen it inflates can be seriouslyinjured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer protectionfor adults and older children,but not for young children andinfants. Neither the vehicle'ssafety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them.Young children and infantsneed the protection that a childrestraint system can provide.Always secure children properlyin the vehicle. To read how, seeOlder Children on page 3‑44 orInfants and Young Children onpage 3‑46.



There is an airbag readiness lighton the instrument panel cluster,which shows the airbag symbol.The system checks the airbagelectrical system for malfunctions.The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑14for more information.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver frontal airbag is in themiddle of the steering wheel.

The right front passenger frontalairbag is in the instrument panel onthe passenger side.

Driver Side Shown,Passenger Side Similar

The seat-mounted side impactairbags for the driver and right frontpassenger are in the side of theseatbacks closest to the door.

The roof-rail airbags for the driver,right front passenger, and secondrow outboard passengers are in theceiling above the side windows.



Rear Seat Driver Side Shown,Passenger Side Similar

If the vehicle has second rowseat‐mounted side impact airbags,they are in the sides of the rearseatback closest to the door.

{ WARNING

If something is between anoccupant and an airbag, theairbag might not inflate properlyor it might force the object into

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

that person causing severeinjury or even death. The pathof an inflating airbag must bekept clear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and anairbag, and do not attach or putanything on the steering wheelhub or on or near any otherairbag covering.

Do not use seat accessoriesthat block the inflation path of aseat-mounted side impact airbag.

Never secure anything to the roofof a vehicle with roof-rail airbagsby routing a rope or tie downthrough any door or windowopening. If you do, the pathof an inflating roof-rail airbagwill be blocked.

When Should an AirbagInflate?Frontal airbags are designedto inflate in moderate to severefrontal or near frontal crashes tohelp reduce the potential for severeinjuries mainly to the driver's or rightfront passenger's head and chest.However, they are only designedto inflate if the impact exceedsa predetermined deploymentthreshold. Deployment thresholdsare used to predict how severe acrash is likely to be in time for theairbags to inflate and help restrainthe occupants.

Whether the frontal airbags willor should deploy is not based onhow fast your vehicle is traveling.It depends largely on what you hit,the direction of the impact, and howquickly your vehicle slows down.



Frontal airbags may inflateat different crash speeds.For example:. If the vehicle hits a stationary

object, the airbags could inflateat a different crash speed than ifthe vehicle hits a moving object.

. If the vehicle hits an objectthat deforms, the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits an objectthat does not deform.

. If the vehicle hits a narrow object(like a pole), the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a wideobject (like a wall).

. If the vehicle goes into an objectat an angle, the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle goes straightinto the object.

Thresholds can also vary withspecific vehicle design.

Frontal airbags are not intended toinflate during vehicle rollovers, rearimpacts, or in many side impacts.

In addition, the vehicle hasdual-stage frontal airbags.Dual-stage airbags adjust therestraint according to crashseverity. The vehicle has electronicfrontal sensors, which helpthe sensing system distinguishbetween a moderate frontalimpact and a more severe frontalimpact. For moderate frontalimpacts, dual-stage airbags inflateat a level less than full deployment.For more severe frontal impacts,full deployment occurs.

The vehicle has seat-mountedside impact and roof-rail airbags.See Airbag System on page 3‑29.Seat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags are intended toinflate in moderate to severe sidecrashes. In addition, these roof‐railairbags are intended to inflateduring a rollover or in a severefrontal impact. Seat-mounted sideimpact and roof-rail airbags willinflate if the crash severity is abovethe system's designed thresholdlevel. The threshold level can varywith specific vehicle design.

Roof‐rail airbags are not intended toinflate in rear impacts. Both roof‐railairbags will deploy when either sideof the vehicle is struck or if thesensing system predicts that thevehicle is about to roll over, or ina severe frontal impact.



In any particular crash, no onecan say whether an airbag shouldhave inflated simply because ofthe damage to a vehicle or becauseof what the repair costs were.For frontal airbags, inflation isdetermined by what the vehiclehits, the angle of the impact, andhow quickly the vehicle slows down.For seat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags, deployment isdetermined by the location andseverity of the side impact.

In a rollover event, roof‐rail airbagdeployment is determined by thedirection of the roll.

What Makes an AirbagInflate?In a deployment event, the sensingsystem sends an electrical signaltriggering a release of gas from theinflator. Gas from the inflator fills theairbag causing the bag to break outof the cover and deploy. The inflator,the airbag, and related hardware areall part of the airbag module.

Frontal airbag modules are locatedinside the steering wheel andinstrument panel. For vehicles withseat-mounted side impact airbags,there are airbag modules in the sideof the front seatbacks closest tothe door. For vehicles with roof-railairbags, there are airbag modulesin the ceiling of the vehicle, near theside windows that have occupantseating positions.

How Does an AirbagRestrain?In moderate to severe frontal ornear frontal collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the steeringwheel or the instrument panel.In moderate to severe sidecollisions, even belted occupantscan contact the inside of thevehicle.

Airbags supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts. Frontalairbags distribute the force ofthe impact more evenly over theoccupant's upper body, stoppingthe occupant more gradually.Seat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags distribute theforce of the impact more evenlyover the occupant's upper body.



But airbags would not help inmany types of collisions, primarilybecause the occupant's motionis not toward those airbags.See When Should an AirbagInflate? on page 3‑32 for moreinformation.

Airbags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplementto safety belts.

What Will You See Afteran Airbag Inflates?After the frontal airbags andseat-mounted side impact airbagsinflate, they quickly deflate, soquickly that some people maynot even realize an airbag inflated.Roof-rail airbags may still be at leastpartially inflated for some time afterthey deploy. Some components ofthe airbag module may be hot for

several minutes. For location of theairbag modules, see What Makesan Airbag Inflate? on page 3‑34.

The parts of the airbag that comeinto contact with you may be warm,but not too hot to touch. There maybe some smoke and dust comingfrom the vents in the deflatedairbags. Airbag inflation does notprevent the driver from seeing outof the windshield or being able tosteer the vehicle, nor does it preventpeople from leaving the vehicle.

{ WARNING

When an airbag inflates, theremay be dust in the air. This dustcould cause breathing problemsfor people with a history ofasthma or other breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in the

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

vehicle should get out as soonas it is safe to do so. If you havebreathing problems but cannotget out of the vehicle after anairbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door.If you experience breathingproblems following an airbagdeployment, you should seekmedical attention.

The vehicle has a feature that mayautomatically unlock the doors, turnon the interior lamps and hazardwarning flashers, and shut off thefuel system after the airbags inflate.You can lock the doors, turn off theinterior lamps and hazard warningflashers by using the controls forthose features.



{ WARNING

A crash severe enough toinflate the airbags may havealso damaged important functionsin the vehicle, such as the fuelsystem, brake and steeringsystems, etc. Even if the vehicleappears to be drivable after amoderate crash, there may beconcealed damage that couldmake it difficult to safely operatethe vehicle.

Use caution if you should attemptto restart the engine after a crashhas occurred.

In many crashes severe enoughto inflate the airbag, windshieldsare broken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakagemay also occur from the right frontpassenger airbag.. Airbags are designed to inflate

only once. After an airbaginflates, you will need somenew parts for the airbag system.If you do not get them, theairbag system will not be thereto help protect you in anothercrash. A new system will includeairbag modules and possiblyother parts. The service manualfor your vehicle covers the needto replace other parts.

. The vehicle has a crashsensing and diagnostic modulewhich records information aftera crash. See Vehicle DataRecording and Privacy onpage 13‑18 and Event DataRecorders on page 13‑18.

. Let only qualified technicianswork on the airbag systems.Improper service can mean thatan airbag system will not workproperly. See your dealer forservice.



Passenger SensingSystemThe vehicle has a passengersensing system for the right frontpassenger position. The passengerairbag status indicator will be visibleon the instrument panel when thevehicle is started.

The words ON and OFF will bevisible during the system check.If you are using remote start,

if equipped, to start the vehicle froma distance you may not see thesystem check. When the systemcheck is complete, either the wordON or the word OFF will be visible.See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5‑15.

The passenger sensing systemturns off the right front passengerfrontal airbag under certainconditions. The driver airbags,seat‐mounted side impact airbags,and roof‐rail airbags are not affectedby the passenger sensing system.

The passenger sensing systemworks with sensors that are partof the right front passenger seat.

The sensors are designed to detectthe presence of a properly-seatedoccupant and determine if theright front passenger frontal airbagshould be enabled (may inflate)or not.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlysecured in a rear seat in thecorrect child restraint for theirweight and size.

We recommend that children besecured in a rear seat, including:an infant or a child riding in arear-facing child restraint; a childriding in a forward-facing child seat;an older child riding in a boosterseat; and children, who are largeenough, using safety belts.



A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seatin the front.” This is because the riskto the rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the rightfront passenger airbag inflates.This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag,no system is fail-safe. No onecan guarantee that an airbag willnot deploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though theairbag is turned off.

Secure rear-facing childrestraints in a rear seat, even ifthe airbag is off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag if:. The right front passenger seat is

unoccupied.. The system determines that an

infant is present in a rear-facinginfant seat.

. The system determines that asmall child is present in a childrestraint.

. The system determines thata small child is present in abooster seat.

. A right front passenger takeshis/her weight off of the seat fora period of time.

. The right front passenger seat isoccupied by a smaller person,such as a child who hasoutgrown child restraints.

. Or, if there is a critical problemwith the airbag system or thepassenger sensing system.



When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag,the off indicator will light and staylit to remind you that the airbagsare off. See Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator on page 5‑15.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn on (may inflate)the right front passenger frontalairbag anytime the system sensesthat a person of adult size is sittingproperly in the right front passengerseat. When the passenger sensingsystem has allowed the airbag to beenabled, the on indicator will lightand stay lit to remind you that theairbag is active.

For some children who haveoutgrown child restraints and forvery small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turn

off the right front passengerfrontal airbag, depending uponthe person's seating postureand body build. Everyone in thevehicle who has outgrown childrestraints should wear a safetybelt properly — whether or notthere is an airbag for that person.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑14 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

If the On Indicator is Lit for aChild Restraint

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove the child restraint fromthe vehicle.

3. Remove any additional itemsfrom the seat such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

4. Reinstall the child restraintfollowing the directionsprovided by the child restraintmanufacturer and refer toSecuring Child Restraints(Rear Seat) on page 3‑61 orSecuring Child Restraints (FrontPassenger Seat) on page 3‑63.



5. If, after reinstalling the childrestraint and restarting thevehicle, the on indicator isstill lit, turn the vehicle off.Then slightly recline the vehicleseatback and adjust the seatcushion, if adjustable, to makesure that the vehicle seatbackis not pushing the child restraintinto the seat cushion.

Also make sure the childrestraint is not trapped underthe vehicle head restraint.If this happens, adjust thehead restraint. See HeadRestraints on page 3‑2.

6. Restart the vehicle.

If the on indicator is still lit,secure the child in the childrestraint in a rear seat positionin the vehicle, and check withyour dealer.

If the Off Indicator is Lit for anAdult-Size Occupant

If a person of adult-size is sittingin the right front passenger seat,but the off indicator is lit, it could bebecause that person is not sittingproperly in the seat. If this happens,

use the following steps to allow thesystem to detect that person andenable the right front passengerfrontal airbag:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove any additional materialfrom the seat, such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

3. Place the seatback in the fullyupright position.

4. Have the person sit upright inthe seat, centered on the seatcushion, with legs comfortablyextended.

5. Restart the vehicle and have theperson remain in this position fortwo to three minutes after the onindicator is lit.



Additional Factors AffectingSystem Operation

Safety belts help keep thepassenger in position on theseat during vehicle maneuversand braking, which helps thepassenger sensing systemmaintain the passenger airbagstatus. See “Safety Belts” and“Child Restraints” in the Index foradditional information about theimportance of proper restraint use.

A thick layer of additional material,such as a blanket or cushion,or aftermarket equipment suchas seat covers, seat heaters, andseat massagers can affect howwell the passenger sensing systemoperates. We recommend thatyou not use seat covers or otheraftermarket equipment except whenapproved by GM for your specificvehicle. See Adding Equipment tothe Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑42 for more informationabout modifications that canaffect how the system operates.

{ WARNING

Stowing of articles under thepassenger seat or between thepassenger seat cushion andseatback may interfere with theproper operation of the passengersensing system.

Servicing theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAirbags affect how the vehicleshould be serviced. There areparts of the airbag system inseveral places around the vehicle.Your dealer and the service manualhave information about servicingthe vehicle and the airbag system.To purchase a service manual,see Service Publications OrderingInformation on page 13‑15.

{ WARNING

For up to 10 seconds after theignition is turned off and thebattery is disconnected, an airbagcan still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if youare close to an airbag when itinflates. Avoid yellow connectors.They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, andmake sure the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so.



Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped VehicleQ: Is there anything I might add

to or change about the vehiclethat could keep the airbagsfrom working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things thatchange the vehicle's frame,bumper system, height, frontend or side sheet metal, theymay keep the airbag systemfrom working properly. Changingor moving any parts of the frontseats, safety belts, the airbagsensing and diagnostic module,steering wheel, instrumentpanel, roof-rail airbag modules,ceiling headliner or pillar garnishtrim, front sensors, side impactsensors, or airbag wiring canaffect the operation of the airbagsystem.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing systemfor the right front passengerposition, which includes sensors

that are part of the passengerseat. The passenger sensingsystem may not operateproperly if the original seattrim is replaced with non-GMcovers, upholstery or trim,or with GM covers, upholsteryor trim designed for a differentvehicle. Any object, such asan aftermarket seat heateror a comfort enhancing pador device, installed under oron top of the seat fabric, couldalso interfere with the operationof the passenger sensingsystem. This could eitherprevent proper deploymentof the passenger airbag(s) orprevent the passenger sensingsystem from properly turningoff the passenger airbag(s).See Passenger SensingSystem on page 3‑37.

If you have questions,call Customer Assistance.The phone numbers andaddresses for Customer

Assistance are in Step Twoof the Customer SatisfactionProcedure in this manual.See Customer SatisfactionProcedure (U.S. and Canada) onpage 13‑1 or CustomerSatisfaction Procedure (Mexico)on page 13‑3.

Q: Because I have a disability,I have to get my vehiclemodified. How can I find outwhether this will affect myairbag system?

A: If you have questions,call Customer Assistance.The phone numbers andaddresses for CustomerAssistance are in Step Twoof the Customer SatisfactionProcedure in this manual.See Customer SatisfactionProcedure (U.S. and Canada) onpage 13‑1 or CustomerSatisfaction Procedure (Mexico)on page 13‑3.



In addition, your dealer and theservice manual have informationabout the location of the airbagsensors, sensing and diagnosticmodule and airbag wiring.

Airbag System CheckThe airbag system does not needregularly scheduled maintenanceor replacement. Make sure theairbag readiness light is working.See Airbag Readiness Light onpage 5‑14 for more information.

Notice: If an airbag covering isdamaged, opened, or broken,the airbag may not work properly.Do not open or break the airbagcoverings. If there are anyopened or broken airbag covers,have the airbag covering and/orairbag module replaced. For thelocation of the airbag modules,see What Makes an AirbagInflate? on page 3‑34. See yourdealer for service.

Replacing Airbag SystemParts After a Crash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage theairbag systems in the vehicle.A damaged airbag systemmay not work properly andmay not protect you and yourpassenger(s) in a crash, resultingin serious injury or even death.To help make sure the airbagsystems are working properlyafter a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soonas possible.

If an airbag inflates, you will needto replace airbag system parts.See your dealer for service.

If the airbag readiness light stays onafter the vehicle is started or comeson when you are driving, the airbagsystem may not work properly.Have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag Readiness Lighton page 5‑14 for more information.



Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrownbooster seats should wear thevehicle's safety belts.

The manufacturer's instructions thatcome with the booster seat, statethe weight and height limitations forthat booster. Use a booster seatwith a lap-shoulder belt until thechild passes the below fit test:. Sit all the way back on the seat.

Do the knees bend at the seatedge? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.Does the shoulder belt rest onthe shoulder? If yes, continue.If no, then return to thebooster seat.

. Does the lap belt fit low andsnug on the hips, touching thethighs? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Can proper safety belt fit bemaintained for the length ofthe trip? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

Q: What is the proper way towear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulderbelt can provide. The shoulderbelt should not cross the faceor neck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, justtouching the top of the thighs.This applies belt force to thechild's pelvic bones in a crash.It should never be worn over theabdomen, which could causesevere or even fatal internalinjuries in a crash.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are saferwhen properly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.



In a crash, children who are notbuckled up can strike other peoplewho are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Olderchildren need to use safety beltsproperly.

{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never allow two children to wearthe same safety belt. The safetybelt can not properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, the twochildren can be crushed togetherand seriously injured. A safetybelt must be used by only oneperson at a time.

{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never allow a child to wear thesafety belt with the shoulder beltbehind their back. A child can beseriously injured by not wearingthe lap-shoulder belt properly.In a crash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt.The child could move too far

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

forward increasing the chance ofhead and neck injury. The childmight also slide under the lapbelt. The belt force would thenbe applied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.



Infants and YoungChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needsprotection! This includes infantsand all other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age andsize of the traveler changes theneed, for everyone, to use safetyrestraints. In fact, the law in everystate in the United States and inevery Canadian province sayschildren up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{ WARNING

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder beltis wrapped around their neckand the safety belt continuesto tighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and neverallow children to play with thesafety belts.

Airbags plus lap‐shoulder beltsoffer protection for adults and olderchildren, but not for young children

and infants. Neither the vehicle'ssafety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Everytime infants and young children ridein vehicles, they should have theprotection provided by appropriatechild restraints.

Children who are not restrainedproperly can strike other people,or can be thrown out of the vehicle.



{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never hold an infant or achild while riding in a vehicle.Due to crash forces, an infantor a child will become so heavyit is not possible to hold it duringa crash. For example, in a crashat only 40 km/h (25 mph), a5.5 kg (12 lb) infant will suddenlybecome a 110 kg (240 lb) force ona person's arms. An infant shouldbe secured in an appropriaterestraint.

{ WARNING

Never do this.

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Never put a rear-facingchild restraint in the right frontseat. Secure a rear-facing childrestraint in a rear seat. It is also

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

better to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in a rear seat. If youmust secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right frontseat, always move the frontpassenger seat as far backas it will go.



Q: What are the different types ofadd-on child restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, whichare purchased by the vehicleowner, are available in fourbasic types. Selection of aparticular restraint should takeinto consideration not onlythe child's weight, height, andage but also whether or notthe restraint will be compatiblewith the motor vehicle in whichit will be used.

For most basic types of childrestraints, there are manydifferent models available.When purchasing a childrestraint, be sure it is designedto be used in a motor vehicle.If it is, the restraint will have alabel saying that it meets federalmotor vehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer'sinstructions that come with therestraint state the weight andheight limitations for a particularchild restraint. In addition, thereare many kinds of restraintsavailable for children withspecial needs.

{ WARNING

To reduce the risk of neck andhead injury during a crash,infants need complete support.This is because an infant's neckis not fully developed and its headweighs so much compared withthe rest of its body. In a crash,an infant in a rear-facing childrestraint settles into the restraint,so the crash forces can bedistributed across the strongestpart of an infant's body, the backand shoulders. Infants shouldalways be secured in rear-facingchild restraints.

{ WARNING

A young child's hip bones are stillso small that the vehicle's regularsafety belt may not remain lowon the hip bones, as it should.Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child's abdomen. In a crash,the belt would apply force on abody area that is unprotected byany bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatalinjuries. To reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries duringa crash, young children shouldalways be secured in appropriatechild restraints.



Child Restraint Systems

(A) Rear‐Facing Infant Seat

A rear-facing infant seat (A)provides restraint with the seatingsurface against the back of theinfant.

The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts tokeep the infant positioned in therestraint.

(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat

A forward-facing child seat (B)provides restraint for the child'sbody with the harness.

(C) Booster Seats

A booster seat (C) is a childrestraint designed to improvethe fit of the vehicle's safety beltsystem. A booster seat can alsohelp a child to see out the window.



Securing an Add-On ChildRestraint in the Vehicle

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injuredor killed in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly securedin the vehicle. Secure the childrestraint properly in the vehicleusing the vehicle safety belt orLATCH system, following theinstructions that came with thatchild restraint and the instructionsin this manual.

To help reduce the chance ofinjury, the child restraint mustbe secured in the vehicle. Childrestraint systems must be securedin vehicle seats by lap belts or thelap belt portion of a lap-shoulderbelt, or by the LATCH system.

See Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCH System) onpage 3‑52 for more information.Children can be endangered in acrash if the child restraint is notproperly secured in the vehicle.

When securing an add-on childrestraint, refer to the instructionsthat come with the restraint whichmay be on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both, and to this manual.The child restraint instructionsare important, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacementcopy from the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraintin the vehicle — even when nochild is in it.

In some areas, CertifiedChild Passenger SafetyTechnicians (CPSTs) are availableto inspect and demonstrate howto correctly use and install childrestraints. In the U.S., refer to theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) websiteto locate the nearest child safetyseat inspection station. For CPSTavailability in Canada, check withTransport Canada or the ProvincialMinistry of Transportation office.

Securing the Child within theChild Restraint

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injuredor killed in a crash if the childis not properly secured in thechild restraint. Secure the childproperly following the instructionsthat came with that child restraint.



Where to Put theRestraintAccording to accident statistics,children and infants are saferwhen properly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

We recommend that children andchild restraints be secured in a rearseat, including: an infant or a childriding in a rear-facing child restraint;a child riding in a forward-facingchild seat; an older child riding ina booster seat; and children, whoare large enough, using safety belts.

A label on your sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front.” This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great if theairbag deploys.

{ WARNING


Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag,no system is fail-safe. No onecan guarantee that an airbag willnot deploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Secure rear-facing childrestraints in a rear seat, evenif the airbag is off. If you securea forward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3‑37 for additionalinformation.

When securing a child restraint ina rear seating position, study theinstructions that came with yourchild restraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

Child restraints and booster seatsvary considerably in size, and somemay fit in certain seating positionsbetter than others. Always makesure the child restraint is properlysecured.



Depending on where you placethe child restraint and the size ofthe child restraint, you may notbe able to access adjacent safetybelt assemblies or LATCH anchorsfor additional passengers orchild restraints. Adjacent seatingpositions should not be used if thechild restraint prevents access toor interferes with the routing ofthe safety belt.

Wherever a child restraint isinstalled, be sure to secure thechild restraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraintin your vehicle — even when nochild is in it.

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH System)The LATCH system holds a childrestraint during driving or in a crash.This system is designed to makeinstallation of a child restraint easier.The LATCH system uses anchors inthe vehicle and attachments on thechild restraint that are made for usewith the LATCH system.

Make sure that a LATCH-compatiblechild restraint is properly installedusing the anchors, or use thevehicle's safety belts to secure therestraint, following the instructionsthat came with that restraint, andalso the instructions in this manual.

When installing a child restraintwith a top tether, you must alsouse either the lower anchors or thesafety belts to properly secure thechild restraint. A child restraint mustnever be installed using only the toptether and anchor.

In order to use the LATCHsystem in the vehicle, you needa child restraint that has LATCHattachments. The child restraintmanufacturer will provide you withinstructions on how to use thechild restraint and its attachments.The following explains how toattach a child restraint with theseattachments in the vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions orchild restraints have lower anchorsand attachments or top tetheranchors and attachments.



Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metal barsbuilt into the vehicle. There aretwo lower anchors for eachLATCH seating position that willaccommodate a child restraintwith lower attachments (B).

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors thetop of the child restraint to thevehicle. A top tether anchor isbuilt into the vehicle. The top tetherattachment (B) on the child restraintconnects to the top tether anchorin the vehicle in order to reduce theforward movement and rotation ofthe child restraint during driving orin a crash.

The child restraint may havea single tether (A) or a dualtether (C). Either will have asingle attachment (B) to securethe top tether to the anchor.

Some child restraints that havea top tether are designed for usewith or without the top tether beingattached. Others require the toptether always to be attached.In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tetherbe attached. Be sure to read andfollow the instructions for the childrestraint.



Lower Anchor and Top TetherAnchor Locations

Rear Seat

i (Top Tether Anchor): Seatingpositions with top tether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor): Seatingpositions with two lower anchors.

To assist you in locating thelower anchors, each rear anchorposition has a label, near the creasebetween the seatback and the seatcushion.

To assist you in locating the toptether anchors, the top tether anchorsymbol is located on the cover.

The top tether anchors are locatedunder the covers, behind the rearseat, on the filler panel. Be sure touse an anchor located on the sameside of the vehicle as the seatingposition where the child restraintwill be placed.



Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be attached, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top tethermust be attached.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are saferwhen properly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition. See Where to Put theRestraint on page 3‑51 foradditional information.

Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCHSystem

{ WARNING

If a LATCH-type child restraint isnot attached to anchors, the childrestraint will not be able to protectthe child correctly. In a crash, thechild could be seriously injuredor killed. Install a LATCH-typechild restraint properly using theanchors, or use the vehicle safetybelts to secure the restraint,following the instructions thatcame with the child restraint andthe instructions in this manual.

{ WARNING

Do not attach more than onechild restraint to a single anchor.Attaching more than one childrestraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachmentto come loose or even breakduring a crash. A child or otherscould be injured. To reduce therisk of serious or fatal injuriesduring a crash, attach only onechild restraint per anchor.



{ WARNING

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder beltis wrapped around their neckand the safety belt continues totighten. Buckle any unused safetybelts behind the child restraintso children cannot reach them.Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock,if the vehicle has one, after thechild restraint has been installed.

Notice: Do not let the LATCHattachments rub against thevehicle’s safety belts. This maydamage these parts. If necessary,move buckled safety belts toavoid rubbing the LATCHattachments.

Do not fold the empty rearseat with a safety belt buckled.This could damage the safetybelt or the seat. Unbuckle andreturn the safety belt to itsstowed position, before foldingthe seat.

If you need to secure more thanone child restraint in the rear seat,see Where to Put the Restraint onpage 3‑51.

You cannot secure three childrestraints using the LATCH anchorsin the rear seat at the same time,but you can install two of them.If you want to do this, installone LATCH child restraint inthe passenger-side position, andinstall the other one either in thedriver-side position or in the centerposition. If you need to install childrestraints in both the center anddriver‐side position, the one in thecenter seating position will need tobe secured using the vehicle safetybelts instead of the LATCH anchors.

Refer to the following illustration tolearn which anchors to use.

A. Passenger Side RearSeating Position and LowerAnchors 1 and 2

B. Center Rear Seating Positionand Lower Anchors 3 and 4

C. Driver Side Rear SeatingPosition and LowerAnchors 4 and 5



There are five lower LATCH anchorsin the rear seat.. Use anchors 1 and 2 when

installing a child restraint usingLATCH in seating position A.

. Use anchors 3 and 4 wheninstalling a child restraint usingLATCH in seating position B.

. Use anchors 4 and 5 wheninstalling a child restraint usingLATCH in seating position C.

Installing child restraints usingLATCH in seating positions B and Cat the same time is prohibited.

Make sure to attach the childrestraint at the proper anchorlocation.

This system is designed to makeinstallation of child restraints easier.When using lower anchors, donot use the vehicle's safety belts.Instead use the vehicle's anchorsand child restraint attachmentsto secure the restraints. Somerestraints also use another vehicleanchor to secure a top tether.

1. Attach and tighten thelower attachments to thelower anchors. If the childrestraint does not have lowerattachments or the desiredseating position does not havelower anchors, secure the childrestraint with the top tether andthe safety belts. Refer to thechild restraint manufacturerinstructions and the instructionsin this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchorsfor the desired seatingposition.

1.2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

If the head restraintinterferes with the properinstallation of the childrestraint, the head restraintmay be removed. See“Head Restraint Removaland Reinstallation” at theend of this section.

1.3. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments on the childrestraint to the loweranchors.

2. If the child restraint manufacturerrecommends that the top tetherbe attached, attach and tightenthe top tether to the top tetheranchor, if equipped. Refer to thechild restraint instructions andthe following steps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.

Open the cover to exposethe anchor.



2.2. Route, attach, and tightenthe top tether accordingto the child restraintinstructions and thefollowing instructions:

. If the position you are usingdoes not have a headrestor head restraint, or theheadrest or head restrainthas been removed, and youare using a single tether,route the tether over theseatback.

. If the position you are usingdoes not have a headrestor head restraint, or theheadrest or head restrainthas been removed, andyou are using a dual tether,route the tether over theseatback.

. If the position you areusing has an adjustableheadrest or head restraintand you are using a singletether, route the tetherunder the headrest or headrestraint and in between theheadrest or head restraintposts. See Head Restraintson page 3‑2.



. If the position you are usinghas an adjustable headrestor head restraint and youare using a dual tetherroute the tether around theheadrest or head restraint.

3. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at theLATCH path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. There should beno more than 2.5 cm (1 in)of movement, for properinstallation.

Head Restraint Removal andReinstallation

The rear outboard head restraintscan be removed if they interfere withthe proper installation of the childrestraint.

To remove the head restraint:

1. Partially fold the seatbackforward. See Rear Seats onpage 3‑11 for additionalinformation.

2. Press both buttons on the headrestraint posts at the sametime, and pull up on the headrestraint.



3. Store the head restraint in thetrunk of the vehicle.

4. When the child restraint isremoved, reinstall the headrestraint before the seatingposition is used.

{ WARNING

With head restraints that arenot installed and adjustedproperly, there is a greaterchance that occupants will suffera neck/spinal injury in a crash.Do not drive until the headrestraints for all occupants areinstalled and adjusted properly.

To reinstall the head restraint:

1. Insert the head restraint postsinto the holes in the top of theseatback. The notches (A) onthe posts must face the driverside of the vehicle.

2. Push the head restraint down.

If necessary, press the heightadjustment release button tofurther lower the head restraint.See Head Restraints onpage 3‑2.

3. Try to move the head restraintto make sure that it is locked inplace.



Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage theLATCH system in the vehicle.A damaged LATCH system maynot properly secure the childrestraint, resulting in seriousinjury or even death in a crash.To help make sure the LATCHsystem is working properly aftera crash, see your dealer to havethe system inspected and anynecessary replacements madeas soon as possible.

If the vehicle has the LATCH systemand it was being used during acrash, new LATCH system partsmay be needed.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the LATCHsystem was not being used atthe time of the crash.

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat)When securing a child restraint ina rear seating position, study theinstructions that came with thechild restraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

If the child restraint has theLATCH system, see Lower Anchorsand Tethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑52 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraintis secured in the vehicle using asafety belt and it uses a top tether,see Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCH System) onpage 3‑52 for top tether anchorlocations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored,or if the instructions that comewith the child restraint say thatthe top strap must be anchored.

If the child restraint does not havethe LATCH system, you will beusing the safety belt to securethe child restraint in this position.Be sure to follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint.Secure the child in the child restraintwhen and as the instructions say.

If more than one child restraintneeds to be installed in the rearseat, be sure to read Where to Putthe Restraint on page 3‑51.

1. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

If the head restraint interfereswith the proper installationof the child restraint, the headrestraint may be removed.See “Head Restraint Removaland Reinstallation” underLower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 3‑52.



2. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.



4. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.

5. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint,it may be helpful to use yourknee to push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out ofthe retractor to make surethe retractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 4 and 5.



6. If the child restraint has a toptether, follow the child restraintmanufacturer's instructionsregarding the use of the toptether. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑52 formore information.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sureit is securely held in place.To check, grasp the childrestraint at the safety beltpath and attempt to move itside‐to‐side and back‐and‐forth.When the child restraint isproperly installed, there shouldbe no more than 2.5 cm (1 in)of movement.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety beltand let it return to the stowedposition. If the top tether isattached to a top tether anchor,disconnect it. If the head restraintwas removed, reinstall it beforethe seating position is used.See “Head Restraint Removal andReinstallation” under Lower Anchorsand Tethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑52 for additionalinformation on installing the headrestraint properly.

Securing Child Restraints(Front Passenger Seat)This vehicle has airbags. A rearseat is a safer place to securea forward-facing child restraint.See Where to Put the Restraint onpage 3‑51.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system whichis designed to turn off the rightfront passenger frontal airbagand seat‐mounted side impactairbag under certain conditions.See Passenger Sensing System onpage 3‑37 and Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator on page 5‑15for more information, includingimportant safety information.



A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seatin the front.” This is because the riskto the rear-facing child is so great ifthe airbag deploys.

{ WARNING


(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag,no system is fail-safe. No onecan guarantee that an airbag willnot deploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

Secure rear-facing childrestraints in a rear seat, even ifthe airbag is off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3‑37 for additionalinformation.

If the child restraint has theLATCH system, see Lower Anchorsand Tethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑52 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraintis secured using a safety belt andit uses a top tether, see LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3‑52for top tether anchor locations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored,or if the instructions that come withthe child restraint say that the topstrap must be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.



You will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint inthis position. Follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint.

1. Move the seat as far back asit will go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off theright front passenger frontalairbag and seat‐mounted sideairbag, the off indicator onthe passenger airbag statusindicator should light and staylit when you start the vehicle.See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5‑15.

2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.



5. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.



6. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint,it may be helpful to use yourknee to push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked,repeat Steps 5 and 6.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sureit is securely held in place.To check, grasp the childrestraint at the safety beltpath and attempt to move itside‐to‐side and back‐and‐forth.When the child restraint isproperly installed, there shouldbe no more than 2.5 cm (1 in)of movement.

If the airbags are off, the offindicator in the passenger airbagstatus indicator will come on andstay on when the vehicle is started.

If a child restraint has beeninstalled and the on indicator is lit,see “If the On Indicator is Lit for aChild Restraint ” under PassengerSensing System on page 3‑37 formore information.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.


Storage 4-1

Storage

Storage CompartmentsGlove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Front Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-1

Additional Storage FeaturesConvenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

StorageCompartments

Glove BoxThe glove box is located on thepassenger side of the instrumentpanel. Lift up on the lever to open it.

Cupholders

There are removable cupholderslocated in the center console.Slide the cover (A) to access thecupholders. Cupholders are alsolocated in the rear armrest.

Front StorageThe driver's storage compartmentis located near the left side of thesteering column on the bottom ofthe instrument panel. Pull the coverdown to open.

Center Console Storage

The armrest can be adjusted bysliding it to the desired position.

The center console has an uppertray and a lower main storage area.


4-2 Storage

To access the main storage area,adjust the armrest to the rearposition and push button (A) toopen. Push button (B) to accessthe upper tray.

An accessory power outlet is in thelower area. See Power Outlets onpage 5‑7.

Some vehicles might also haveinput jacks for auxiliary audiodevices. See Auxiliary Devices(Radio with CD) on page 7‑31or Auxiliary Devices (Radio withCD/DVD and MEM) on page 7‑34.

Additional StorageFeatures

Convenience NetUse the convenience net located inthe trunk to store small loads as farforward as possible. The net shouldnot be used to store heavy loads.Attach the loops on each corner ofthe net to the hooks located on thesides of the trunk.


Instruments and Controls 5-1

Instruments andControls

ControlsSteering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-2Heated Steering Wheel . . . . . . . 5-3Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-3Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Clock (Without DateDisplay) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Clock (With Date Display) . . . . . 5-6Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-14Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-14Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-16MalfunctionIndicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Brake System WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Electric Parking BrakeLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21Electronic Stability Control(ESC) Indicator Light . . . . . . . 5-22

Electronic Stability Control(ESC)/Traction ControlSystem (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-23Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-23Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 5-24Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-24Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . 5-25Taillamp Indicator Light . . . . . . 5-25Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-25

Information DisplaysDriver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25

Head-Up Display (HUD) . . . . . 5-29

Vehicle MessagesVehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33Battery Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33

Brake System Messages . . . . 5-33Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-34Cruise Control Messages . . . . 5-34Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-34Engine Cooling SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35


5-2 Instruments and Controls

Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-35Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-36Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-36Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-36Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37Object Detection SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37

Ride Control SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37

Anti-Theft Alarm SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38

Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-38Window Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39

Vehicle PersonalizationVehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-39

Universal Remote SystemUniversal Remote System . . . 5-45Universal Remote SystemProgramming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45

Universal Remote SystemOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48

ControlsSteering WheelAdjustment

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever (A) down.

2. Move the steering wheel upor down.

3. Pull or push the steering wheelcloser or away from you.

4. Pull the lever (A) up to lock thesteering wheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.


For vehicles with audio steeringwheel controls, some audio controlscan be adjusted at the steeringwheel.

b g (Push to Talk): For vehicleswith a Bluetooth®, OnStar®,or navigation system, pressto interact with those systems.



See Bluetooth (Overview) onpage 7‑46 or Bluetooth(Infotainment Controls) onpage 7‑48 or Bluetooth (VoiceRecognition) on page 7‑53,the OnStar Owner's Guide, orthe separate Navigation SystemManual for more information.

$ i (Mute/End Call): Pressto silence the vehicle speakersonly. Press again to turn thesound on. For vehicles withOnStar or Bluetooth systems,press to reject an incoming call,or end a current call.

_ SRC ^ (Rotary Control): Pressto select an audio source.

Press _ or ^ to select the next orprevious favorite radio station, CD,DVD track/chapter (with navigation),or MP3 track.

+ x − (Volume): Press + toincrease the volume. Press − todecrease the volume.

Heated Steering WheelFor vehicles with a heated steeringwheel, the button for this featureis located on the climate controlsystem.

( : Press to turn the heatedsteering wheel on or off. A lighton the button displays when thefeature is turned on.

The steering wheel takes aboutthree minutes to start heating.

HornPress near the horn symbols orpress on the steering wheel padto sound the horn.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The windshield wiper lever ison the side of the steeringcolumn. With the ignition inACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN,move the windshield wiper leverto select the wiper speed.

2: Use for fast wipes.

1: Use for slow wipes.



& (Adjustable Interval Wipes):Turn the band up for more frequentwipes or down for less frequentwipes.

9 (Off): Use to turn the windshieldwipers off.

3 (Mist): For a single wipe,briefly move the wiper lever down.For several wipes, hold the wiperlever down.

Clear ice and snow from thewiper blades before using them.If they are frozen to the windshield,carefully loosen or thaw them.

Damaged wiper blades shouldbe replaced. See Wiper BladeReplacement on page 10‑29.

Heavy snow or ice can overload thewipers. A circuit breaker stops themuntil the motor cools.

Wipe Parking

If the ignition is turned toLOCK/OFF while the wipersare on 1, 2, or&, they willimmediately stop.

If the windshield wiper lever isthen moved to OFF before thedriver door is opened, or within10 minutes, the wipers will restartand move to the base of thewindshield.

If the ignition is turned toLOCK/OFF during a windshieldwash, the wipers will stop whenthey reach the base of thewindshield.

Windshield Washer

Pull the windshield wiper levertoward you to spray windshieldwasher fluid and activate the wipers.

The wipers will continue until thelever is released or the maximumwash time is reached.

When the windshield wiper leveris released, additional wipes mayoccur depending on how longthe windshield washer had beenactivated. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑24 for information onfilling the windshield washerfluid reservoir.

{ WARNING

In freezing weather, do not usethe washer until the windshieldis warmed. Otherwise thewasher fluid can form ice on thewindshield, blocking your vision.



CompassThe vehicle may have a compassdisplay on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). The compass receivesits heading and other informationfrom the Global PositioningSystem (GPS) antenna, StabiliTrak,and vehicle speed information.

Avoid covering the GPS antennafor long periods of time with objectsthat may interfere with the antenna'sability to receive a satellite signal.See Backglass Antenna onpage 7‑19 and Satellite RadioAntenna on page 7‑20 for thelocation of the vehicle's antennas.

The compass system is designedto operate for a certain number ofmiles or degrees of turn beforeneeding a signal from the GPSsatellites. When the compassdisplay shows CAL, drive thevehicle for a short distance in anopen area where it can receivea GPS signal. The compasssystem will automatically determinewhen the GPS signal is restoredand provide a heading again.See Compass Messages onpage 5‑34 for more informationon the messages that may bedisplayed for the compass.

Clock (Without DateDisplay)The infotainment system controlsare used to access the time anddate settings through the menusystem. See Operation on page 7‑7for information about how to use themenu system.

Setting the Time

1. Press the CONFIG button andselect Time Settings,or press H.

2. Select Set Time.



3. Turn the Menu knob to adjustthe highlighted value.

4. Press the SELECT button toselect the next value.

5. To save the time and return tothe Time Settings menu, pressthe 0 BACK button at any timeor press the SELECT buttonafter adjusting the minutes.


1. Press the CONFIG button andselect Time Settings,or press H.

2. Highlight 12/24 Hour Format.


Clock (With Date Display)The infotainment system controlsare used to access the time anddate settings through the menusystem. See Operation on page 7‑7for information about how to usethe menu system.

Setting the Time and Date

1. Press the CONFIG button andselect Time and Date Settings,or press H.

2. Select Set Time or Set Date.

3. Turn the Menu knob to adjustthe highlighted value.

4. Press the SELECT button toselect the next value.

5. To save the time or dateand return to the Time andDate Settings menu, pressthe 0 BACK button at any timeor press the SELECT buttonafter adjusting the minutesor year.



2. Highlight Set Time Format.




Setting the Month & DayFormat


2. Highlight Set Date Format.

3. Press the SELECT buttonto select MM/DD/YY(month/day/year) or DD/MM/YY(day/month/year).

Setting the Auto Time Adjust


2. Highlight Auto Time Adjust.

3. Press the SELECT button to turnAuto Time Adjust on or off.

4. Press the SELECT button toselect Time Zone, and thenselect the Time Zone.

5. Press the SELECT button to turnDaylight Savings on or off.

Power OutletsThe accessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone or MP3 player.

There are two accessory poweroutlets. One is located under thearmrest inside the center consolestorage and the other is on the rearof the center floor console.

These outlets are poweredwhen the ignition is in ON/RUNor ACC/ACCESSORY, or untilthe driver door is opened within10 minutes of turning off the vehicle.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9‑24.



Remove the cover to access andreplace when not in use.

Certain electrical accessoriesmay not be compatible with theaccessory power outlets and couldoverload vehicle or adapter fuses.If there is a problem, see yourdealer.

When adding electrical equipment,be sure to follow the installationinstructions included with theequipment. See Add-On ElectricalEquipment on page 9‑62.

Notice: Hanging heavyequipment from the poweroutlet can cause damage notcovered by the vehicle warranty.The power outlets are designedfor accessory power plugs only,such as cell phone charge cords.

Power Outlet 110 Volt AlternatingCurrent

The vehicle may have a poweroutlet that can be used to plugin electrical equipment with amaximum limit of 150 watts.

The power outlet is located on therear of the center console.

An indicator light on the outletcomes on when in use. The lightcomes on when the ignition is inON/RUN and equipment requiringless than 150 watts is plugged intothe outlet, and no system fault isdetected.

If you try to connect equipmentusing more than 150 watts ora system fault is detected, theequipment may operate for ashort period and turn itself off.A protection circuit shuts off thepower supply and the indicatorlight turns off. To reset the circuit,unplug the item and plug it backin or turn the Remote AccessoryPower (RAP) off and then back on.



See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9‑24. Prolongedusage of the power outlet at themaximum load of 150 watts maycause the outlet to overheat andautomatically shut down. The powerrestarts when equipment thatoperates within the limit is pluggedinto the outlet and a system fault isnot detected.

The power outlet is not designed forand may not work properly, if any ofthe following is plugged in:. Equipment with high

initial peak wattage such as:compressor-driven refrigeratorsand electric power tools.

. Other equipment requiringan extremely stablepower supply such as:microcomputer-controlledelectric blankets, touchsensor lamps, etc.

Warning Lights,Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning lights and gauges cansignal that something is wrongbefore it becomes serious enoughto cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention tothe warning lights and gaugescould prevent injury.

Warning lights come on when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Some warning lights comeon briefly when the engine is startedto indicate they are working.

Gauges can indicate when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Often gauges and warninglights work together to indicate aproblem with the vehicle.

When one of the warning lightscomes on and stays on whiledriving, or when one of the gaugesshows there may be a problem,check the section that explains whatto do. Follow this manual's advice.Waiting to do repairs can be costlyand even dangerous.



Instrument Cluster

English Shown, Metric Similar



SpeedometerThe speedometer shows thevehicle's speed in either kilometersper hour (km/h) or miles perhour (mph).

OdometerThe odometer shows how far thevehicle has been driven, in eitherkilometers or miles.

This vehicle has a tamper-resistantodometer. If the vehicle needs anew odometer installed, the newone is set to the mileage of the oldodometer. If this is not possible, it isset at zero and a label is put on thedriver door to show the old mileagereading.

TachometerThe tachometer displays theengine speed in revolutionsper minute (rpm).

Notice: If the engine is operatedwith the tachometer in the shadedwarning area, the vehicle couldbe damaged, and the damageswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Do not operatethe engine with the tachometerin the shaded warning area.

Fuel Gauge

English



Metric

When the ignition is on, the fuelgauge indicates about how muchfuel is left in the tank.

An arrow on the fuel gaugeindicates the side of the vehiclethe fuel door is on.

When the indicator nears empty,the low fuel light comes on. There isstill a little fuel left, but the fuel tankshould be filled soon.

Here are four things that someowners ask about. None of theseshow a problem with the fuel gauge:. At the service station, the fuel

pump shuts off before the gaugereads full.

. It takes a little more or lessfuel to fill up than the gaugeindicated. For example, thegauge indicated the tank washalf full, but it actually took alittle more or less than half thetank's capacity to fill the tank.

. The gauge moves a little whileturning a corner or speeding up.

. The gauge takes a few secondsto stabilize after the ignition isturned on, and goes back toempty when the ignition isturned off.



Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge

English

Metric

This gauge shows the enginecoolant temperature.

If the gauge pointer moves towardthe shaded area, the engine istoo hot.

This reading indicates thesame thing as the warning light.It means that the engine coolanthas overheated. If the vehicle hasbeen operating under normal drivingconditions, pull off the road, stopthe vehicle, and turn off the engineas soon as possible. See EngineOverheating on page 10‑21 formore information.



Safety Belt Reminders

Driver Safety Belt ReminderLight

There is a driver safety beltreminder light on the instrumentpanel cluster.

When the vehicle is started thislight flashes and a chime may comeon to remind the driver to fastentheir safety belt. Then the light stayson solid until the belt is buckled.This cycle may continue severaltimes if the driver remains orbecomes unbuckled while thevehicle is moving.

If the driver safety belt is buckled,neither the light nor the chimecomes on.

Passenger Safety BeltReminder Light

When the vehicle is started thislight flashes and a chime comeson to remind passengers to fastentheir safety belt. Then the light stayson solid until the belt is buckled.This cycle continues several timesif the passenger remains orbecomes unbuckled while thevehicle is moving.

If the passenger safety belt isbuckled, neither the chime northe light comes on.

The front passenger safety beltwarning light and chime may turnon if an object is put on the seatsuch as a briefcase, handbag,grocery bag, laptop or otherelectronic device. To turn off thewarning light and/or chime, removethe object from the seat or bucklethe safety belt

Airbag Readiness LightThis light shows if there is anelectrical problem. The systemcheck includes the airbag sensor,the pretensioners, the airbagmodules, the wiring, and the crashsensing and diagnostic module.For more information on the airbagsystem, see Airbag System onpage 3‑29.



The airbag readiness light comeson solid and stays on for severalseconds when the vehicle is started.Then the light goes out.

If it stays on solid after the vehiclehas been started or comes on whiledriving, the airbag system may notwork properly. Have the vehicleserviced right away.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle is started orcomes on while driving, it meansthe airbag system might not beworking properly. The airbags inthe vehicle might not inflate in acrash, or they could even inflatewithout a crash. To help avoidinjury, have the vehicle servicedright away.

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicatorThe vehicle has a passengersensing system. See PassengerSensing System on page 3‑37for important safety information.The instrument panel has apassenger airbag status indicator.

When the vehicle is started, thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light the words ON and OFF forseveral seconds as a system check.



If you are using remote start,if equipped, to start the vehiclefrom a distance, you may not seethe system check. Then, afterseveral more seconds, the statusindicator will light either the wordON or OFF to let you know thestatus of the right front passengerfrontal airbag.

If the word ON is lit on thepassenger airbag status indicator,it means that the right frontpassenger frontal airbag isenabled (may inflate).

If the word OFF is lit on the airbagstatus indicator, it means that thepassenger sensing system hasturned off the right front passengerfrontal airbag.

If, after several seconds, bothstatus indicator lights remain on,or if there are no lights at all, theremay be a problem with the lightsor the passenger sensing system.See your dealer for service.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness lightever comes on and stays on,it means that something may bewrong with the airbag system.To help avoid injury to yourself orothers, have the vehicle servicedright away. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑14 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

Charging System Light

The charging system light comeson briefly when the ignition is turnedon, but the engine is not running, asa check to show the light is working.The light turns off when the engineis started. If it does not, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.

If the light stays on, or comes onwhile driving, there could be aproblem with the electrical chargingsystem. Have it checked by yourdealer. Driving while this light ison could drain the battery.

If a short distance must be drivenwith the light on, be sure to turn offall accessories, such as the radioand air conditioner.



MalfunctionIndicator LampA computer system called OBD II(On-Board Diagnostics-SecondGeneration) monitors operationof the fuel, ignition, and emissioncontrol systems. It ensures thatemissions are at acceptable levelsfor the life of the vehicle, helpingto produce a cleaner environment.

This light should come on when theignition is on, but the engine is notrunning, as a check to show it isworking. If it does not, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.

If the malfunction indicator lampcomes on and stays on while theengine is running, this indicatesthat there is an OBD II problemand service is required.

Malfunctions often are indicated bythe system before any problem isapparent. Being aware of the lightcan prevent more serious damageto the vehicle. This system assiststhe service technician in correctlydiagnosing any malfunction.

Notice: If the vehicle iscontinually driven with thislight on, after a while, theemission controls might notwork as well, the vehicle fueleconomy might not be as good,and the engine might not runas smoothly. This could lead tocostly repairs that might not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Notice: Modifications madeto the engine, transmission,exhaust, intake, or fuel systemof the vehicle or the replacementof the original tires with otherthan those of the same TirePerformance Criteria (TPC)can affect the vehicle'semission controls and cancause this light to come on.Modifications to these systemscould lead to costly repairs notcovered by the vehicle warranty.This could also result in a failureto pass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test.See Accessories andModifications on page 10‑3.

This light comes on during amalfunction in one of two ways:

Light Flashing: A misfire conditionhas been detected. A misfireincreases vehicle emissions andcould damage the emission controlsystem on the vehicle. Diagnosisand service might be required.



To prevent more serious damage tothe vehicle:. Reduce vehicle speed.. Avoid hard accelerations.. Avoid steep uphill grades.. If towing a trailer, reduce the

amount of cargo being hauledas soon as it is possible.

If the light continues to flash,when it is safe to do so, stop thevehicle. Find a safe place to parkthe vehicle. Turn the vehicle off,wait at least 10 seconds, andrestart the engine. If the light isstill flashing, follow the previoussteps and see your dealer forservice as soon as possible.

Light On Steady: An emissioncontrol system malfunction hasbeen detected on the vehicle.Diagnosis and service mightbe required.

The following may correct anemissions system malfunction:. Make sure the fuel cap is

fully installed. See Fillingthe Tank on page 9‑53.The diagnostic system candetermine if the fuel cap hasbeen left off or improperlyinstalled. A loose or missingfuel cap allows fuel to evaporateinto the atmosphere. A fewdriving trips with the capproperly installed shouldturn the light off.

. Make sure the electricalsystem is not wet. The systemcould be wet if the vehicle wasdriven through a deep puddle ofwater. The condition is usuallycorrected when the electricalsystem dries out. A few drivingtrips should turn the light off.

. Make sure to fuel the vehiclewith quality fuel. Poor fuel qualitycauses the engine not to run asefficiently as designed and cancause: stalling after start-up,stalling when the vehicle ischanged into gear, misfiring,hesitation on acceleration,or stumbling on acceleration.These conditions might go awayonce the engine is warmed up.

If one or more of theseconditions occurs, change thefuel brand used. It will require atleast one full tank of the properfuel to turn the light off.

See Recommended Fuel onpage 9‑50.

If none of the above have madethe light turn off, your dealer cancheck the vehicle. The dealerhas the proper test equipmentand diagnostic tools to fix anymechanical or electrical problemsthat might have developed.



Emissions Inspection andMaintenance Programs

Some state/provincial andlocal governments may haveprograms to inspect the on-vehicleemission control equipment.For the inspection, the emissionsystem test equipment is connectedto the vehicle’s Data LinkConnector (DLC).

The DLC is under the instrumentpanel to the left of the steeringwheel. See your dealer if assistanceis needed.

The vehicle may not passinspection if:. The malfunction indicator lamp is

on with the engine running, or ifthe light does not come on whenthe ignition is turned to ON/RUNwhile the engine is off.

. The critical emission controlsystems have not beencompletely diagnosed bythe system. This can happenif the battery has recentlybeen replaced or if the batteryhas run down. The diagnosticsystem evaluates criticalemission control systems duringnormal driving. This can takeseveral days of routine driving.If this has been done and thevehicle still does not pass theinspection, your dealer canprepare the vehicle forinspection.

Brake System WarningLightThe vehicle brake systemconsists of two hydraulic circuits.If one circuit is not working, theremaining circuit can still work tostop the vehicle. For normal brakingperformance, both circuits need tobe working.

If the warning light comes on, thereis a brake problem. Have your brakesystem inspected right away.

English Metric

If the vehicle has antilock brakes,this light should come on when thevehicle is placed in START. If it doesnot, have the vehicle serviced byyour dealer.



If the light comes on while driving,pull off the road and stop carefully.The pedal may be harder to push orit can go closer to the floor. It maytake longer to stop. Try turning offand restarting the vehicle one ortwo times. If the light is still on,have the vehicle towed for service.See Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light on page 5‑21 andTowing the Vehicle on page 10‑89.

{ WARNING

The brake system might not beworking properly if the brakesystem warning light is on.Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to acrash. If the light is still on afterthe vehicle has been pulled offthe road and carefully stopped,have the vehicle towed forservice.

Electric Parking BrakeLight

English Metric

For vehicles with the ElectricParking Brake (EPB), the parkingbrake status light comes onwhen the brake is applied. If thelight continues flashing after theparking brake is released, or whiledriving, there is a problem withthe Electric Parking Brake system.A SERVICE PARKING BRAKEmessage may also display in theDriver Information Center (DIC).See Brake System Messages onpage 5‑33 for more information.

If the light does not come on,or remains flashing, see your dealer.

For vehicles with the ElectricParking Brake (EPB), the parkingbrake warning light should comeon briefly when ignition is placedin ON/RUN. If it does not come on,then have it fixed so it will be readyto warn if there is a problem.

If this light comes on, there is aproblem with a system on thevehicle that is causing the parkingbrake system to work at a reducedlevel. The vehicle can still be driven,but should be taken to a dealeras soon as possible. See ParkingBrake on page 9‑33 for moreinformation.

For vehicles with the uplevel cluster,this telltale displays in the DriverInformation Center (DIC) screen.



Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light

This light comes on briefly when theengine is started.

If the light does not come on, haveit fixed so it will be ready to warn ifthere is a problem.

If the ABS light stays on, turn theignition off.

If the light comes on whiledriving, stop as soon as it is safelypossible and turn off the vehicle.

Then start the engine again to resetthe system. If the ABS light stayson, or comes on again while driving,the vehicle needs service. A chimemay also sound when the lightcomes on steady.

If the ABS light is the only light on,the vehicle has regular brakes,but the antilock brakes are notfunctioning.

If both the ABS and the brakesystem warning light are on, thevehicle's antilock brakes are notfunctioning and there is a problemwith the regular brakes. See yourdealer for service.

See Brake System Warning Light onpage 5‑19.

See Brake System Messages onpage 5‑33 for all brake related DICmessages.

Traction Off Light

This light comes on when theTraction Control System (TCS)has been turned off by pressing andreleasing the traction control button.

This light also comes on and thesystem turns off if there is a problemwith the traction control system.

If the light comes on and stays onfor an extended period of time whilethe system is turned on, the vehicleneeds service.

See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 9‑36 and ElectronicStability Control (ESC) onpage 9‑37 for more information.



Electronic StabilityControl (ESC) IndicatorLight

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. If thesystem is working normally theindicator light then goes off.

If the light comes on and stayson while driving, there could bea problem with the ESC and thevehicle might need service. Whenthis warning light is on, the ESC isoff and does not limit wheel spin.

The light flashes if the system isactive and is working to assist thedriver with directional control of thevehicle in difficult driving conditions.

For vehicles with the uplevel cluster,this light is shown in the DriverInformation Center (DIC) screen.

See Electronic Stability Control(ESC) on page 9‑37 for moreinformation.

Electronic StabilityControl (ESC)/TractionControl System (TCS)Indicator/Warning Light

This light comes on when theElectronic Stability Control (ESC)system is turned off. When the ESCis off the Traction Control System(TCS) is also off, and wheel spinis not limited. If the ESC is off, thesystem does not assist in controllingthe vehicle. Switch on the TCSand the ESC and the warninglight turns off.

See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 9‑36 and ElectronicStability Control (ESC) onpage 9‑37 for more information.



Tire Pressure Light

For vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), this lightcomes on briefly when the engineis started. It provides informationabout tire pressures and the TPMS.

When the Light is On Steady

This indicates that one ormore of the tires are significantlyunderinflated.

A tire pressure message canaccompany the light. See TireMessages on page 5‑38 for moreinformation. Stop as soon aspossible, and inflate the tires tothe pressure value shown on theTire and Loading Information label.See Tire Pressure on page 10‑54for more information.

When the Light Flashes First andThen is On Steady

This indicates that there maybe a problem with the TPMS.The light flashes for about aminute and stays on steady forthe remainder of the ignition cycle.This sequence repeats with everyignition cycle. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation on page 10‑57for more information.

Engine Oil Pressure Light

{ WARNING

Do not keep driving if the oilpressure is low. The engine canbecome so hot that it catches fire.Someone could be burned. Checkthe oil as soon as possible andhave the vehicle serviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engineoil maintenance can damage theengine. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always follow the maintenanceschedule for changing engine oil.

The oil pressure light should comeon briefly as the engine is started.If it does not come on have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.

If the light comes on and stays on,it means that oil is not flowingthrough the engine properly. Thevehicle could be low on oil andmight have some other systemproblem. See your dealer.




Low Fuel Warning Light

This light, below the fuel gauge,comes on briefly when the engineis started.

If it does not come on have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.If the system is working normally,the indicator light then goes off.

This light also comes on when thefuel tank is low on fuel. When fuelis added the light should go off.If it does not, have your vehicleserviced.


Security Light

This light flashes when the securitysystem is activated.

For more information, see VehicleSecurity on page 2‑14.


High-Beam On Light

This light comes on when thehigh-beam headlamps are in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger on page 6‑2 for moreinformation.



Front Fog Lamp Light

For vehicles with fog lamps, thislight comes on when the fog lampsare on.

The light goes out when the foglamps are turned off. See FogLamps on page 6‑5 for moreinformation.

Taillamp Indicator Light

This light comes on when thetaillamps are in use.

Cruise Control Light

This light is white whenever thecruise control is set and turns greenwhen the cruise control is active.

The light goes out when the cruisecontrol is turned off. See CruiseControl on page 9‑39 for moreinformation.

For vehicles with the uplevel cluster,this telltale will be shown in theDriver Information Center (DIC)screen.

Information Displays

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The Driver Information Center (DIC)displays information about thevehicle. It also displays warningmessages if a system problemis detected. See Vehicle Messageson page 5‑33 for more information.All messages appear in the DICdisplay located in the center ofthe instrument panel cluster.

On some models, the DIC mayhave some warning lights orindicators shown in the top portionof the display. See Warning Lights,Gauges, and Indicators on page 5‑9for more information.

The vehicle may also have featuresthat can be customized through thecontrols on the radio. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑39 formore information.



DIC Operation and Displays

The DIC has different displayswhich can be accessed by usingthe DIC buttons located on theturn signal lever located on the leftside of the steering wheel. The DICdisplays trip, fuel, vehicle systeminformation, and warning messagesif a system problem is detected.

The bottom of the DIC displayshows what position the shift leveris in, the odometer, and the directionthe vehicle is driving.

In cold weather the DIC displaymay change slowly. This is normaland will move more quickly as thevehicle's interior temperature rises.

DIC Buttons

MENU: Press to get to theTrip/Fuel Menu and the VehicleInformation Menu.

wx (Thumbwheel): Use to scrollthrough the items in each menu.A small marker will move across thebottom of the page as you scrollthrough the items. This showswhere each page is in the menu.

SET/CLR (Set/Clear): Press to setor clear the menu item when it isdisplayed.

Trip/Fuel Menu Items

Press MENU on the turn signallever until Trip/Fuel InformationMenu is displayed. Usewx toscroll through the following menuitems:. Digital Speedometer. Trip 1. Trip 2. Fuel Range. Average Fuel Economy. Average Vehicle Speed. Timer. Turn-by-Turn



Digital Speedometer

The speedometer shows how fastthe vehicle is moving in eitherkilometers per hour (km/h) or milesper hour (mph). The speedometercannot be reset.

Trip 1 and Trip 2

This display shows the currentdistance traveled, in eitherkilometers (km) or miles (mi), sincethe last reset for the trip odometer.The trip odometer can be reset tozero by pressing SET/CLR whilethe trip odometer display isshowing.

Fuel Range

This display shows the approximatedistance the vehicle can be drivenwithout refueling. The fuel rangeestimate is based on an averageof the vehicle's fuel economyover recent driving history and theamount of fuel remaining in the fueltank. Fuel range cannot be reset.

Average Fuel Economy

This display shows theapproximate average liters per100 kilometers (L/100 km) or milesper gallon (mpg). This number iscalculated based on the numberof L/100 km (mpg) recorded sincethe last time this menu item wasreset. The fuel economy can bereset by pressing SET/CLR whilethe Average Fuel Economy displayis showing.

Average Vehicle Speed

This display shows the averagespeed of the vehicle in milesper hour (mph) or kilometersper hour (km/h). This average iscalculated based on the variousvehicle speeds recorded sincethe last reset of this value.The average speed can be resetby pressing SET/CLR while theAverage Vehicle Speed displayis showing.

Timer

This display can be used asa timer. To start the timer, pressSET/CLR while Timer is displayed.The display will show the amount oftime that has passed since the timerwas last reset, not including time theignition is off. Time will continue tobe counted as long as the ignition ison, even if another display is beingshown on the DIC. The timer willrecord up to 99 hours, 59 minutesand 59 seconds (99:59:59) afterwhich the display will return to zero.To stop the timer, press SET/CLRbriefly while Timer is displayed.To reset the timer to zero, pressand hold SET/CLR.

Turn-by-Turn

This display is used for the OnStaror Navigation System Turn-by-Turnguidance. See the OnStar manualor the Navigation manual, if thevehicle has navigation, for moreinformation.



Vehicle Information MenuItems

Press MENU on the turn signallever until Vehicle Information Menuis displayed. Usewx to scrollthrough the following menu items:. Unit. Tire Pressure. Remaining Oil Life. Battery Voltage

Unit

Movewx to switch betweenMetric or US when the Unit displayis active. Press SET/CLR to confirmthe setting. This will change thedisplays on the cluster and DICto either metric or English (US)measurements.

Tire Pressure

The display will show a vehiclewith the approximate pressuresof all four tires. Tire pressure isdisplayed in either kilopascal (kPa)or pounds per square inch (psi).See Tire Pressure Monitor Systemon page 10‑56 and Tire PressureMonitor Operation on page 10‑57for more information.

Remaining Oil Life

This display shows an estimateof the oil's remaining useful life.If REMAINING OIL LIFE 99% isdisplayed, that means 99% of thecurrent oil life remains.

When the remaining oil life is low,the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage will appear on the display.

See Engine Oil Messages onpage 5‑35. The oil should changedas soon as possible. See EngineOil on page 10‑9. In additionto the engine oil life systemmonitoring the oil life, additionalmaintenance is recommendedin the Maintenance Schedulein this manual. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 11‑2 formore information.

Remember, the Oil Life displaymust be reset after each oil change.It will not reset itself. Also, becareful not to reset the Oil Lifedisplay accidentally at any timeother than when the oil has justbeen changed. It cannot be resetaccurately until the next oil change.To reset the engine oil life system,press SET/CLR while the Oil Lifedisplay is active. See Engine OilLife System on page 10‑13.



Battery Voltage

This display, available on somevehicles, shows the current batteryvoltage. If the voltage is in thenormal range, the value will display.For example, the display mayread Battery Voltage 15.0 Volts.The vehicle's charging systemregulates voltage based on thestate of the battery. The batteryvoltage can fluctuate while viewingthis information on the DIC. This isnormal. See Charging System Lighton page 5‑16 for more information.If there is a problem with the batterycharging system, the DIC willdisplay a message

Compass

The vehicle may have a compassdisplay in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See Compass onpage 5‑5 for more information.

Head-Up Display (HUD)

{ WARNING

If the HUD image is too bright ortoo high in your field of view, itmay take you more time to seethings you need to see when it isdark outside. Be sure to keep theHUD image dim and placed low inyour field of view.

For vehicles with the Head-UpDisplay (HUD), some informationconcerning the operation of thevehicle is projected onto thewindshield. This includes thespeedometer reading, RPMreading, transmission position,outside air temperature, compassheading and a brief display of thecurrent radio station, including XMinformation or CD track. It will alsodisplay turn-by-turn navigationinformation if the vehicle has anavigation radio. The images are

projected through the HUD lenslocated on the driver side of theinstrument panel.

Notice: If you try to use the HUDimage as a parking aid, youmay misjudge the distance anddamage your vehicle. Do not usethe HUD image as a parking aid.

The tap shift gear will also appearon the HUD if the vehicle has tapshift and it is active.

The HUD information can bedisplayed in one of three languages,English, French, or Spanish.The speedometer reading and othernumerical values can be displayedin either English or metric units.

The language selection is changedthrough the radio and the unitsof measurement is changedthrough the trip computer in theDriver Information Center (DIC).See AM-FM Radio on page 7‑12and Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 5‑25.



HUD Display on the VehicleWindshield

The HUD information appears as animage focused out toward the frontof the vehicle.

When the ignition key is turned toON/RUN, the HUD will display anintroductory message for a shorttime, until the HUD is ready.

The following indicator lights comeon the instrument panel whenactivated and also appear onthe HUD:. Turn Signal Indicators. High-Beam Indicator Symbol

The HUD temporarily displayssome vehicle warnings, such asCHECK TIRE PRESSURE andFUEL LEVEL LOW when thesemessages are on the DIC tripcomputer.

The HUD also displays the followingmessages on vehicles with thesesystems, when they are active:. TRACTION CONTROL ACTIVE. STABILITRAK ACTIVE

When the HUD is on, thespeedometer reading is continuallydisplayed. The current radiostation or CD track number willdisplay for a short period of time

after the radio or CD track statuschanges. This happens wheneverradio information is changed.The speedometer size is reducedwhen radio, CD information,warnings, or turn-by-turn navigationinformation are displayed onthe HUD.

The HUD control is located to theleft of the steering wheel.



To adjust the HUD image so thatitems are properly displayed, do thefollowing:

1. Adjust the driver seat to acomfortable position.

2. Start the engine.

3. Adjust the HUD controls.

Use the following settings to adjustthe HUD.

OFF: To turn HUD off, turn the HUDdimming knob fully counterclockwiseuntil the HUD display turns off.

Brightness: Turn the dimming knobclockwise or counterclockwise tobrighten or dim the display.

« (Up):ª (Down): Press the upor down arrows to center the HUDimage in your view. The HUD imagecan only be adjusted up and down,not side to side.

PAGE: Press to select the displayformats. Release the PAGE buttonwhen the format number with thedesired display is shown on theHUD. If vehicle messages aredisplayed, pressing PAGE mayclear the message.

The three formats are as follows:


Format One: This display gives thespeedometer reading (in English ormetric units), turn signal indication,high‐beam indication, transmissionpositions, outside air temperature,and compass heading.


Format Two: This displayincludes the information inFormat One without thetransmission information,the outside air temperature,and compass heading.


Format Three: This displayincludes all the information inFormat One along with a circulartachometer, but without outside airtemperature and compass heading.



All formats will show the turn-by-turnnavigation information and providedetails about the next drivingmaneuver to be made. Whenyou near your destination, theHUD will display a distance barthat will empty the closer you getto your destination. All navigationinformation is provided to the HUDby the navigation radio or OnStar®

service, for vehicles that have thesefeatures.


The HUD image displayed onthe windshield will automaticallydim and brighten to compensatefor outside lighting. However, theHUD brightness control can stillbe adjusted as needed.

The HUD image can temporarilylight up depending on the angleand position of the sunlight on theHUD display. This is normal andwill change when the angle ofthe sunlight on the HUD displaychanges.

Polarized sunglasses could makethe HUD image harder to see.

Care of the HUD

Clean the inside of the windshieldas needed to remove any dirt or filmthat could reduce the sharpness orclarity of the HUD image.

To clean the HUD lens, use a soft,clean cloth that has household glasscleaner sprayed on it. Wipe theHUD lens gently, then dry it. Do notspray cleaner directly on the lensbecause the cleaner could leak intothe unit.

If You Cannot See the HUDImage When the Ignition Is On. Is anything covering the

HUD lens?. Is the HUD dimmer setting bright

enough?. Is the HUD image adjusted to

the proper height?. Are you wearing polarized

sunglasses?. Still no HUD image? Check the

fuse in the instrument panel fuseblock. See Instrument PanelFuse Block on page 10‑42.

If the HUD Image Is Not Clear. Is the HUD image too bright?. Are the windshield and HUD

lens clean?

If the HUD image is not correct,contact your dealer.

Keep in mind that the windshield ispart of the HUD system.



Vehicle MessagesMessages displayed on the DICindicate the status of the vehicleor some action that may be neededto correct a condition. Multiplemessages may display one afterthe other.

The messages that do notrequire immediate action canbe acknowledged and cleared bypressing SET/CLR. The messagesthat require immediate action cannotbe cleared until that action isperformed. All messages shouldbe taken seriously and clearingthe messages does not correctthe problem.

Battery Voltage andCharging Messages

BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE

This message displays whenthe vehicle has detected that thebattery voltage is dropping beyonda reasonable point. The batterysaver system starts reducing certainfeatures of the vehicle that you maybe able to notice. At the point thatfeatures are disabled, this messageis displayed. It means that thevehicle is trying to save the chargein the battery. Turn off unnecessaryaccessories to allow the battery torecharge.

LOW BATTERY

This message is displayed when thebattery voltage is low. See Batteryon page 10‑27 for more information.

SERVICE BATTERYCHARGING SYSTEM

This message is displayedwhen there is a fault in the batterycharging system. Take the vehicleto your dealer for service.

Brake System Messages

BRAKE FLUID LOW

This message is displayed when thebrake fluid level is low. See BrakeFluid on page 10‑25.

PRESS BRAKE PEDAL TORELEASE PARK BRAKE

This message is displayed if youattempt to release the electricparking brake without the brakepedal applied. See Parking Brakeon page 9‑33 for more information.



RELEASE PARK BRAKESWITCH

This message is displayed if theelectric parking brake is on whilethe vehicle is in motion. Releaseit before you attempt to drive.See Parking Brake on page 9‑33for more information.

SERVICE BRAKE ASSIST

This message may be displayedwhen there is a problem withthe brake boost assist system.When this message is displayed,the brake boost assist motormight be heard operating andyou might notice pulsation in thebrake pedal. This is normal underthese conditions. Take the vehicleto your dealer for service.

SERVICE PARKING BRAKE

This message is displayed whenthere is a problem with the electricparking brake. See Parking Brakeon page 9‑33 for more information.Take the vehicle to your dealer.

Compass Messages

CAL

This message is displayed whenthe compass needs to be calibrated.See Compass on page 5‑5.

– – –

Three dashes will be displayed if thecompass needs service. See yourdealer for service.

Cruise Control Messages

APPLY BRAKE BEFORECRUISE

If this message displays whenattempting to activate cruise control,apply the brake pedal and try again.

CRUISE SET TO XXX

This message displays when thecruise control is set and shows thespeed it was set to. See CruiseControl on page 9‑39 for moreinformation.

Door Ajar Messages

DRIVER DOOR OPEN

This message will display when thedriver door is open. Close the doorcompletely.

HOOD OPEN

This message will display whenthe hood is open. Close the hoodcompletely.

LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN

This message will display when thedriver side rear door is open. Closethe door completely.

PASSENGER DOOR OPEN

This message will display when thefront passenger door is open. Closethe door completely.

RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN

This message will display when thepassenger side rear door is open.Close the door completely.



TRUNK OPEN

This message will display whenthe trunk is open. Close the trunkcompletely.

Engine Cooling SystemMessages

A/C OFF DUE TO HIGHENGINE TEMP

This message displays whenthe engine coolant becomeshotter than the normal operatingtemperature. To avoid addedstrain on a hot engine, theair conditioning compressorautomatically turns off. Whenthe coolant temperature returnsto normal, the air conditioningcompressor turns back on.You can continue to drivethe vehicle.

If this message continues to appear,have the system repaired by yourdealer as soon as possible to avoiddamage to the engine.

COOLANT LEVEL LOW ADDCOOLANT

This message will display if thecoolant is low. See Engine Coolanton page 10‑18.

ENGINE OVERHEATED —IDLE ENGINE

This message displays when theengine coolant temperature is toohot. Stop and allow the vehicle toidle until it cools down.

ENGINE OVERHEATED —STOP ENGINE

This message displays and acontinuous chime sounds if theengine cooling system reachesunsafe temperatures for operation.Stop and turn off the vehicle assoon as it is safe to do so to avoidsevere damage. This messageclears when the engine has cooledto a safe operating temperature.

HIGH COOLANTTEMPERATURE

This message displays if the coolanttemperature is hot. See EngineOverheating on page 10‑21.

Engine Oil Messages

CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON

This message displays when theengine oil needs to be changed.When you change the engine oil,be sure to reset the Oil Life System.See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑13 and Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑25 forinformation on how to reset thesystem. See Engine Oil onpage 10‑9 and ScheduledMaintenance on page 11‑2for more information.



ENGINE OIL HOT, IDLEENGINE

This message displays when theengine oil temperature is too hot.Stop and allow the vehicle to idleuntil it cools down.

ENGINE OIL LOW — ADD OIL

This message displays when theengine oil level is too low. Checkthe oil level. See Engine Oil onpage 10‑9.

OIL PRESSURE LOW — STOPENGINE

This message displays if low oilpressure levels occur. Stop thevehicle as soon as safely possibleand do not operate it until the causeof the low oil pressure has beencorrected. Check the oil as soonas possible and have the vehicleserviced by your dealer.

Engine Power Messages

ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED

This message displays when thevehicle's engine power is reduced.Reduced engine power can affectthe vehicle's ability to accelerate.If this message is on, but thereis no reduction in performance,proceed to your destination.The performance may be reducedthe next time the vehicle is driven.The vehicle may be driven at areduced speed while this messageis on, but maximum accelerationand speed may be reduced.Anytime this message stays on,the vehicle should be taken toyour dealer for service as soonas possible.

Fuel System Messages

FUEL LEVEL LOW

This message displays when thevehicle is low on fuel. Refuel assoon as possible.

TIGHTEN GAS CAP

This message displays when thefuel cap is not on tight. Tighten thefuel cap.

Key and Lock Messages

NO REMOTE DETECTED

This message displays when thetransmitter battery is weak onvehicles with keyless access.See “Starting the Vehicle witha Low Transmitter Battery” underRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2‑4for more information.

REPLACE BATTERY INREMOTE KEY

This message displays when thebattery in the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter needsto be replaced.



Lamp Messages

AFL (Adaptive ForwardLighting) LAMPS NEEDSERVICE

This message displayswhen the Adaptive ForwardLighting (AFL) system is disabledand needs service. See yourdealer. See Adaptive ForwardLighting (AFL) on page 6‑4 formore information.

Object Detection SystemMessages

PARK ASSIST OFF

This message is displayed when thepark assist system has been turnedoff. See Ultrasonic Parking Assiston page 9‑42.

SERVICE PARK ASSIST

This message is displayed if thereis a problem with the park assistsystem. Take the vehicle to yourdealer for service.

Ride Control SystemMessages

SERVICE REAR AXLE

This message displays when thereis a problem with the All-WheelDrive (AWD) System. See yourdealer for service.

SERVICE TRACTIONCONTROL

This message displays when thereis a problem with the TractionControl System (TCS). When thismessage is displayed, the systemwill not limit wheel spin. Adjust yourdriving accordingly. See your dealerfor service.

SERVICE STABILITRAK

This message displays if thereis a problem with the StabiliTrak®

system. If this message appears, tryto reset the system. Stop; turn offthe engine for at least 15 seconds;then start the engine again. If thismessage still comes on, it meansthere is a problem. See your dealerfor service. The vehicle is safe todrive, however, you do not have thebenefit of StabiliTrak, so reduceyour speed and drive accordingly.

SPORT MODE ON

This message displays whenusing the selective ride control.See Selective Ride Control onpage 9‑38 for more information.

TRACTION CONTROL OFF

This message displays when theTraction Control System (TCS) isturned off. Adjust your drivingaccordingly.



Anti-Theft Alarm SystemMessages

THEFT ATTEMPTED

This message displays if the vehicledetects a tamper condition.

Tire Messages

TIRE PRESSURE LOW ADDAIR TO TIRE

On vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays when thepressure in one or more ofthe vehicle's tires is low.

The low tire pressure warninglight will also come on. See TirePressure Light on page 5‑23.

If a tire pressure message appearson the DIC, stop as soon as youcan. Inflate the tires by adding airuntil the tire pressure is equal tothe values shown on the Tireand Loading Information label.

See Tires on page 10‑46, VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑12, and TirePressure on page 10‑54.

You can receive more than onetire pressure message at a time.To read the other messages thatmay have been sent at the sametime, press the SET/CLR button.The DIC also shows the tirepressure values. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑25.

SERVICE TIRE MONITORSYSTEM

This message displays if there isa problem with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS). See TirePressure Monitor Operation onpage 10‑57 for more information.

TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE

This message displays whenthe system is learning new tires.See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10‑57 formore information.

Transmission Messages

SERVICE TRANSMISSION

This message displays if there isa problem with the transmission.See your dealer.

SHIFT TO PARK

This message displays when thetransmission needs to be shifted toP (Park). This may appear whenattempting to remove the key if thevehicle is not in P (Park).

TRANSMISSION HOT — IDLEENGINE

This message displays and a chimesounds if the transmission fluid inthe vehicle gets hot. Driving with thetransmission fluid temperature highcan cause damage to the vehicle.Stop the vehicle and let it idle toallow the transmission to cool.This message clears when the fluidtemperature reaches a safe level.



Window Messages

OPEN, THEN CLOSE DRIVERWINDOW

This message is displayed when thewindow needs to be reprogrammed.If the vehicle's battery has beenrecharged or disconnected, youwill need to reprogram each frontwindow for the express-up featureto work. See Power Windows onpage 2‑19 for more information.

OPEN, THEN CLOSEPASSENGER WINDOW

This message is displayed when thewindow needs to be reprogrammed.If the vehicle's battery has beenrecharged or disconnected, youwill need to reprogram each frontwindow for the express-up featureto work. See Power Windows onpage 2‑19 for more information.

VehiclePersonalizationThe audio system controls areused to access the personalizationmenus for customizing vehiclefeatures.

CONFIG (Configuration):Press to access the ConfigurationSettings Menu.

MENU/SELECT Knob: Pressthe center of this knob to enterthe menus and select menu items.Turn the knob to scroll through themenus.

0 BACK: Press to exit or movebackward in a menu.

Entering the PersonalizationMenus

1. Press CONFIG to access theConfiguration Settings menu.

2. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob tohighlight Vehicle Settings.

3. Press the center of theMENU/SELECT knob to selectthe Vehicle Settings menu.

The following list of menu items willbe available:. Climate and Air Quality. Comfort and Convenience. Collision/Detection Systems. Language. Lighting. Power Door Locks. Remote Lock/Unlock/Start. Return to Factory Settings

Turn the MENU/SELECT knob tohighlight the menu. Press the knobto select it. Each of the menus isdetailed in the following information.



Climate and Air Quality

Select the Climate and Air Qualitymenu and the following will bedisplayed:. Auto Fan Control. Air Quality Control. Auto Heated Seats. Remote Start Heated Seats. Remote Start Cooled Seats. Auto Defog. Auto Rear Defog

Auto Fan Control

This will allow you to select theautomatic fan speed. It can beadjusted to run lower or higherthan normal.

Press the MENU/SELECTknob when Auto Fan Control ishighlighted to open the menu.Turn the knob to highlight High,Medium, or Low. Press the knobto confirm the selection and moveback to the last menu.

Air Quality Control

This will allow you to select whetherthe system will operate at high orlow sensitivity. Only vehicles withthe dual zone climate control willhave this option.

Press the MENU/SELECTknob when Air Quality Controlis highlighted to open the menu.Turn the knob to highlight High orLow. Press the knob to confirm theselection and move back to thelast menu.

Remote Start Heated Seats

When on, this feature will turn theheated seats on when using remotestart on cold days.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen Remote Start Heated Seats ishighlighted. Turn the knob to selectOn or Off. Press the knob to confirmand go back to the last menu.

Remote Start Cooled Seats

When on, this feature will turn thecooled seats on when using remotestart on warm days.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen Remote Start Cooled Seats ishighlighted. Turn the knob to selectOn or Off. Press the knob to confirmand go back to the last menu.

Auto Defog

This will allow you to turn the autodefog on or off. Only vehicles withthe dual zone climate control willhave this option.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen Auto Defog is highlighted toopen the menu. Turn the knob tohighlight On or Off. Press the knobto confirm the selection and moveback to the last menu.



Auto Rear Defog

This will allow you to turn the autorear defog on or off. This featurewill automatically turn on the reardefogger when it is cold outside.

Press the MENU/SELECTknob when Auto Rear Defog ishighlighted to open the menu.Turn the knob to highlight Onor Off. Press the knob to confirmthe selection and move back tothe last menu.

Comfort and Convenience

Select the Comfort andConvenience menu and thefollowing will be displayed:. Chime Volume. Driver Seat Easy Exit. Park Tilt Mirrors

Chime Volume

This allows the selection of thechime volume level.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen Chime Volume is highlighted.Turn the knob to select Normal orHigh. Press the knob to confirmand go back to the last menu.

Driver Seat Easy Exit

When on, this feature will movethe driver seat rearward uponturning the ignition off and the driverdoor being opened. This may beperformed to make it easier to exitthe vehicle. See “Easy Exit DriverSeat” under Power Seat Adjustmenton page 3‑5 for more information.

This allows you to turn the easy exitseat feature on or off.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen Driver Seat Easy Exit ishighlighted. Turn the knob to selectOn or Off. Press the knob to confirmand go back to the last menu.

Park Tilt Mirrors

When on, both the driver andpassenger mirrors will tilt downwardwhen the vehicle is shifted toR (Reverse) to improve visibility ofthe ground near the rear wheels.They will return to their previousdriving position when the vehicleis shifted out of R (Reverse),the ignition is turned to OFF, orthe vehicle is left in R (Reverse).See Park Tilt Mirrors on page 2‑17for more information.

This allows you to turn the park tiltmirrors feature on or off.

Press the MENU/SELECTknob when Park Tilt Mirrors ishighlighted. Turn the knob to selectDriver & Passenger or Off. Pressthe knob to confirm and go backto the last menu.



Collision/Detection Systems

Select the Collision/DetectionSystems menu and the followingwill be displayed:. Side Blind Zone Alert System

Side Blind Zone Alert System

This allows the Side Blind ZoneAlert System feature to be turnedon or off.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen Park Assist is highlighted.Turn the knob to select On or Off.Press the knob to confirm and goback to the last menu.

Language

Select the Language menu and thefollowing will be displayed:. English. French. Spanish

Turn the MENU/SELECT knobto select the language. Press theknob to confirm and go back to thelast menu.

Lighting

Select the Lighting menu and thefollowing will be displayed:. Exit Lighting. Vehicle Locator Lights

Exit Lighting

This allows the selection of howlong the exterior lamps stay onwhen leaving the vehicle whenit is dark outside.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen Exit Lighting is highlighted.Turn the knob to select Off,30 Seconds, 1 Minute, or 2 Minutes.Press the knob to confirm and goback to the last menu.

Vehicle Locator Lights

This allows the vehicle locatorlights to be turned on or off. Thevehicle locator lights come on whenunlocking the vehicle with the RKEtransmitter.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen Vehicle Locator Lights ishighlighted. Turn the knob to selectOn or Off. Press the knob to confirmand go back to the last menu.

Power Door Locks

Select Power Door Locks and thefollowing will be displayed:. Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out. Delayed Door Lock. Auto Door Unlock



Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out

When on, this feature will keep thedriver door from locking when thedoor is open. If off is selected, theDelayed Door Lock menu will beavailable and the door will lock asprogrammed through this menu.

Press the MENU/SELECTknob when Auto Door Unlock ishighlighted. Turn the knob to selectOn or Off. Press the knob to confirmand go back to the last menu.

Delayed Door Lock

When on, this feature will delaythe locking of the doors untilfive seconds after the last door isclosed. You will hear three chimesto signal delayed locking is in use.

Pressing either the power lockbutton or the lock button on theRKE transmitter twice will overridethe delayed locking feature andimmediately lock all of the doors.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen Delayed Door Lock ishighlighted. Turn the knob to selectOn or Off. Press the knob to confirmand go back to the last menu.

Auto Door Unlock

This allows selection of which of thedoors will automatically unlock whenthe vehicle is shifted into P (Park).

Press the MENU/SELECTknob when Auto Door Unlockis highlighted. Turn the knob toselect All Doors, Driver Door, or Off.Press the knob to confirm and goback to the last menu.

Remote Lock/Unlock/Start

Select Remote Lock/Unlock/Startand the following will be displayed:. Unlock Feedback (Lights). Locking Feedback. Door Unlock Options. Remote Recall. Passive Entry. Remote Left In Vehicle

Unlock Feedback (Lights)

When on, the exterior lamps willflash when unlocking the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen Unlock Feedback (Lights) ishighlighted. Turn the knob to selectOn or Off. Press the knob to confirmand go back to the last menu.



Locking Feedback

This allows selection of what type offeedback is given when locking thevehicle with the RKE transmitter.

Press the MENU/SELECTknob when Locking Feedbackis highlighted. Turn the knob toselect Lights and Horn, Lights Only,Horn Only, or Off. Press the knobto confirm and go back to thelast menu.

Door Unlock Options

This allows selection of which doorswill unlock when pressing the unlockbutton on the RKE transmitter.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen Door Unlock Options ishighlighted. Turn the knob toselect All Doors or Driver Door Only.When set to Driver Door Only, the

driver door will unlock the first timethe unlock button is pressed and alldoors will unlock when the button ispressed a second time. When setto All Doors, all of the doors willunlock at the first press of theunlock button. Press the knobto confirm and go back to thelast menu.

Remote Recall

When on, this feature will recall thecurrent driver's last seat and outsidemirror positions upon unlockingthe driver door with the RKE, andopening that door. The current driveris identified when the RKE is usedto unlock the driver door. If keylessaccess equipped, the recall willoccur upon opening the driver door.See “Memory Remote Recall” underPower Seat Adjustment on page 3‑5for more information.

This allows the Remote Recallfeature to be turned on or off.Remote Recall is when thememorized settings will berecalled as you unlock andenter the vehicle.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen Remote Recall is highlighted.Turn the knob to select On or Off.Press the knob to confirm and goback to the last menu.

Passive Entry

This allows the Passive Entryfeature to be turned on or off.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen Passive Entry is highlighted.Turn the knob to select On or Off.Press the knob to confirm and goback to the last menu.



Remote Left In Vehicle

This allows the Remote Left InVehicle reminder feature to beturned on or off. If on, the hornwill chirp if a remote is left in thevehicle.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen Remote Left In Vehicle ishighlighted. Turn the knob to selectOn or Off. Press the knob to confirmand go back to the last menu.

Return to Factory Settings

Select Return to FactorySettings to return all of the vehiclepersonalization to the defaultsettings. Turn the knob to selectYes or No. Press the knob toconfirm and go back to thelast menu.

Universal RemoteSystemSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑20 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission(FCC) rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-210/220/310.

Universal Remote SystemProgramming

If the vehicle has this feature,you will see these buttons withone LED indicator next to themin the overhead console.

This system provides a way toreplace up to three remote controltransmitters used to activatedevices such as garage dooropeners, security systems, andhome automation devices.

Do not use the Universal Remotesystem with any garage door openerthat does not have the stop andreverse feature. This includesany garage door opener modelmanufactured before April 1,1982.

Read the instructions completelybefore attempting to programthe Universal Remote system.Because of the steps involved, itmay be helpful to have anotherperson available to assist withprogramming the UniversalRemote system.



Keep the original hand-heldtransmitter for use in other vehiclesas well as for future UniversalRemote system programming. It isalso recommended that upon thesale of the vehicle, the programmedUniversal Remote system buttonsbe erased for security purposes.See “Erasing Universal RemoteSystem Buttons” later in thissection.

When programming a garage door,park outside of the garage. Parkdirectly in line with and facing thegarage door opener motor-heador gate motor-head. Be sure thatpeople and objects are clear ofthe garage door or gate beingprogrammed.

It is recommended that a newbattery be installed in the hand-heldtransmitter for quicker and moreaccurate transmission of theradio-frequency signal.

Programming the UniversalRemote System

For questions or help programmingthe Universal Remote system,call 1‐800‐355‐3515 or go towww.homelink.com.

Programming a garage door openerinvolves time-sensitive actions, soread the entire procedure beforestarting. Otherwise, the device willtime out and the procedure will haveto be repeated.

To program up to three devices:

1. Hold the end of the hand-heldtransmitter about 3 to 8 cm(1 to 3 in) away from theUniversal Remote systembuttons while keeping theindicator light in view. Thehand-held transmitter wassupplied by the manufacturerof the garage door openerreceiver (motor-head unit).

2. At the same time, pressand hold both the hand-heldtransmitter button and oneof the three Universal Remotesystem buttons to be used tooperate the garage door. Do notrelease the Universal Remotesystem button or the hand-heldtransmitter button until theindicator light changes froma slowly to a rapidly flashinglight. You now may releaseboth buttons.

Some entry gates and garagedoor openers may requiresubstitution of Step 2 withthe procedure noted in “GateOperator and CanadianProgramming” later in thissection.



3. Press and hold for five secondsthe newly trained UniversalRemote system button (thebutton selected in Step 2) whileobserving the indicator light andgarage door activation.. If the indicator light stays on

continuously or the garagedoor starts to move whenthe Universal Remotesystem button is pressedand released, then theprogramming is complete.There is no need tocontinue programmingSteps 4 through 6.

. If the Universal Remotesystem indicator light blinksrapidly for two seconds,then turns to a constantlight and the garage doordoes not move, continuewith programming Steps 4through 6.

It may be helpful to haveanother person assist withthe remaining Steps 4through 6.

“Learn” or “Smart” Buttons

4. After Steps 1 through 3 havebeen completed, locate the“Learn” or “Smart” button insidethe garage on the garage dooropener receiver (motor-headunit). The name and colorof the button may vary bymanufacturer.

5. Firmly press and release the“Learn” or “Smart” button. Afteryou press this button, you willhave 30 seconds to completeStep 6.

6. Immediately return to thevehicle. Firmly press and holdfor two seconds the UniversalRemote system button, selectedin Step 2 to control the garagedoor, and then release it. If thegarage door does not move orthe lamp on the garage dooropener receiver (motor-headunit) does not flash, press andhold the same button a secondtime for two seconds, and thenrelease it. Again, if the doordoes not move or the garagedoor lamp does not flash, pressand hold the same button a thirdtime for two seconds, and thenrelease.

The Universal Remote systemshould now activate thegarage door.

To program the remaining twoUniversal Remote system buttons,begin with Step 1 of “Programmingthe Universal Remote System.”



Gate Operator and CanadianProgramming

If you have questions or need helpprogramming the Universal Remotesystem, call 1‐800‐355‐3515 or goto www.homelink.com.

Canadian radio-frequency lawsrequire transmitter signals to timeout or quit after several seconds oftransmission. This may not be longenough for the Universal Remotesystem to pick up the signal duringprogramming. Similarly, some U.S.gate operators are manufactured totime out in the same manner.

If you live in Canada, or you arehaving difficulty programminga gate operator or garage dooropener by using the “Programmingthe Universal Remote System”procedures, regardless of whereyou live, replace Step 2 under“Programming the Universal RemoteSystem” with the following:

Continue to press and holdthe Universal Remote systembutton while you press andrelease every two seconds (cycle)the hand-held transmitter buttonuntil the frequency signal hasbeen successfully accepted bythe Universal Remote system.The Universal Remote systemindicator light will flash slowly atfirst and then rapidly. Proceed withStep 3 under “Programming theUniversal Remote System” tocomplete.

Universal Remote SystemOperation

Using the Universal RemoteSystem

Press and hold the appropriateUniversal Remote systembutton for at least half of a second.The indicator light will come onwhile the signal is being transmitted.

Erasing Universal RemoteSystem Buttons

All programmed buttons should beerased when the vehicle is sold orthe lease ends.

To erase all programmed buttonson the Universal Remote systemdevice:

1. Press and hold down thetwo outside buttons until theindicator light begins to flash.This should take about10 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.



Reprogramming a SingleUniversal Remote SystemButton

To reprogram any of the threeUniversal Remote system buttons:

1. Press and hold the desiredUniversal Remote systembutton. Do not release thebutton.

2. The indicator light will begin toflash after 20 seconds. Withoutreleasing the button, proceedwith Step 1 of the section“Programming the UniversalRemote System.”

If you have questions or need helpprogramming the Universal Remotesystem, call 1‐800‐355‐3515 or goto www.homelink.com. You mayalso call the customer assistancephone number under CustomerAssistance Offices (U.S. andCanada) on page 13‑5 or CustomerAssistance Offices (Mexico) onpage 13‑6.



2 NOTES


Lighting 6-1

Lighting

Exterior LightingExterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lamps OffReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Automatic HeadlampSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Adaptive ForwardLighting (AFL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-4Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Interior LightingInstrument Panel IlluminationControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Sun Visor Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Lighting FeaturesEntry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Battery Load Management . . . . 6-6Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-7

Exterior Lighting

Exterior Lamp Controls

The exterior lamp control is locatedon the instrument panel on theoutboard side of the steering wheel.


6-2 Lighting

Turn the control to the followingpositions:

O (Off): Turns off the exteriorlamps. The knob returns to theAUTO position after it is released.Turn to off again to reactivate theAUTO mode.

AUTO (Automatic): Automaticallyturns the exterior lamps on and off,depending on outside lighting.

The current status of the AUTOsystem is displayed in the DriverInformation Center (DIC) upleveldisplay. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑25.

; (Parking Lamps): Turns onthe parking lamps together with thefollowing:. Sidemarker Lamps. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights

5 (Headlamps): Turns on theheadlamps together with thefollowing:. Sidemarker Lamps. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights. Parking Lamps

Exterior Lamps OffReminderA warning chime sounds if the driverdoor is opened while the ignition isoff and the exterior lamps are on.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer23 Headlamp High/Low‐BeamChanger: Push the turn signal/lanechange lever away from you andrelease, to turn the high beams on.To return to low beams, push thelever again or pull it toward youand release.

This indicator light turns on in theinstrument panel cluster when thehigh‐beam headlamps are on.

Flash-to-PassTo flash the high beams, pull theturn signal/lane change lever towardyou, and release.


Lighting 6-3

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) canmake it easier for others to see thefront of your vehicle during the day.Fully functional daytime runninglamps are required on all vehiclesfirst sold in Canada.

The DRL system turns on thelow-beam headlamps at a reducedbrightness. For vehicles withHigh Intensity Discharge (HID)headlamps, the dedicated DRLwill come on when all of thefollowing conditions are met:. The engine is running.. The exterior lamp band is

in AUTO.. The light sensor determines it is

daytime.

When the DRL are on, thelow-beam headlamps will beon. The taillamps, sidemarker,instrument panel lights, andother lamps will not be on.

The DRL turn off when theheadlamps are turned to O orthe ignition is off.

Automatic HeadlampSystemWhen the exterior lamp control isset to AUTO and it is dark enoughoutside, the headlamps come onautomatically.

There is a light sensor located ontop of the instrument panel. Do notcover the sensor or the headlampswill come on when they are notneeded.

The system may also turn on theheadlamps when driving througha parking garage or tunnel.

When it is bright enough outside,the headlamps will turn off or maychange to Daytime RunningLamps (DRL).

The automatic headlamp systemturns off when the exterior lampcontrol is turned to O or the ignitionis off.


6-4 Lighting

Adaptive ForwardLighting (AFL)The Adaptive Forward LightingSystem (AFL) pivots the headlampshorizontally to provide greaterroad illumination while turning.To enable AFL, set the exteriorlamp switch to the AUTO position.Moving the switch out of the AUTOposition deactivates the system.AFL operates when the vehiclespeed is greater than 3 km/h(2 mph). AFL does not operatewhen the transmission is inR (Reverse). AFL is not immediatelyoperable after starting the vehicle;driving a short distance is requiredto calibrate the AFL. See ExteriorLamp Controls on page 6‑1.

Hazard Warning Flashers| Hazard Warning Flasher:Press this button located on theinstrument panel below the climatecontrol system, to make the frontand rear turn signal lamps flashon and off. Press again to turn theflashers off.

The hazard warning flashers turn onautomatically if the airbags deploy.

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

Move the lever all the way up ordown to signal a turn.

An arrow on the instrument panelcluster flashes in the direction of theturn or lane change.

Raise or lower the lever until thearrow starts to flash to signal a lanechange. Hold it there until the lanechange is completed. If the lever isbriefly pressed and released, theturn signal flashes three times.

The turn and lane‐change signalcan be turned off manually bymoving the lever back to itsoriginal position.

If after signaling a turn or lanechange the arrow flashes rapidlyor does not come on, a signal bulbmight be burned out.

Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulbis not burned out, check the fuse.See Fuses and Circuit Breakers onpage 10‑39.


Lighting 6-5

Fog LampsFor vehicles with fog lamps, thebutton is located on the exteriorlamp control, on the outboard sideof the steering wheel.

To turn on the fog lamps, the ignitionand the headlamps or parking lampsmust be on.

If the fog lamps are turned on whilethe exterior lamp switch is in theAUTO position, the headlampscome on automatically.

# : Press to turn on or off. Anindicator light on the instrumentpanel cluster comes on when thefog lamps are on.

Some localities have laws thatrequire the headlamps to be onalong with the fog lamps.

Interior Lighting

Instrument PanelIllumination ControlThe brightness of the instrumentpanel lighting and steeringwheel controls can be adjusted.Use the thumbwheel located nextto the exterior lamps control on theoutboard side of the steering wheel.

D : Move the thumbwheel up ordown to brighten or dim the lights.

Dome LampsThe interior lamps control located inthe overhead console controls boththe front and rear interior lamps.

To operate, press the followingbuttons:

( (Off): Turns the lamps off.

H Door: Turns the lamps onwhen any door is opened.

' ON: Keeps the lamps on allthe time.

Reading LampsThere are front and rear readinglamps.

The front reading lamps are locatedin the overhead console.

#$ : Press to turn each lamp onor off.

The rear reading lamps are locatedin the headliner.

Sun Visor LampsThis lamp turns on when the coveris opened.


6-6 Lighting

Lighting Features

Entry LightingThe headlamps, taillamps, licenseplate lamps, back‐up lamps, domelamps, and most of the interior lightsturn on briefly, when the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) K button ispressed, or when the door handle ispulled on a keyless access vehicle.See Ignition Positions (Key Access)on page 9‑17 or Ignition Positions(Keyless Access) on page 9‑19.After about 30 seconds the exteriorlamps turn off, and then the domelamps and remaining interior lightswill dim to off. Entry lighting can bedisabled manually by changing theignition out of the OFF position,or by pressing the RKE Q button.

This feature can be changed.See Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑39.

Exit LightingThe headlamps, taillamps, parkinglamps, back‐up lamps, and licenseplate lamps come on at night, or inareas with limited lighting, when thekey is removed from the ignition.The dome lamps also come onwhen the key is removed from theignition. The exterior lights anddome lamps remain on after thedoor is closed for a set amount oftime, then automatically turn off.

For a vehicle with keyless access,the exterior lights and dome lampsautomatically turn on when a dooris opened after the ignition is turnedoff. See Ignition Positions (KeyAccess) on page 9‑17 or IgnitionPositions (Keyless Access) onpage 9‑19.

The exterior lights turn offimmediately by turning theexterior lamps control to OFF.

This feature can be changed.See Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑39.

Battery LoadManagementThe vehicle has Electric PowerManagement (EPM) that estimatesthe battery's temperature and stateof charge. It then adjusts the voltagefor best performance and extendedlife of the battery.

When the battery's state of chargeis low, the voltage is raised slightlyto quickly bring the charge back up.When the state of charge is high,the voltage is lowered slightly toprevent overcharging. If the vehiclehas a voltmeter gauge or a voltagedisplay on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), you may see thevoltage move up or down. This isnormal. If there is a problem, analert will be displayed.


Lighting 6-7

The battery can be discharged atidle if the electrical loads are veryhigh. This is true for all vehicles.This is because the generator(alternator) may not be spinningfast enough at idle to produceall the power needed for veryhigh electrical loads.

A high electrical load occurs whenseveral of the following are on,such as: headlamps, high beams,fog lamps, rear window defogger,climate control fan at high speed,heated seats, engine cooling fans,trailer loads, and loads plugged intoaccessory power outlets.

EPM works to prevent excessivedischarge of the battery. It does thisby balancing the generator's outputand the vehicle's electrical needs.

It can increase engine idle speedto generate more power, wheneverneeded. It can temporarily reducethe power demands of someaccessories.

Normally, these actions occurin steps or levels, without beingnoticeable. In rare cases at thehighest levels of corrective action,this action may be noticeable to thedriver. If so, a Driver InformationCenter (DIC) message might bedisplayed, such as BATTERYSAVER ACTIVE, BATTERYVOLTAGE LOW, or LOW BATTERY.If one of these messages displays,it is recommended that the driverreduce the electrical loads as muchas possible. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑25.

Battery Power ProtectionThe battery saver feature isdesigned to protect the vehicle'sbattery.

If the exterior lamps or any interiorlight is left on and the ignition isturned off, the battery rundownprotection system automaticallyturns the lamp off after about10 minutes.


6-8 Lighting

2 NOTES


Infotainment System 7-1

InfotainmentSystem

IntroductionInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2Overview (Radio with CD) . . . . . 7-3Overview (Radio with CD/DVDand MEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

RadioAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19Backglass Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-19Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . 7-20

Audio PlayersCD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23Mass StorageMedia (MEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27

Auxiliary Devices(Radio with CD) . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31

Auxiliary Devices (Radio withCD/DVD and MEM) . . . . . . . . 7-34

Rear Seat InfotainmentRear Seat Entertainment(RSE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36

PhoneBluetooth (Overview) . . . . . . . . 7-46Bluetooth (InfotainmentControls) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48

Bluetooth (VoiceRecognition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53

Introduction

InfotainmentRead the following pages tobecome familiar with the audiosystem's features.

{ WARNING

Taking your eyes off the roadfor extended periods couldcause a crash resulting ininjury or death to you or others.Do not give extended attention toentertainment tasks while driving.

This system provides access tomany audio and non‐audio listings.


7-2 Infotainment System

To minimize taking your eyes off theroad while driving, do the followingwhile the vehicle is parked:. Become familiar with the

operation and controls of theaudio system.

. Set up the tone, speakeradjustments, and presetradio stations.

For more information, see DefensiveDriving on page 9‑2.

Notice: Contact your dealerbefore adding any equipment.

Adding audio or communicationequipment could interfere withthe operation of the engine, radio,or other systems, and coulddamage them. Follow federalrules covering mobile radioand telephone equipment.

The vehicle has RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). With RAP,the audio system can be playedeven after the ignition is turnedoff. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 9‑24for more information.

Navigation System

For vehicles with a navigationsystem, see the separate NavigationSystem Manual.

Theft-Deterrent FeatureThe theft-deterrent feature worksby learning a portion of the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) tothe infotainment system. Theinfotainment system does notoperate if it is stolen or movedto a different vehicle.



Overview (Radio with CD) A. VOL/ O. Turns the system on or off

and adjusts the volume.

B. FAV. Radio: Opens the

favorites list.

C. Buttons 1 to 6. Radio: Saves and selects

favorite stations.

D. INFO. Radio: Shows available

information about thecurrent station.

. CD: Shows availableinformation about thecurrent track.

E. TUNE. Radio: Manually selects

radio stations.. CD: Selects tracks.



F. CD/AUX. Selects the CD player or

an external audio source.

G. g. Radio: Seeks the previous

station.. CD: Select the previous

track or rewinds within atrack.

H. X CD Eject

. Removes a disc from theCD slot.

I. l. Radio: Seeks the next

station.. CD: Select the next track

or fast forwards within atrack.

J. RADIO/BAND. Changes the band while

listening to the radio.. Selects the radio when

listening to a differentaudio source.

K. Menu Knob. Opens menus, highlights

menu items, or setsnumeric values whilein a menu.

L. SELECT. Selects menu items.

M. CONFIG. Opens the Settings menu.

N. 0 BACK

. Menu: Moves onelevel back.

. Character Input: Deletesthe last character.

O. H. Opens the Clock menu.

P. TONE. Opens the Tone menu.

Q. 5. Opens the Phone

main menu.. Mutes the audio system.



Overview (Radio with CD/DVD and MEM) A. VOL/ O. Turns the system on or off

and adjusts the volume.

B. FAV. Radio: Opens the

favorites list.. MEM: Opens the

favorites list.

C. Buttons 1 to 6. Radio: Saves and selects

favorite stations.. MEM: Saves and selects

favorite tracks andplaylists.

D. INFO. Radio: Shows available

information about thecurrent station.

. CD: Shows availableinformation about thecurrent track.



E. TUNE/k. Manually selects radio

stations and pauses timeshifted content.

. CD/DVD: Select tracks,pauses playback, andstops playback.

. MEM: Select tracks andpauses playback.

F. RADIO/BAND. Changes the band while

listening to the radio.. Selects the radio when

listening to a differentaudio source.

G. g. Radio: Seeks the previous

station.. CD: Selects the previous

track or rewinds within atrack.

. MEM: Selects the previoustrack or rewinds within atrack.

H. X CD Eject

. Removes a disc from theCD slot.

I. RECO. AUX: Records content

from audio CDs,MP3/WMA CDs, andUSB mass storagedevices.

J. DEL. MEM: Deletes the current

track from MEM.

K. l. Radio: Seeks the next

station.. CD: Selects the next track

or fast forwards within atrack.

. MEM: Selects the nexttrack or fast forwardswithin a track.

L. SELECT. Selects menu items.

M. Menu Knob. Opens menus, highlights

menu items, or setsnumeric values whilein a menu.

N. 0 BACK

. Menu: Moves onelevel back.

. Character Input: Deletesthe last character.

O. TONE. Opens the Tone menu.

P. H. Opens the Clock menu.

Q. CONFIG. Opens the Settings menu.



R. 5. Opens the Phone

main menu.. Mutes the audio system.

S. MEM/DVD/AUX. Selects MEM, CD/DVD,

USB, or a connected frontor rear auxiliary audiosource.

Operation

Controls

The infotainment system isoperated by using the pushbuttons,multifunction knobs, menus shownon the display, and steering wheelcontrols, if equipped.

Turning the System On or Off

VOL/ O (Volume/Power): Press toturn the system on and off.

Automatic Switch‐Off

If the infotainment system hasbeen turned on after the ignition isturned off, the system will turn offautomatically after 10 minutes.

Volume Control

VOL/ O (Volume/Power): Turn toadjust the volume.

5 (Phone/Mute): For vehicles withOnStar®, press and hold 5 to mutethe infotainment system. Press andhold 5 again, or turn the VOL/ Oknob to cancel mute.

For vehicles without OnStar®,press 5 to mute the infotainment

system. Press 5 again, or turn

the VOL/ O knob to cancel mute.

Menu System

Controls

The Menu knob, SELECT button,and 0 BACK button are used tonavigate the menu system.

Menu Knob: Turn to:. Enter the menu system.. Highlight a menu option.. Select a value.

SELECT: Press to:. Select or activate the highlighted

menu option.. Confirm a set value.. Turn a system setting on or off.

0 BACK: Press to:. Exit a menu.. Return from a submenu screen

to the previous menu screen.. Delete the last character in a

sequence.



Selecting a Menu Option

1. Turn the Menu knob to move thehighlighted bar.

2. Press the SELECT button toselect the highlighted option.

Submenus

An arrow on the right‐hand edge ofthe menu indicates that it has asubmenu with other options.

Activating a Setting

1. Turn the Menu knob to highlightthe setting.

2. Press the SELECT button toactivate the setting.

Setting a Value

1. Turn the Menu knob to changethe current value of the setting.

2. Press the SELECT button toconfirm the setting.

Turning a Function On or Off

1. Turn the Menu knob to highlightthe function.

2. Press the SELECT button to turnthe function on or off.

Entering a Character Sequence

1. Turn the Menu knob to highlightthe character.

2. Press the SELECT button toselect the character.



Press the 0 BACK button to deletethe last character in the sequenceor press and hold to delete theentire character sequence.

Audio Settings

The audio settings can be set foreach radio band and each audioplayer source.

To quickly reset an audio settingvalue to 0:

1. Press the TONE button.

2. Select the audio setting.

3. Press and hold the SELECTbutton until the value changesto 0.

Press the 0 BACK button to goback to the Tone Settings menu.

Adjusting the Treble, Midrange,and Bass


2. Select Treble, Midrange,or Bass.

3. Select the value.


Adjusting the Fader and Balance


2. Select Fader or Balance.

3. Select the value.




Adjusting the EQ (Equalizer)

For vehicles with an equalizer:


2. Select EQ.

3. Select the setting.


DSP (Digital Signal Processing)Settings

For vehicles with DSP, it is usedto provide a choice of differentlistening experiences.

The DSP settings for the Radio withCD are:. normal ‐ Select this setting

to adjust the audio for stereomode. This provides the bestsound quality for the driver seatfirst, with the front passengersecond.

. hk surround ‐ Select to enablehk surround. This produces atrue 6.1 matrix surround fromany two channel digital source.This feature is not available inAM/FM radio mode.

The DSP settings for the Radio withCD/DVD and MEM are:. 2.0 normal ‐ Select this setting

to adjust the audio for stereomode. This provides the bestsound quality for the driver seatfirst, with the front passengersecond.

. hk surround ‐ Select to enablehk surround. This produces atrue 6.1 matrix surround fromany two channel digital source.This feature is not available inAM/FM radio mode.

To adjust the DSP settings:


2. Select DSP.





System Settings

Configuring the Number ofFavorite Pages

To configure the number of availablefavorite pages:

1. Press the CONFIG button.

2. Select Radio Settings.

3. Select Radio Favorites.

4. Select the number of availablefavorite pages.

5. Press the 0 BACK buttonto go back to the SystemConfiguration menu.

Auto Volume

The auto volume featureautomatically adjusts the radiovolume to compensate for roadand wind noise as the vehiclespeeds up or slows down, so thatthe volume level is consistent.

The level of volume compensationcan be selected, or the auto volumefeature can be turned off.



3. Select Auto Volume.



Maximum Startup Volume

The maximum volume played whenthe Radio with CD is first turned oncan be set.



3. Select Maximum StartupVolume.





Radio

AM-FM Radio

Control Buttons

The buttons used to control theradio are:

RADIO/BAND: Press to turn theradio on and choose between AM,FM, and XM™, if equipped.

Menu Knob: Turn to navigate theavailable menus.

TUNE: Turn to search for stations.

INFO: Press to display additionalinformation that may be availablefor the current song.

g /l : Press to search forstations.

FAV: Press to open the favoriteslist and select the favorites page.

1 to 6: Press to select presetstations.

k (Play/Pause): Press to pausetime shifted content, if equipped.

RDS (Radio Data System)

The radio may have RDS.The RDS feature is availablefor use only on FM stations thatbroadcast RDS information.This feature only works when theinformation from the radio stationis available. In rare cases, a radiostation could broadcast incorrectinformation that causes the radiofeatures to work improperly. If thishappens, contact the radio station.

While the radio is tuned to anFM-RDS station, the station nameor call letters display.

Radio Menus

Radio menus are available for AMand FM.

Turn the Menu knob to open themain radio menu for that band.

Selecting a Band

Press the RADIO/BAND button tochoose AM, FM, or XM, if equipped.The last station that was playingstarts playing again.

Selecting a Station

Seek Tuning (Radio with CD)

If the radio station is not known:

Briefly pressg orl toautomatically search for the nextavailable station. If a station is notfound, the radio switches to a moresensitive search level. If a stationstill is not found, the frequencythat was last active begins to play.

If the radio station is known:

Press and holdg orl until thestation on the display is reached,then release the button.

Seek Tuning (Radio with CD/DVDand MEM)

Briefly pressg orl toautomatically search for the nextavailable station. If a station is notfound, the radio switches to a moresensitive search level. If a stationstill is not found, the frequency thatwas last active begins to play.



Manual Tuning

Turn the TUNE knob to select thefrequency on the display.

Favorites List

1. Turn the Menu knob.

2. Select Favorites List.

3. Select the station.

Station Lists


2. Select AM or FM Station List.All receivable stations in thecurrent reception area aredisplayed. If a station list hasnot been created, an automaticstation search is done.


Category Lists

Most stations that broadcastan RDS program type codespecify the type of programmingtransmitted. Some stations changethe program type code dependingon the content. The system storesthe RDS stations sorted by programtype in the FM category list.

To search for a programming typedetermined by station:


2. Select FM category list. A list ofall programming types availabledisplays.

3. Select the programming type.A list of stations that transmitprogramming of the selectedtype displays.


The category lists are updatedwhen the station lists areupdated.

Updating Station & Category Lists

If stations stored in the station listcan no longer be received:


2. Select Update AM or FM StationList, if the stations stored inthe station list are no longerreceived. A station searchwill be completed and thefirst station in the updatedlist will play.

To cancel the station search, pressthe SELECT button.

Storing a Station as a Favorite

Stations from all bands can bestored in any order in the favoritepages.

Up to six stations can be stored ineach favorite page and the numberof available favorite pages canbe set.



Storing Stations

To store the station to a positionin the list, press the correspondingbutton 1 to 6 until a beep is heard.

Retrieving Stations

Press the FAV button to open afavorite page or to switch to anotherfavorite page. Briefly press one ofthe 1 to 6 buttons to retrieve thestation.

Time Shifting (Radio withCD/DVD and MEM)

The radio with MEM time shiftfeature can rewind 20 minutes ofFM/AM content. While listeningto the radio, the content from thecurrent station is always beingbuffered.

Pressk to pause the radio.The radio displays the time shiftstatus bar. The status bar showsthe amount of content stored in thebuffer and the current pause point.

To resume playback from thecurrent pause point, pressk again.The radio is no longer live, butplayed from the time shift buffer.A status bar displays below thestation number.

Press and holdl org to fastforward or rewind through the timeshift buffer. Holdl until the endof the recorded buffer resumeslive playback.

Press and releasel org to jumpforward or back 30 seconds in thetime shift buffer.

When the radio station ischanged, the buffer is clearedand automatically restarted forthe current station. Content froma previously tuned station is nolonger available.

The time shift feature is notavailable while recording orwith other sources of playback.

Pausing AM/FM with the VehicleTurned Off

If AM/FM is paused when thevehicle is turned off, the radiocontinues to buffer the currentradio station for up to 20 minutes.If the vehicle is turned back onwithin 20 minutes, the radioresumes playback from thepaused point.



Satellite RadioVehicles with an XM™ SatelliteRadio tuner and a valid XM SatelliteRadio subscription can receive XMprogramming.

XM Satellite Radio Service

XM is a satellite radio servicebased in the 48 contiguousUnited States and 10 Canadianprovinces. XM Satellite Radio hasa wide variety of programming andcommercial-free music, coast tocoast, and in digital-quality sound.A service fee is required to receivethe XM service. If XM Serviceneeds to be reactivated, the radiowill display "No SubscriptionPlease Renew" on channel XM1.For more information, contactXM at www.xmradio.com or1-800-929-2100 in the U.S.,and www.xmradio.ca or1-877-438-9677 in Canada.

Control Buttons

The buttons used to control the XMradio are:

RADIO/BAND: Press to turn theradio on and choose between AM,FM, and XM, if equipped.

g /l : Press to go to theprevious or next channel.

FAV: Press to open thefavorites list.

1 to 6: Press to select a favorite.

TUNE: Turn to select channel.

INFO: Press to display additionalinformation that may be availableabout the current song.

k (Play/Pause): Press to pausetime shifted content, if equipped.

Selecting the XM Band

Press the RADIO/BAND button tochoose between the AM, FM andXM bands. The last channel playedin that band begins to play whenthat band is selected.

XM Categories

XM channels are organized incategories.

Removing or Adding Categories

Channels in a category thathave been removed can still beaccessed by usingg orl,or the TUNE knob.

To add or remove categories:



3. Select XM Categories.

4. Turn the Menu knob to highlightthe category.

5. Press the SELECT button toremove or add the category.

Selecting an XM Channel

XM channels can be selected byusingg,l, the TUNE knob,or the menu system.



Selecting a Channel Usingg or

l (Radio with CD)

. Press and releaseg orlto go to the previous or nextchannel.

. Press and holdg orl toscroll through the previous ornext channel until the channelis reached.

Selecting a Channel Usingg or

l (Radio with CD/DVD and MEM)

Press and releaseg orl to go tothe previous or next channel.

Selecting a Channel Using theTUNE Knob

To select an XM channel using theTUNE knob:

Turn the TUNE knob to highlight anXM channel, the channel is selectedafter a short delay.

To select a channel using the menu:

1. Turn the Menu knob and selectChannel List.

2. Select the desired channel.

Selecting a Channel Using theMenu System


2. Select XM Category List.

3. Select the category.

4. Select the channel.

Storing an XM Channel as aFavorite

Channels from all bands can bestored in any order in the favoritepages.

Up to six channels can be stored ineach favorite page and the numberof available favorite pages canbe set.

Storing a Channel as a Favorite

To store the channel to a positionin the list, press and hold thecorresponding 1 to 6 button untilthe channel can be heard again.

Retrieving Channels

Press the FAV button to opena favorite page or to change toanother favorite page. Briefly pressone of the 1 to 6 buttons to retrievethe channel.



Time Shifting (Radio withCD/DVD and MEM)

The radio with MEM time shiftfeature can rewind 20 minutes ofXM content. While listening to theradio, the content from the currentchannel is always being buffered.

Pressk to pause the radio.The radio displays the time shiftstatus bar. The status bar showsthe amount of content stored in thebuffer and the current pause point.

To resume playback from thecurrent pause point, pressk again.The radio is no longer live, butplayed from the time shift buffer.A status bar displays below thechannel number.

Press and holdl org to fastforward or rewind through the timeshift buffer. Holdl until the endof the recorded buffer resumeslive playback.

Press and releasel org to go tothe next or previous song in the timeshift buffer.

When the channel is changed, thebuffer is cleared and automaticallyrestarted for the current channel.Content from a previously tunedstation is no longer available.

The time shift feature is notavailable while recording orwith other sources of playback.

Pausing XM with the VehicleTurned Off

If XM is paused when the vehicle isturned off, the radio continues tobuffer the current radio station forup to 20 minutes. If the vehicle isturned back on within 20 minutes,the radio resumes playback fromthe paused point.

XM Messages

XL (Explicit LanguageChannels): These channels, or anyothers, can be blocked by request,by calling 1-800-929-2100 in theU.S. and 1-877-438-9677 inCanada.

XM Updating: The encryption codein the receiver is being updated.No action is required. This processshould take no longer than30 seconds.

Loading XM: The audio system isacquiring and processing audio andtext data. No action is needed. Thismessage should disappear shortly.

Channel Off Air: This channel isnot currently in service. Tune in toanother channel.



Channel Unauth: This channel isblocked or cannot be received withyour XM Subscription package.

Channel Unavailable: Thispreviously assigned channel is nolonger assigned. Tune to anotherstation.

No Artist Info: The systemis working properly. No artistinformation is available at thistime on this channel.

No Title Info: The system isworking properly. No song titleinformation is available at thistime on this channel.

No CAT Info: The system isworking properly. No categoryinformation is available at thistime on this channel.

No Information: The systemis working properly. No text orinformational messages areavailable at this time on thischannel.

No Subscription Please Renew:XM subscription needs to bereactivated. Contact XM atwww.xmradio.com or call1-800-929-2100 in the U.S.and www.xmradio.ca or call1-877-438-9677 in Canada.

No XM Signal: The system isworking properly. The vehicle maybe in a location that where the XMsignal is being blocked. When thevehicle is moved into an open area,the signal should return.

CAT Not Found: The system isworking properly. There are nochannels available for the selectedcategory.

XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0,this message alternates with theXM Radio eight‐digit radio ID label.This label is needed to activate theservice.

Unknown: If this message isreceived when tuned to channel 0,there could be a receiver fault.Consult with your dealer.

Check Antenna: If this messagedoes not clear within a short periodof time, the receiver could have afault. Consult with your dealer.

XM Not Available: If this messagedoes not clear within a short periodof time, the receiver could have afault. Consult with your dealer.



Radio ReceptionFrequency interference andstatic can occur during normalradio reception if items such ascellular phone chargers, vehicleconvenience accessories, andexternal electronic devices areplugged into the accessory poweroutlet. If there is interference orstatic, unplug the item from theaccessory power outlet.

FM

FM signals only reach about16 to 65 km (10 to 40 mi). Althoughthe radio has a built-in electroniccircuit that automatically works toreduce interference, some staticcan occur, especially around tallbuildings or hills, causing thesound to fade in and out.

AM

The range for most AM stations isgreater than for FM, especially atnight. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interferewith each other. For better radioreception, most AM radio stationsboost the power levels during theday, and then reduce these levelsduring the night. Static can alsooccur when things like storms andpower lines interfere with radioreception. When this happens, tryreducing the treble on the radio.

XM™ Satellite Radio Service

XM satellite radio service givesdigital radio reception from coastto coast in the 48 contiguousUnited States, and in Canada.Just as with FM, tall buildings orhills can interfere with satellite radiosignals, causing the sound to fadein and out. In addition, travelingor standing under heavy foliage,bridges, garages, or tunnels maycause loss of the XM signal for aperiod of time.

Cellular Phone Usage

Cellular phone usage may causeinterference with the vehicle's radio.This interference may occur whenmaking or receiving phone calls,charging the phone's battery,or simply having the phone on.This interference can cause anincreased level of static whilelistening to the radio. If static isreceived while listening to theradio, unplug the cellular phoneand turn it off.

Backglass AntennaThe AM-FM antenna is integratedwith the rear window defogger,located in the rear window. Makesure that the inside surface of therear window is not scratched andthat the lines on the glass are notdamaged. If the inside surface isdamaged, it could interfere withradio reception. For proper radioreception, the antenna connectorneeds to be properly attached tothe post on the glass.



If a cellular telephone antennaneeds to be attached to the glass,make sure that the grid lines for theAM-FM antenna are not damaged.There is enough space betweenthe grid lines to attach a cellulartelephone antenna withoutinterfering with radio reception.

Notice: Using a razor blade orsharp object to clear the insiderear window can damage the rearwindow antenna and/or the rearwindow defogger. Repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not clear the insiderear window with sharp objects.

Notice: Do not apply aftermarketglass tinting with metallic film.The metallic film in some tintingmaterials will interfere withor distort the incoming radioreception. Any damage causedto your backglass antenna dueto metallic tinting materials willnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Satellite Radio AntennaFor vehicles with XM satellite radioservice, the antenna is located onthe roof of the vehicle. Keep theantenna clear of obstructions forclear radio reception.

Audio Players

CD PlayerThe CD player can play audio CDsand MP3 CDs.

The CD player will not play8 cm (3 in) CDs.

Care of CDs

Sound quality can be reduced dueto disc quality, recording method,quality of the music recorded, andhow the disc has been handled.Handle discs carefully and storethem in their original cases or otherprotective cases away from directsunlight and dust. If the bottomsurface of a disc is damaged, thedisc may not play properly or at all.



Do not touch the bottom surface ofa disc while handling it; this coulddamage the surface. Pick up discsby grasping the outer edges or theedge of the hole and the outer edge.

If the bottom surface of a disc isdirty, take a soft, lint‐free cloth,or dampen a clean, soft cloth ina mild neutral detergent solutionmixed with water, and clean it.Wipe the disc from the centerto the outer edge.

Care of the CD Player

Do not add a label to a disc, as itcould get caught in the CD player.If a label is needed, label thetop of the recorded disc with amarking pen.

Do not use disc lens cleanersbecause they could contaminate thelens of the disc optics and damagethe CD player.

Notice: If a label is added to aCD, more than one CD is insertedinto the slot at a time, or anattempt is made to play scratchedor damaged CDs, the CD playercould be damaged. While usingthe CD player, use only CDs ingood condition without any label,load one CD at a time, and keepthe CD player and the loading slotfree of foreign materials, liquids,and debris.

Control Buttons

The buttons used to control the CDplayer are:

CD/AUX: Press to use the CDplayer.

l /g : Press to select tracks orto fast forward or rewind within atrack.

INFO: Press to display additionalinformation about the current trackthat may be available.

TUNE: Turn to select tracks.

Menu Knob: Turn to enterthe menu.

SELECT: Press to select an item.

X (Eject): Press to eject the disc.



Inserting a CD

With the printed side facing up,insert a disc into the CD slot untilit is drawn in.

Removing a CD

PressX.

The disc is pushed out of theCD slot.

If the disc is not removed after it isejected, it is pulled back in after afew seconds.

Playing a CD or MP3 CD

Press the CD/AUX button. If thereis a disc in the player, it beginsplaying.

Information about the disc andcurrent track is shown on thedisplay depending on the datastored.

Selecting a CD Track

Using the control buttons:

. Pressg orl to select theprevious or next track.

. Turn the TUNE knob.

Using the CD Menu:


2. Select Tracks List.

3. Select the track.

Playing Tracks in Random Order

Turn the Menu knob and then setShuffle Songs to On.

Fast Forward and Rewind

Press and holdl org to fastforward or rewind within the currenttrack.

Selecting an MP3 Track




Using the CD Menu:


2. Select Playlists/Folders.

3. Select the playlist or folder.


Searching for MP3 Tracks

The search feature may take sometime to display the information afterreading the disc due to the amountof information stored on the disc.FM automatically plays while thedisc is being read.



Tracks can be searched by:. Playlists. Artists. Albums. Song Titles. Genres. Folder View

To search for tracks:


2. Select Search.

3. Select: Playlists, Artists,Albums, Song Titles, Genres,or Folder View.


CD/DVD PlayerThe CD/DVD player can playCDs, DVD‐As, MP3/WMA CDs,MP3/WMA DVDs, and DVD‐Vs.

The CD/DVD player will not play8 cm (3 in) discs.

Care of CDs and DVDs

Sound quality can be reduced dueto disc quality, recording method,quality of the music recorded, andhow the disc has been handled.Handle discs carefully and storethem in their original cases or otherprotective cases away from direct

sunlight and dust. If the bottomsurface of a disc is damaged, thedisc may not play properly or at all.Do not touch the bottom surface ofa disc while handling it; this coulddamage the surface. Pick up discsby grasping the outer edges or theedge of the hole and the outer edge.

If the bottom surface of a disc isdirty, take a soft, lint‐free cloth,or dampen a clean, soft cloth ina mild neutral detergent solutionmixed with water, and clean it.Wipe the disc from the centerto the outer edge.



Care of the CD/DVD Player

Do not add a label to a disc, as itcould get caught in the CD/DVDplayer. If a label is needed, labelthe top of the recorded disc witha marking pen.

Do not use disc lens cleanersbecause they could contaminatethe lens of the disc optics anddamage the CD/DVD player.

Notice: If a label is added to aCD, more than one CD is insertedinto the slot at a time, or anattempt is made to play scratchedor damaged CDs, the CD playercould be damaged. While usingthe CD player, use only CDs ingood condition without any label,load one CD at a time, and keepthe CD player and the loading slotfree of foreign materials, liquids,and debris.

Control Buttons

The buttons used to control theCD/DVD player are:

MEM/DVD/AUX: Press to choosebetween the MEM, CD/DVD,and AUX.


INFO: Press to display additionalinformation about the disc that maybe available.

TUNE: Turn to select tracks.

Menu Knob: Turn to enterthe menu.

SELECT: Press to select an item.

X (Eject): Press to eject the disc.

k : Press to pause a CD, DVD‐A,or DVD‐V; press again to resumeplayback. Press and hold to stop aDVD‐V disc.

Inserting a CD or DVD

With the printed side facing up,insert a disc into the slot until it isdrawn in.

Removing a CD or DVD

PressX.

The disc is pushed out of theCD/DVD slot.

If the disc is not removed after it isejected, it is pulled back in after afew seconds.

Playing a CD or DVD‐A Disc

Press the MEM/DVD/AUX buttonif there is a disc in the player.It begins playing.

Information about the disc andcurrent track is shown on thedisplay depending on the datastored.



Selecting CD or DVD‐A Tracks




Using the menu:


2. Select Tracks List.


Pausing a CD or DVD‐A Track

Pressk to pause a CD or DVD‐A

track. Pressk again to continueplaying the track.

Playing CD or DVD‐A Tracks inRandom Order

Turn the Menu knob and set ShuffleSongs to On.

Fast Forward and Rewind

Press and holdl org to fastforward or rewind within the currenttrack.

Playing an MP3 CD or DVD

Files that are not stored infolders are displayed in theroot directory (disc).

The search rate increases if theMenu knob is continuously turnedwhile searching in a list.

Selecting an MP3 Track




Using the CD or DVD Menu:


2. Select Folder List.

3. Select the folder.


Searching for MP3s on a CDor DVD

It is normal for the search featureto take some time to display theinformation after reading the discdue to the amount of informationstored on the disc. The infotainmentsystem automatically switches toFM while the disc is being read.

Files that do not have any metadata stored in the ID3 tag display asUnknown.

Tracks can be searched for by:. Playlists. Artists. Albums. Song Titles. Genres

The number of objects in eachcategory is shown in parenthesesafter the category.





2. Select Search.

3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,Song Titles, or Genres.

4. Select the track. The searchrate increases if the Menu knobis continuously turned whilesearching in a list.

Playing MP3 Tracks in RandomOrder


Recording an Audio or MP3CD to MEM

See Mass Storage Media (MEM) onpage 7‑27 for more information.

Playing a DVD‐V

See Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)System on page 7‑36 for informationabout how to control a Video DVDusing the wireless remote control.

Selecting a Chapter


. Pressg orl to select theprevious or next chapter.


Using DVD menu:


2. Select Chapter List.

3. Select the chapter.

Selecting a Title


2. Select Title List.

3. Select the title.

Changing the Audio Stream


2. Select Audio Stream.

3. Select Change Audio Stream.

4. Press SELECT to change theselection.

Select Cancel to exit the menu.

Pausing a DVD


2. Select Pause to pause thedisc. Select Unpause to startplayback.

Navigating the DVD‐V Disc Menu

Use the following actions tonavigate the title menu on aDVD‐V Disc.. Select/Enter. Cursor UP. Cursor DOWN. Cursor RIGHT. Cursor LEFT. Up Menu



Use the following actions tonavigate the menu on a DVD‐V Discwhile playing chapters.. Pause (Play). Chapter List. Title List. DVD/DVD. DVD/AUX. AUX/DVD. AUX/AUX

To navigate the menu:


2. Select the action.

Mass StorageMedia (MEM)Infotainment systems with MEMstorage are able to record up to1.1 GB (gigabyte) of music fromaudio CDs, MP3/WMA/AAC discs,and USB storage devices. The MEMplayer can also time shift audio fromAM, FM, and XM radio.

Music or content stored in MEM thatyou did not create, or have the rightto distribute, must be deleted beforethe sale or end of lease of thevehicle.

Control Buttons

The buttons used to control theMEM player are:

MEM/DVD/AUX: Press to selectthe MEM player.


INFO: Press to display additionalinformation about the MEM trackthat may be available.

TUNE/k : Press to pause thetrack currently playing; press againto resume playback. Turn to selecttracks.

O REC: Press to record musicfrom a CD or USB drive.

DEL: Press to delete the currenttrack from MEM.

FAV (Favorites): Press to displayMEM favorites.

1 to 6: Press to select a track orplaylist stored in that numericposition.



Recording from Audio CDs

The infotainment system can recordthe current song playing or all songsfrom an audio CD to MEM. A statusbar appears on the top of thedisplay when the recording processstarts and disappears when theprocess has ended. Copy protectedCDs cannot be recorded to MEM.

Recording to MEM

PressO REC, then select RecordCurrent Song or Record All Songson Disc. If the track has startedplaying, the system will restart thetrack and begin recording from thebeginning of the track. When thesong recording is completed, themessage Song Recorded to MEMdisplays, and there may be a slightpause.

Songs recorded to MEM are storedas the current date, disc, and tracknumber.

Re-recording a PreviouslyRecorded Disc

If the disc or track has already beenrecorded to MEM, the messageThe Song(s) is Already Recordeddisplays.

Stopping the Recording

Press theO REC button whilerecording from an audio CD todisplay the stop recording option.Select Stop Recording Songto MEM.

Renaming Recorded Discs

Discs that have been recorded toMEM can be renamed.


2. Select Rename Recorded Discs.

3. Select the disc.

4. Select Album or Artist to renameeither one.

5. Use the Menu knob to enterthe character sequence.See Operation on page 7‑7for more information.

Recording from MP3/WMADiscs or USB Storage Devices

USB Host Support

The USB connector uses the USBstandards, 1.1 and 2.0.

USB Supported Devices. USB Flash Drives. Portable USB Hard Drives

Recording to MEM

PressO REC, then select RecordCurrent Song or Record CurrentFolder.

The information stored by MEMis titled according to the ID3 tagassociated with it.

Re-recording a PreviouslyRecorded Disc

If the disc or track has already beenrecorded to MEM, the messageThe Song(s) is Already Recordeddisplays.



Stopping the Recording

Press theO REC button whilerecording from an MP3/WMA CD orUSB storage device to display thestop recording option. Select StopRecording Song to MEM.

Deleting Tracks from MEM

Individual tracks and all tracks canbe deleted from MEM.

To delete individual tracks, pressand release the DEL button whilethe track is playing.

To delete all tracks from MEM,press and hold the DEL buttonwhile a track is playing.

Playing from MEM

Playing Back a PreviouslyRecorded CD

Turn the TUNE knob to select atrack if MEM is already playing fromthe previously recorded disc.

1. Select Recorded Disc List.

2. Select the disc.


Searching for a Track

Tracks can be searched for by:. Playlists. Artists. Albums. Song Titles. Genres




2. Select Search.


4. Select the track. The search rateincreases if the Menu knob iscontinuously turned whilesearching in a list.

Shuffle Songs

Select the Shuffle Songs optionfrom the MEM menu to randomlyplay back tracks stored in MEM.



Configuring MEM Favorites

During MEM playback, press theFAV button to change betweenfavorite categories. The favoritecategories are:. Playlists. Artists. Albums. Genres

To remove MEM favoritescategories:



3. Select MEM Favorites.

4. Remove the checkmark fromthe box to remove that MEMfavorites category.

Replace the checkmark to re-addthe removed category.

Saving MEM Tracks asFavorites

Favorites can be saved by pressingand holding one of the 1 to 6buttons. Favorites can be storedaccording to the following list:

Playlist: Adds the currently playingtrack to the playlist selected.

Artist: Saves the artist associatedwith the currently playing track inthe indicated favorites position.

Album: Saves the albumassociated with the currently playingtrack in the indicated favoritesposition.

Genre: Saves the genre associatedwith the currently playing track inthe indicated favorites position.

Creating Playlists

To create a playlist using tracksstored in MEM:

1. Select Playlist from the MEMfavorites.

2. Select the track to be stored inthe playlist.

3. Press and hold one of the1 to 6 buttons until the trackcan be heard again to storethe track.

4. Repeat Steps 1 though 3 tostore additional tracks in theplaylist.



Auxiliary Devices(Radio with CD)The optional AUX input allowsportable devices to connect to thevehicle using the 3.5 mm (1/8 in)input jack or the USB port.

Portable devices are controlled byusing the menu system describedin Operation on page 7‑7.

The AUX input is located in thecenter console.

3.5mm Jack

Connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cableto the auxiliary input jack to use aportable audio player.

Playback of an audio device that isconnected to the 3.5 mm jack canonly be controlled using the controlson the device.

Adjusting the Volume

Turn the VOL/ O knob to adjust thevolume of the infotainment systemafter the volume level has been seton the portable audio device.

USB Port

For vehicles with a USB port, thefollowing devices may be connectedand controlled by the infotainmentsystem.. iPods. PlaysForSure Devices (PFD). USB Drives. Zunes

Not all iPods, PFDs, USB Drives,and Zunes are compatible with theinfotainment system.

Connecting and Controllingan iPod®

Not all iPods can be controlled bythe infotainment system.

Connecting an iPod

Connect the iPod to the USB port.


Tracks can be searched for by:. Playlists. Artists. Albums. Song Titles. Podcasts. Genres. Audiobooks. Composers





2. Select Search.

3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,Song Titles, Podcasts, Genres,Audiobooks, or Composers.


Shuffle

Turn the Menu knob and set ShuffleSongs (Random) to On or Off, thenpress the 0 BACK button to returnthe main screen.

On: Plays tracks in the currentfolder in random order.

Off: Plays tracks in the currentfolder in sequential order.

Repeat

Turn the Menu knob and setRepeat to On or Off, then pressthe 0 BACK button to return themain screen.

On: Repeats the current track.

Off: Playback starts from thebeginning of the current track afterthe last track finishes.

Connecting and Controlling aPlaysForSure Device (PFD)or Zune™

Connecting a PFD or Zune

Connect the PFD or Zune to theUSB port.


Tracks can be searched for by:. Playlists. Artists. Albums. Song Titles. Podcasts. Genres



2. Select Search.

3. Select: Playlists, Artists,Albums, Song Titles, Podcasts,or Genres.




Shuffle Functionality

Turn the Menu knob and set ShuffleSongs (Random) to On or Off.

On: Plays current tracks in randomorder.

Off: Plays current tracks insequential order.

Repeat Functionality

Turn the Menu knob and set Repeatto On or Off.

Repeat On: Repeats the currenttrack.

Repeat Off: Playback starts fromthe beginning of the current trackafter the last track finishes.

Connecting and Controlling aUSB Drive

The infotainment system can onlyplay back .mp3 and .wma files froma USB drive.

Only the first 2,500 songs arerecognized on the device.

When a device is not supported,the message “No supported datafound. You can safely disconnectthe device” appears.

Connecting a USB Drive

Connect the USB drive to theUSB port.


It is normal for the search featureto take some time to display theinformation after reading the devicedue to the amount of informationstored.

Files that do not have any metadata stored in the ID3 tag displayas Unknown.

Tracks can be searched for by:. Playlists*. Artists. Albums. Song Titles. Genres. Folder View

*This only displays if a playlist isfound on the device.



2. Select Search.

3. Select: Playlists, Artists,Albums, Song Titles, Genres,or Folder View.




Shuffle Functionality

Turn the Menu knob and set ShuffleSongs (Random) to On or Off.

On: Plays current tracks in randomorder.

Off: Plays current tracks insequential order.

Repeat Functionality

Turn the Menu knob and set Repeatto On or Off.

Repeat On: Repeats the currenttrack.

Repeat Off: Playback starts fromthe beginning of the current trackafter the last track finishes.

Auxiliary Devices (Radiowith CD/DVD and MEM)The optional AUX input allowsportable devices to be connectedusing the 3.5 mm (1/8 in) input jackor the USB port.

Portable devices are controlled byusing the menu system described inOperation on page 7‑7.

The AUX input is located in thecenter console.

3.5mm Jack

Connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable tothe auxiliary input jack to use aportable audio player.

Playback of an audio device that isconnected to the 3.5 mm jack canonly be controlled using the controlson the device.

Adjusting the Volume

Turn the VOL/ O knob to adjust thevolume of the infotainment systemafter the volume level has been seton the portable audio device.

USB Port

The following devices may beconnected to the USB port andcontrolled by the infotainmentsystem.. iPods. USB Mass Storage Devices

Not all iPods or USB Mass StorageDevices are compatible with theinfotainment system.



Connecting and Controllingan iPod®

Not all iPods can be controlled bythe infotainment system.

Connecting an iPod

Connect the iPod to the USB port.

Selecting a Track


. Pressg SEEK orl SEEK toselect the previous or next track.

. Turn the TUNE knob to select atrack in the current submenu.The track will start to play.


Turn the Menu knob and set ShuffleSongs to On or Off.

Shuffle On: Plays current tracks inrandom order.

Shuffle Off: Plays current tracks insequential order.


Tracks can be searched for by:. Playlists. Artists. Albums. Song Titles. Genres. Composers. Audiobooks




2. Select Search.

3. Select: Playlists, Artists,Albums, Song Titles, Genres,Composers, or Audiobooks.


Connecting and Controlling aUSB Drive

Files that are not stored infolders are displayed in theroot directory (USB).

Connecting a USB Drive

Connect the USB drive to theUSB port.

Disconnecting a USB Drive

A USB drive should be ejected fromthe USB port before disconnectingit. To eject a USB drive:


2. Select USB Eject.





Selecting a Track



. Turn the TUNE knob to selecta track in the current submenu.The track will start to play.

Selecting a track in a differentfolder:


2. Select Folder List.

3. Select the folder.


Searching for Tracks

It is normal for the search featureto take some time to display theinformation after reading the devicedue to the amount of informationstored.

Files that do not have any metadata stored in the ID3 tag displayas Unknown.

Tracks can be searched by:. Playlists. Artists. Albums. Song Titles. Genres




2. Select Search.



Recording Tracks to MEM

See Mass Storage Media (MEM) onpage 7‑27 for more information.

Rear SeatInfotainment

Rear Seat Entertainment(RSE) SystemThe vehicle may have a DVD RearSeat Entertainment (RSE) system.The RSE system works with thevehicle's infotainment system.The DVD player is part of the frontradio. The RSE system includesa radio with a DVD player, tworear seat video display screens,audio/video jacks, two wirelessheadphones, and a remote control.See CD/DVD Player on page 7‑23or the separate navigation systemmanual for more information onthe vehicle's DVD system.



Before Driving

The RSE is for rear seatpassengers only. The drivercannot safely view the videoscreen while driving.

In severe or extreme weatherconditions, the RSE system maynot work until the temperatureis within the operating range.The operating range is above−20°C (−4°F) and below60°C (140°F). If the temperatureis outside of this range, heator cool the vehicle until it iswithin the operating range.

Global Off

Depending on the infotainmentsystem, the RSE system mayhave a Global Off feature.The Global Off feature disablesall RSE system features. Pressand hold the radio power button for

more than three seconds for GlobalOff to disable the RSE features.On some infotainment systems, theGlobal Off feature can be turned offby performing one of the following:. Press and hold the radio

power button for more thanthree seconds.

. Insert or eject any disc.

. Insert a DVD video disc.

. Press the remote control powerbutton.

. Press the MEM/DVD/AUX buttonork when a DVD video disc isin the player.

. Press the SRC button on thesteering wheel when a DVDvideo disc is in the player.

. Cycle the ignition.

Headphones

A. Battery Cover

B. Channel 1 or 2 Switch

C. Power Button

D. Volume Control

E. Power Indicator Light

RSE includes two 2-channelwireless headphones. Channel 1is dedicated to the DVD player,and Channel 2 is dedicatedto any external auxiliary deviceconnected to the A/V jacks.



The headphones are used to listento various multi‐media. The wirelessheadphones have an On/Off button,channel 1/2 switch, and a volumecontrol. Turn the headphones offwhen not in use.

Push the On/Off button to turnon the headphones. A light onthe headphones comes on. If thelight does not come on, check thebatteries. Intermittent sound or staticcan also indicate weak batteries.See “Battery Replacement” later inthis section for more information.

Infrared transmitters are on thetop of the left seatback videoscreen. The headphones shut offautomatically to save the batterypower if the RSE system is shutoff or if the headphones are outof range of the transmitters formore than three minutes. Movingtoo far forward or stepping out of thevehicle can cause the headphonesto lose the signal or have static.

To adjust the volume on theheadphones, use the volumecontrol.

For optimal audio performance, theheadphones must be worn correctly.Headphones should be worn withthe headband over the top of thehead for best audio reception.The symbol L (Left) appears on theoutside bottom edge of the ear cupand should be positioned on the leftear. The symbol R (Right) appearson the outside bottom edge of theear cup and should be positionedon the right ear.

Notice: Do not store theheadphones in heat or directsunlight. This could damagethe headphones and repairs willnot be covered by the warranty.Storage in extreme cold canweaken the batteries. Keep theheadphones stored in a cool,dry place.

If the foam ear pads attached tothe headphones become worn ordamaged, the pads can be replacedseparately from the headphone set.To purchase replacement ear pads,call 1‐888‐293‐3332, then promptzero (0), or contact your dealer.

Battery Replacement

To change the batteries:

1. Loosen the screw to the batterydoor located on the left side ofthe headphones.

2. Slide the battery door open.

3. Replace the two AAA batteries.

4. Replace the battery door andtighten the screw.

Remove the batteries if theheadphones are not going to beused for a long period of time.



Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks

If available, the A/V jacks arelocated on the rear of the floorconsole. They allow audio orvideo cables to be connectedfrom an auxiliary device such asa camcorder or a video gamesystem.

The A/V jacks are color coded:. Yellow for video input.. White for left audio input.. Red for right audio input.

Power for auxiliary devices is notsupplied by the radio system.

To use the auxiliary inputs of theRSE system:

1. Connect the auxiliary devicecables to the A/V jacks.

2. Power on both the auxiliarydevice and the RSE videoscreen.

Changing the Source on the VideoDisplay Screens

The image from the auxiliary devicecan be switched between the videodisplay screens.

To change the display:

1. Press the AUX button on theremote control to change thesource of both video screensfrom the DVD player to theauxiliary device.

2. Press the AUX button a secondtime to change the left videoscreen source to the DVD playerand the right video screen to theauxiliary device.

3. Press the AUX button a thirdtime to change the left videoscreen source to the auxiliarydevice and the right videoscreen to the DVD player.

4. Press the AUX button a fourthtime to change the source ofboth video screens to the DVDplayer.

Changing the RSE Video ScreenSettings

The screen display mode,brightness, and language canbe changed from the setup menuusing the remote control. To changea setting:

1. Pressz.

2. Usen,q, p,o, andr toselect the settings.

3. Pressz again to exit thesetup menu.



Audio Output

Audio from the DVD player orauxiliary inputs can be heardthrough the following:. Wireless Headphones. Vehicle Speakers

The RSE system transmitsthe audio signal to the wirelessheadphones if an audio signal isavailable. See “Headphones” earlierin this section for more information.

The front seat passengers are ableto listen to playback from the A/Vjacks through the vehicle speakersby selecting Rear A/V as the sourceon the radio.

Video Screens

The video screens are locatedin the back of the driver and frontpassenger seats.

To use the video screen:

1. Push the release button locatedon the seatback console.

2. Move the screen to the desiredviewing position.

Push the video screen down into itslocked position when it is not in use.The screen turns off automatically.

Only the left RSE seatback consolecontains the infrared transmittersfor the wireless headphones.They may be visible as eightilluminated LEDs. These LEDsare not on the right video screen.Both seatback consoles containan infrared receiver for the remotecontrol. They are located at the topof each console.

Notice: Avoid directly touchingthe video screen, as damage mayoccur. See “Cleaning the VideoScreen” later in this section formore information.



Video Screen Input Jack

Each video screen is equippedwith a video input jack to allowvideo cables to be connectedfrom an auxiliary device such asa camcorder or a video gamesystem. This signal will overrideany video provided by the RSEsystem; either the DVD or auxiliaryA/V jack source. The RSE systemmust be on for this input to operate.

Remote Control

To use the remote control, aim itat the transmitter window at eitherseatback console and press the

button. Direct sunlight or very brightlight could affect the ability of theRSE transmitter to receive signalsfrom the remote control. Checkthe batteries if the remote controldoes not seem to be working. See“Battery Replacement” later in thissection. Objects blocking the line ofsight could also affect the functionof the remote control.

If a CD, DVD, or MP3 disc is in theRadio DVD slot, the remote controlO button can be used to turn onthe video screen display and startthe disc. The infotainment systemcan also turn on the video screendisplay. See CD/DVD Player onpage 7‑23 or the separatenavigation system manual formore information.

Notice: Storing the remotecontrol in a hot area or in directsunlight can damage it, and therepairs will not be covered by thewarranty. Storage in extreme coldcan weaken the batteries. Keepthe remote control stored in acool, dry place.

Remote Control Buttons

O (Power): Press to turn the videoscreens on and off.

P (Illumination): Press to turnthe remote control backlight on.The backlight times out afterseveral seconds if no otherbutton is pressed.

v (Title): Press to return tothe main menu of the DVD. Thisfunction could vary for each disc.

y (Main Menu): Press to accessthe DVD menu. The DVD menu isdifferent on every DVD. Use thenavigation arrows to move thecursor. After making a selectionpress the enter button. This buttononly operates when using a DVD.

n,q , p ,o (Menu NavigationArrows): Use the arrow buttons tonavigate through a menu.

r (Enter): Press to select thehighlighted choice in any menu.



z (Display Menu): Press toadjust the brightness and screendisplay mode, and display thelanguage menu.

q (Return): Press to exit thecurrent active menu and return tothe previous menu. This buttonoperates only when the displaymenu or a DVD menu is active.

c (Stop): Press to stop playing,rewinding, or fast forwarding aDVD. Press twice to return tothe beginning of the DVD.

s (Play/Pause): Press to startplaying a DVD. Press to pause aDVD while it is playing. Press againto continue playing.

Depending on the infotainmentsystem in the vehicle, DVDplayback may be slowed downby pressings then[. Reverse

slow play by pressings thenr.

Presss again to cancel slow play.

t (Previous Track/Chapter):Press to go to the start of thecurrent track or chapter. Pressagain to go to the previous trackor chapter. This button may notwork when the DVD is playingthe copyright information or thepreviews.

u (Next Track/Chapter): Pressto go to the beginning of the nextchapter or track. This button mightnot work when the DVD is playingthe copyright information or thepreviews.

r (Fast Reverse): Press toquickly reverse the DVD or CD.To stop fast reversing a DVD video,presss. To stop fast reversing

a DVD audio or CD, releaser.This button might not work whenthe DVD is playing the copyrightinformation or the previews.

[ (Fast Forward): Press to fastforward the DVD or CD. To stop fastforwarding a DVD video, presss.To stop fast forwarding a DVD audioor CD, release[. This button mightnot work when the DVD is playingthe copyright information or thepreviews.

e (Audio): Press to change audiotracks on DVDs that have thisfeature when the DVD is playing.

{ (Subtitles): Press to turnON/OFF subtitles and to movethrough subtitle options when aDVD is playing.

AUX (Auxiliary): Press to switchthe video display between the DVDplayer and an auxiliary source.



The AUX button also controls thesource display between the left andright video screens as described inthe table below:

AuxButtonPress

LeftScreen

RightScreen

DefaultState (NoPress)

DVDMedia

DVDMedia

FirstPress

Aux VideoSource

Aux VideoSource

SecondPress

DVDMedia

Aux VideoSource

ThirdPress

Aux VideoSource

DVDMedia

FourthPress

Return toDefaultState

Return toDefaultState

2 (Camera): Press to changethe camera angle on DVDs thathave this feature when the DVDis playing.

\ (Clear) (If Available): Pressthis button within three secondsafter inputting a numeric selection,to clear all numeric inputs.

} 10 (Double Digit Entries)(If Available): Press this buttonto select chapter or track numbersgreater than 9. Press this buttonbefore inputting the number.

1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad):The numbered keypad provides thecapability of direct chapter or tracknumber selection.

Replacing the Remote Control

If the remote control becomeslost or damaged, a new universalremote control can be purchased.Use a Toshiba® code set forreplacement universal remotecontrols.

Battery Replacement

To change the remote controlbatteries:

1. Slide back the rear cover on theremote control.

2. Replace the two batteries in thecompartment.

3. Replace the battery cover.

Remove the batteries from theremote control if unused for anextended period of time.



Tips and Troubleshooting Chart

Problem Recommended Action

No power. The ignition might not be turned to ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY.

The picture does not fill the screen. There are blackborders on the top and bottom or on both sides or itlooks stretched out.

Check the display mode settings in the setup menu bypressing the display menu button on the remote control.

In auxiliary mode, the picture moves or scrolls. Check the auxiliary input connections at both devices.

The remote control does not work. Check to make sure there is no obstruction betweenthe remote control and the transmitter window.Check the batteries to make sure they are not dead orinstalled incorrectly.

After stopping the player, I push Play but sometimesthe DVD starts where I left off and sometimes at thebeginning.

If the Stop button was pressed one time, the DVD playerresumes playing where the DVD was stopped. If thestop button was pressed two times the DVD playerbegins to play from the beginning of the DVD.



Tips and Troubleshooting Chart (cont.)

Problem Recommended Action

The auxiliary source is running but there is no picture orsound.

Check that the RSE video screen is in the auxiliarysource mode by pressing the AUX button on the remotecontrol.Check the auxiliary input connections at both devices.

Sometimes the wireless headphone audio cuts out orbuzzes.

Check for obstructions, low batteries, reception range,and interference from cellular telephone towers or byusing a cellular telephone in the vehicle.Check that the headphones are on correctly usingthe L (left) and R (right) on the headphones.Check that the headphones are positioned properly withthe headband across the top of the head.

I lost the remote and/or the headphones. See your dealer for assistance.

The DVD is playing, but there is no picture or sound. Check that the RSE video screen is sourced to the DVDplayer by pressing the AUX button on the remotecontrol.



DVD Display Error Messages

The DVD display error messagedepends on which radio the vehiclehas. The video screen may displayone of the following:

Disc Load/Eject Error orMechanical Error: There aredisc load or eject problems.

Disc Format Error or UnknownFormat: The disc is inserted withthe disc label wrong side up, or thedisc is damaged.

Disc Region Error or Disc Error:The disc is not from a correctregion.

No Disc Inserted: No disc ispresent when theX EJECT orMEM/DVD/AUX button is pressedon the radio.

DVD Distortion

Video distortion can occur whenoperating cellular phones, scanners,CB radios, Global Position Systems(GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax,or walkie talkies.

It might be necessary to turn off theDVD player when operating one ofthese devices in or near the vehicle.

*Excludes the OnStar® System.

Cleaning the RSE SeatbackConsole

Use only a clean cloth dampenedwith clean water to clean the RSEseatback console surface.

Cleaning the Video Screen

Use only a clean cloth dampenedwith clean water. Use care whentouching or cleaning the screenas damage could result.

Phone

Bluetooth (Overview)For vehicles equipped withBluetooth capability, the systemcan interact with many cell phones,allowing:. Placement and receipt of calls in

a hands-free mode.. Sharing of the cell phone’s

address book or contact listwith the vehicle.

To minimize driver distraction,before driving, and with the vehicleparked:. Become familiar with the

features of the cell phone.Organize the phone book andcontact lists clearly and deleteduplicate or rarely used entries.If possible, program speed dialor other shortcuts.

. Review the controls andoperation of the infotainmentsystem.



. Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle.The system may not work withall cell phones. See “Pairing aPhone” in this section for moreinformation.

. If the cell phone has voicedialing capability, learn touse that feature to access theaddress book or contact list.See “Voice Pass-Thru” in thissection for more information.

. See “Storing and Deleting PhoneNumbers” in this section formore information.

{ WARNING

When using a cell phone,it can be distracting to look toolong or too often at the screenof the phone or the infotainment(navigation) system. Takingyour eyes off the road too longor too often could cause a crashresulting in injury or death. Focusyour attention on driving.

Vehicles with a Bluetooth systemcan use a Bluetooth‐capable cellphone with a Hands‐Free Profileto make and receive phone calls.The infotainment system and voicerecognition are used to control thesystem. The system can be usedwhile the ignition is in ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY. The range ofthe Bluetooth system can be upto 9.1 m (30 ft). Not all phonessupport all functions and not allphones work with the Bluetoothsystem. See www.gm.com/bluetoothfor more information aboutcompatible phones.

Bluetooth Controls

Use the buttons located on theinfotainment system and thesteering wheel to operate theBluetooth system.


b / g (Push To Talk): Press toanswer incoming calls, to confirmsystem information, and to startvoice recognition.

$ /i (Mute/End Call): Press toend a call, reject a call, or cancel anoperation.

Infotainment System Controls

For information about how tonavigate the menu system usingthe infotainment controls, seeOperation on page 7‑7.

5 (Phone): Press to enter thePhone main menu.



Voice Recognition

The voice recognition system usescommands to control the systemand dial phone numbers.

Noise: The system may notrecognize voice commands if thereis too much background noise.

When to Speak: A tone sounds toindicate that the system is ready fora voice command. Wait for the toneand then speak.

How to Speak: Speak clearly in acalm and natural voice.

Audio System

When using the Bluetooth system,sound comes through the vehicle'sfront audio system speakersand overrides the audio system.Use the VOL/ O knob during acall to change the volume level.The adjusted volume levelremains in memory for later calls.The system maintains a minimumvolume level.

Other Information

The Bluetooth® word mark andlogos are owned by the Bluetooth®

SIG, Inc. and any use of such marksby General Motors is under license.Other trademarks and trade namesare those of their respective owners.

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑20 for FederalCommunications Commissionand Industry Canada information.

Bluetooth (InfotainmentControls)For information about how tonavigate the menu system usingthe infotainment controls, seeOperation on page 7‑7.

Pairing

A Bluetooth‐enabled cell phonemust be paired to the Bluetoothsystem first and then connected tothe vehicle before it can be used.See the cell phone manufactureruser guide for Bluetooth functionsbefore pairing the cell phone. If aBluetooth phone is not connected,calls will be made using OnStar®

Hands‐Free Calling, if available.Refer to the OnStar Owner's Guidefor more information.



The pairing process can be startedby using the voice recognitionsystem or the controls on theinfotainment system.

Pairing Information:. Up to five cell phones can be

paired to the Bluetooth system.. The pairing process is disabled

when the vehicle is moving.. The Bluetooth system links with

the first available paired cellphone in the order the phonewas paired.

. Only one paired cell phone canbe connected to the Bluetoothsystem at a time.

. Pairing should only need to becompleted once, unless changesto the pairing information havebeen made or the phone isdeleted.

To link to a different paired phone,see “Linking to a Different Phone”later in this section.

Pairing a Phone


2. Select Phone Settings.

3. Select Bluetooth.

4. Select Pair Device (Phone).A four‐digit PersonalIdentification Number (PIN)appears on the display.

If the “Add new GPS device”option is selected, the systemwill start a search for Bluetooth“Handsfree” profile devices justlike if “Add new Phone” wasselected. The additional GPSlocation feature which wouldprovide the vehicle's GPSlocation through the BluetoothSerial Port Profile is notavailable.

5. Start the pairing process on thecell phone that will be paired tothe vehicle. Reference the cellphone manufacturer's user guidefor information on this process.

Locate the device named “YourVehicle” in the list on the cellphone and follow the instructionson the cell phone to enter thefour‐digit PIN provided by thesystem.

6. The system prompts for a namefor the phone and confirms thename provided. This name isused to indicate which phoneis connected.

7. The system responds with“<Phone name> has beensuccessfully paired” after thepairing process is complete.

8. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 to pairadditional phones.



Listing All Paired and ConnectedPhones




4. Select Device List.

Deleting a Paired Phone





5. Select the phone to delete andfollow the on‐screen prompts.

Linking to a Different Phone

To link to a different phone, thenew phone must be in the vehicleand available to be connected tothe Bluetooth system before theprocess is started.





5. Select the new phone to linkto and follow the on‐screenprompts.

If delete is selected, thehighlighted phone will bedeleted.

Making a Call UsingPhone Book

For cell phones that support thephone book feature, the Bluetoothsystem can use the contacts storedon your cell phone to make calls.See your cell phone's owner's guideor contact your wireless provider tofind out if this feature is supportedby your phone.

When a cell phone supports thephone book feature, the PhoneBook and Call Lists menus areautomatically available.

The Phone Book menu allows youto access the phone book storedin the cell phone to make a call.

The Call Lists menu allows you toaccess the phone numbers from theIncoming Calls, Outgoing Calls, andMissed Calls menus on your cellphone to make a call.



Radio with CD

To make a call using the PhoneBook menu:

1. Press 5 twice.

2. Select Phone Book.

3. You can search through the listby selecting the letter group thephone book entry begins with,or press the SELECT buttonto scroll through the entire listof names/numbers in thephone book.

4. Select the name or number youwant to call.

To make a call using the CallLists menu:

1. Press 5 twice.

2. Select Call Lists.

3. Select the Incoming Calls,Outgoing Calls, or MissedCalls list.


Radio with CD/DVD and MEM

1. Press 5.

2. Select Phone Book.

3. Search through the list byselecting the letter group thephone book entry begins with,or press the SELECT buttonto scroll through the entirelist of names/numbers in thephone book.


To make a call using the CallLists menu:

1. Press 5.

2. Select Call Lists.

3. Select the Incoming Calls,Outgoing Calls, or MissedCalls list.


Making a Call

Radio with CD

1. Press 5 twice.

2. Enter the character sequence.See “Entering a CharacterSequence” in Operation onpage 7‑7 for more information.

3. Select Call to start dialing thenumber.

Radio with CD/DVD and MEM

1. Press 5.

2. Select Enter number.


4. Select Call to start dialing thenumber.



Accepting or Declining a Call

When a call is received, theinfotainment system mutes and aring tone is heard in the vehicle.

Accepting a Call

Turn the menu knob to Answer andpress the SELECT button.

Declining a Call

Turn the menu knob to Decline andpress the SELECT button.

Call Waiting

Call waiting must be supported onthe Bluetooth phone and enabled bythe wireless service carrier to work.

Accepting a Call

Turn the menu knob to Answer andpress the SELECT button.

Declining a Call

Turn the menu knob to Decline andpress the SELECT button.

Switching Between Calls(Call Waiting Calls Only)

To switch between calls:

1. Turn the menu knob.

2. Select Switch Call fromthe menu.

Conference Calling

Conference calling and three‐waycalling must be supported on theBluetooth phone and enabled bythe wireless service carrier to work.

To start a conference while in acurrent call:

1. Turn the menu knob.

2. Select Enter Number.

3. Enter the character sequencethen select Call. See “Enteringa Character Sequence” inOperation on page 7‑7 formore information.

4. After the call has been placed,turn the Menu knob and chooseMerge Calls.

5. To add more callers to theconference call, repeat Steps 1through 4. The number of callersthat can be added is limited byyour wireless service carrier.



Ending a Call

Turn the Menu knob and selectHang Up.

Muting a Call

To Mute a Call

Turn the Menu knob and selectMute Call.

To Cancel Mute

Turn the Menu knob and selectMute Call.

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency(DTMF) Tones

The in‐vehicle Bluetooth system cansend numbers during a call. This isused when calling a menu‐drivenphone system.

1. Turn the Menu knob and selectEnter Number.


Bluetooth (VoiceRecognition)

Using Voice Recognition

To use voice recognition, press b glocated on the steering wheel.The system responds differentlydepending on what kind ofinfotainment system the vehiclehas installed.

For vehicles without a navigationsystem, the system responds“Ready,” followed by a tone.After the tone, say a command.

For vehicles with a navigationsystem, the system responds witha tone. After the tone say “HandsFree” to use the Bluetooth voicerecognition system. The systemthen responds with “Ready,”followed by a tone. After thetone, say a command.

For additional information say“Help” while you are in a voicerecognition menu.

Pairing

A Bluetooth cell phone must bepaired to the Bluetooth systemand then connected to the vehiclebefore it can be used. See your cellphone manufacturer's user guide forBluetooth functions before pairingthe cell phone. If a Bluetooth phoneis not connected, calls will be madeusing OnStar Hands‐Free Calling,if available. Refer to the OnStarowner's guide for more information.

Pairing Information. Up to five cell phones can be

paired to the Bluetooth system.. The pairing process is disabled

when the vehicle is moving.. Pairing only needs to be

completed once, unless thepairing information on the cellphone changes or the cell phoneis deleted from the system.



. Only one paired cell phone canbe connected to the Bluetoothsystem at a time.

. If multiple paired cell phonesare within range of the system,the system connects to the firstavailable paired cell phone inthe order that they were firstpaired to the system. To linkto a different paired phone, see“Linking to a Different Phone”later in this section.

Pairing a Phone

1. Press b g. For vehicles with anavigation system, say “HandsFree” after the tone.

2. Say “Bluetooth.”

3. Say “Pair.” The system respondswith instructions and a four‐digitPIN. The PIN is used in Step 5.

4. Start the pairing process on thecell phone that you want to pair.For help with this process, seeyour cell phone manufacturer'suser guide.

5. Locate the device named “YourVehicle” in the list on the cellphone. Follow the instructionson the cell phone to enter thePIN that was provided in Step 3.After the PIN is successfullyentered, the system prompts youto provide a name for the pairedcell phone. This name will beused to indicate which phonesare paired and connected to thevehicle. See “Listing All Pairedand Connected Phones” later inthis section for more information.

6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 to pairadditional phones.

Listing All Paired and ConnectedPhones

The system can list all cell phonespaired to it. If a paired cell phone isalso connected to the vehicle, thesystem responds with “is connected”after that phone name.



3. Say “List.”

Deleting a Paired Phone

If the phone name you want todelete is unknown, see “Listing AllPaired and Connected Phones.”



3. Say “Delete.” The system asksfor which phone to delete.

4. Say the name of the phone youwant to delete.



Connecting to a Different Phone

To connect to a different cell phone,the Bluetooth system looks for thenext available cell phone in theorder in which all the available cellphones were paired. Dependingon which cell phone you want toconnect to, you may have to usethis command several times.



3. Say “Change phone.”. If another cell phone is

found, the response willbe “<Phone name> is nowconnected.”

. If another cell phone is notfound, the original phoneremains connected.

Storing and Deleting PhoneNumbers

The system can store up to30 phone numbers as name tagsin the Hands‐Free Directory that isshared between the Bluetooth andOnStar systems.

The following commands are usedto delete and store phone numbers.

Store: This command will storea phone number or a group ofnumbers as a name tag.

Digit Store: This command allowsa phone number to be stored as aname tag by entering the digits oneat a time.

Delete: This command is used todelete individual name tags.

Delete All Name Tags: Thiscommand deletes all storedname tags in the Hands‐FreeCalling Directory and the OnStarTurn‐by‐Turn Destinations Directory.

Using the “Store” Command


2. Say “Store.”

3. Say the phone number or groupof numbers you want to storeall at once with no pauses, thenfollow the directions given by thesystem to save a name tag forthis number.

Using the “Digit Store” Command

If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear” at any time to clear thelast number.

To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system,say “Verify” at any time.


2. Say “Digit Store.”



3. Say each digit, one at atime, that you want to store.After each digit is entered, thesystem repeats back the digit itheard followed by a tone. Afterthe last digit has been entered,say “Store,” and then follow thedirections given by the system tosave a name tag for this number.

Using the “Delete” Command


2. Say “Delete.”

3. Say the name tag you want todelete.

Using the “Delete All Name Tags”Command

This command deletes all storedname tags in the Hands FreeCalling Directory and the OnStarTurn‐by‐Turn Destinations Directory.

To delete all name tags:


2. Say “Delete all name tags.”

Listing Stored Numbers

The List command will list all thestored numbers and name tags.

Using the “List” Command


2. Say “Directory.”

3. Say “Hands Free Calling.”

4. Say “List.”

Making a Call

Calls can be made using thefollowing commands.

Dial or Call: The dial orcall command can be usedinterchangeably to dial a phonenumber or a stored name tag.

Digit Dial: This command allowsa phone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.

Re‐dial: This command is used todial the last number used on the cellphone.

Using the “Dial” or “Call”Command


2. Say “Dial” or “Call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing or say the name tag.

Once connected, the person calledwill be heard through the audiospeakers.



Using the “Digit Dial” Command

The digit dial command allows aphone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.After each digit is entered, thesystem repeats back the digit itheard followed by a tone.

If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear” at any time to clear thelast number.

To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system,say “Verify” at any time.


2. Say “Digit Dial.”

3. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to dial. After eachdigit is entered, the systemrepeats back the digit it heardfollowed by a tone. After thelast digit has been entered,say “Dial.”


Using the “Re‐dial” Command


2. After the tone, say “Re‐dial.”


Receiving a Call

When an incoming call is received,the audio system mutes and a ringtone is heard in the vehicle.

. Press b g to answer the call.

. Press $i to ignore a call.

Call Waiting

Call waiting must be supported onthe cell phone and enabled by thewireless service carrier.

. Press b g to answer anincoming call when anothercall is active. The originalcall is placed on hold.

. Press b g again to return to theoriginal call.

. To ignore the incoming call,no action is required.

. Press $i to disconnect thecurrent call and switch to the callon hold.



Three‐Way Calling

Three‐way calling must besupported on the cell phone andenabled by the wireless servicecarrier.

1. While on a call, press b g.2. Say “Three‐way call.”

3. Use the dial or call command todial the number of the third partyto be called.

4. Once the call is connected,press b g to link all the callerstogether.

Ending a Call

Press $i to end a call.

Muting a Call

During a call, all sounds from insidethe vehicle can be muted so that theperson on the other end of the callcannot hear them.

To mute a call, press b g, and thensay “Mute Call.”

To cancel mute, press b g, andthen say “Un‐mute Call.”

Transferring a Call

Audio can be transferred betweenthe Bluetooth system and the cellphone.

The cell phone must be pairedand connected with the Bluetoothsystem before a call can betransferred. The connection processcan take up to two minutes afterthe ignition is turned to ON/RUN.

To Transfer Audio from theBluetooth System to a Cell Phone

During a call with the audio in thevehicle:

1. Press b g.2. Say “Transfer Call.”

To Transfer Audio to the BluetoothSystem from a Cell Phone

During a call with the audio on thecell phone, press b g. The audiotransfers to the vehicle. If the audiodoes not transfer to the vehicle,use the audio transfer feature onthe cell phone. See your cell phonemanufacturer's user guide for moreinformation.



Voice Pass-Thru

Voice pass‐thru allows access tothe voice recognition commands onthe cell phone. See your cell phonemanufacturer's user guide to see ifthe cell phone supports this feature.

To access contacts stored in the cellphone:


2. Say “Bluetooth.” The systemresponds “Bluetooth ready,”followed by a tone.

3. Say “Voice.” The systemresponds “OK, accessing<phone name>.”. The cell phone's normal

prompt messages willgo through their cycleaccording to the phone'soperating instructions.

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency(DTMF) Tones

The Bluetooth system can sendnumbers and the numbers storedas name tags during a call.You can use this feature whencalling a menu‐driven phonesystem. Account numbers canalso be stored for use.

Sending a Number or Name TagDuring a Call

1. Press b g. The systemresponds “Ready,” followedby a tone.

2. Say “Dial.”

3. Say the number or name tagto send.

Clearing the System

Unless information is deleted outof the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system,it will be retained indefinitely.This includes all saved name tagsin the phone book and phonepairing information. For informationon how to delete this information,see “Deleting a Paired Phone”and “Storing and Deleting PhoneNumbers.”



2 NOTES


Climate Controls 8-1

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemsAutomatic Climate ControlSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

Air VentsAir Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

MaintenanceAir Intake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8Passenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

Climate Control Systems

Automatic Climate Control SystemFor vehicles with this system, it controls the heating, cooling, and ventilation.

A. Power

B. Temperature Control

C. Fan Control

D. Air Delivery Mode Control

E. Recirculation

F. AUTO

G. Defrost

H. Air Conditioning



8-2 Climate Controls

Automatic Operation

The system automatically controlsthe fan speed, air delivery, airconditioning, and recirculation inorder to heat or cool the vehicleto the desired temperature.

When the AUTO indicator light ison, the system is in full automaticoperation. If the air delivery mode,fan speed, recirculation, or airconditioning setting is adjusted,the AUTO indicator turns off andthe selected settings will appearon the display.

To place the system in automaticmode do the following:

1. Press AUTO.

2. Set the temperature. Allow thesystem time to stabilize. Adjustthe temperature as needed forbest comfort.

Q /R (Temperature Control):Press to increase or decrease thetemperature.

Manual Operation

O (Power): Press to turn the fanon or off.

D C (Fan Control): Press toincrease or decrease the fan speed.The fan speed setting appearson the main display. Pressingeither button cancels automaticfan control and the fan can becontrolled manually. Press AUTOto return to automatic operation.

e * (Air Delivery ModeControl): Press to change thedirection of the airflow. The currentmode appears in the display screen.Pressing either button cancelsautomatic air delivery control andthe direction of the airflow can becontrolled manually. Press AUTOto return to automatic operation.

To change the current mode, selectone of the following:

Y (Vent): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.

\ (Bi-Level): Air is dividedbetween the instrument paneloutlets and the floor outlets.

C (Tri‐Level): Air is dividedbetween the windshield, instrumentpanel, and floor outlets.

[ (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets.

- (Defog): Clears the windows offog or moisture. Air is directed to thewindshield and floor outlets.

0 (Defrost): Clears thewindshield of fog or frost morequickly. Air is directed to thewindshield. Selecting defrostwill disable automatic control.

For best results, clear all snowand ice from the windshield beforedefrosting.

# (Air Conditioning): Press toturn the air conditioning systemon or off. If the fan is turned off orthe outside temperature falls belowfreezing, the air conditioning systemwill not run.



Pressing this button cancelsautomatic air conditioning andturns off the air conditioner.Press AUTO to return to automaticoperation and the air conditionerruns automatically as needed.When the indicator light is on, theair conditioner runs automaticallyto cool the air inside the vehicle orto dry the air needed to defog thewindshield faster.

> (Recirculation): Press toalternate between recirculatingair inside the vehicle or pulling inoutside air. When the indicator lightis on, air is being recirculated insidethe vehicle. This helps to quicklycool the air inside the vehicle orprevent outside air and odors fromentering.

Pressing this button cancelsautomatic recirculation. Press AUTOto return to automatic operation andrecirculation runs automatically asneeded.

Rear Window Defogger

= (Rear Window Defogger):Press to turn the rear windowdefogger on or off.

The rear window defoggerturns off automatically afterabout 10 minutes. If turned onagain it runs for about five minutesbefore turning off. The defoggercan also be turned off by turningthe ignition to ACC/ACCESSORYor LOCK/OFF.

The rear window defogger canbe set to automatic operation.See “Climate and Air Quality”under Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑39. When auto rear defog isselected, the rear window defoggerturns on automatically when theinterior temperature is cold andthe outside temperature is about4°C (40°F) and below. The autorear defogger turns off automaticallyafter about 10 minutes, or afterfive minutes if the outsidetemperature is not as cold.

For vehicles with heated outsiderearview mirrors, they turn on whenthe rear window defogger buttonis on and help to clear fog or frostfrom the surface of the mirror.See Heated Mirrors on page 2‑17.

Notice: Do not try to clear frostor other material from the insideof the front windshield and rearwindow with a razor blade oranything else that is sharp. Thismay damage the rear windowdefogger grid and affect yourradio's ability to pick up stationsclearly. The repairs wouldn't becovered by your warranty.

Remote Start Climate ControlOperation: For vehicles with theremote vehicle start feature, theclimate control system may runwhen the vehicle is started remotely.The system uses the driver'sprevious settings to heat or cool theinside of the vehicle. See RemoteVehicle Start on page 2‑8.

The rear window defogger turns onif it is cold outside.



Sensor

The solar sensor, located on topof the instrument panel near thewindshield, monitors the solar heat.

The climate control system usesthe sensor information to adjustthe temperature, fan speed,recirculation, and air deliverymode for best comfort.

Do not cover the sensor or theautomatic climate control systemmay not work properly.

Dual Automatic Climate Control SystemFor vehicles with this system, it controls the heating, cooling, and ventilation.

A. Power

B. Driver Temperature Control

C. Defrost

D. Fan Control

E. Air Delivery Mode Control

F. Recirculation/AutomaticRecirculation

G. Passenger Temperature Control

H. AUTO


J. Heated Steering Wheel

K. Air Conditioning

L. ZONE



Automatic Operation

The system automatically controlsthe fan speed, air delivery, airconditioning, and recirculation inorder to heat or cool the vehicleto the desired temperature.

When the AUTO indicator light ison, the system is in full automaticoperation. If the air delivery mode,fan speed, recirculation, or airconditioning setting is adjusted,the AUTO indicator turns off andthe selected settings will appearon the display.

To place the system in automaticmode do the following:

1. Press AUTO.

2. Set the temperature. Allow thesystem time to stabilize. Adjustthe temperature as needed forbest comfort.

Q TEMPR (Driver andPassenger TemperatureControl): The temperaturecan be adjusted separately forthe driver and the passenger.Press to increase or decreasethe temperature.

ZONE: Press to link all climatezone settings to the driver'ssettings. The ZONE indicator lightwill turn off. When the passengersettings are adjusted, the ZONEindicator light is on.

Manual Operation

O (Power): Press to turn the fan offor on.

D C (Fan Control): Press toincrease or decrease the fan speed.The fan speed setting appears onthe main display. Pressing eitherbutton cancels automatic fan controland the fan is controlled manually.Press AUTO to return to automaticoperation.

e * (Air Delivery ModeControl): Press to changethe direction of the airflow.The current mode appears inthe display screen. Pressingeither button cancels automatic airdelivery control and the directionof the airflow is controlled manually.Press AUTO to return to automaticoperation.

To change the current mode, selectone of the following:

Y (Vent): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.

\ (Bi-Level): Air is dividedbetween the instrument paneloutlets and the floor outlets.

C (Tri‐Level): Air is dividedbetween the windshield, instrumentpanel, and floor outlets.

[ (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets.

- (Defog): Clears the windows offog or moisture. Air is directed to thewindshield and floor outlets.



0 (Defrost): Clears thewindshield of fog or frost morequickly. Air is directed to thewindshield.

For best results, clear all snow andice from the windshield beforedefrosting.

# (Air Conditioning): Press toturn the air conditioning system onor off. If the fan is turned off or theoutside temperature falls belowfreezing, the air conditioner willnot run.

Pressing this button cancelsautomatic air conditioning andturns off the air conditioner.Press AUTO to return to automaticoperation and the air conditionerruns automatically as needed.When the indicator light is on, theair conditioner runs automaticallyto cool the air inside the vehicle orto dry the air needed to defog thewindshield faster.

> / / (Recirculation/AutoRecirculation): Press to change toautomatic control of air recirculationinside the vehicle. When the autorecirculation indicator light is on,the air is automatically recirculatedas needed to help quickly cool theair inside the vehicle.

In auto recirculation control, theAir Quality Control system mayoperate when pollution is detected.To adjust the sensitivity of theAir Quality Control, see “Climateand Air Quality” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑39.

When the> indicator light is on,air is recirculated inside the vehicle.If both indicator lights are off,outside air will flow into the vehicle.Press AUTO or / to return toautomatic operation.

Auto Defog: The climate controlsystem may have a sensor toautomatically detect high humidityinside the vehicle. When highhumidity is detected, the climatecontrol system may adjust tooutside air supply and turn onthe air conditioner. The fan speedmay slightly increase to helpprevent fogging. If the climatecontrol system does not detectpossible window fogging, it returnsto normal operation. To turn AutoDefog off or on, see “Climateand Air Quality” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑39.



Rear Window Defogger

= (Rear Window Defogger):Press to turn the rear windowdefogger on or off.

The rear window defoggerturns off automatically afterabout 10 minutes. If turned onagain it runs for about five minutesbefore turning off. The defoggercan also be turned off by turningthe ignition to ACC/ACCESSORYor LOCK/OFF.

The rear window defogger canbe set to automatic operation.See “Climate and Air Quality”under Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑39. When auto rear defog isselected, the rear window defoggerturns on automatically when theinterior temperature is cold andthe outside temperature is about4°C (40°F) and below. The autorear defogger turns off automatically

after about 10 minutes, or afterfive minutes if the outsidetemperature is not as cold.

For vehicles with heated outsiderearview mirrors, they turn on whenthe rear window defogger buttonis on and help to clear fog or frostfrom the surface of the mirror.See Heated Mirrors on page 2‑17.

Notice: Do not try to clear frostor other material from the insideof the front windshield and rearwindow with a razor blade oranything else that is sharp. Thismay damage the rear windowdefogger grid and affect yourradio's ability to pick up stationsclearly. The repairs wouldn't becovered by your warranty.

( (Heated Steering Wheel): Forvehicles with this feature, press toturn on or off. See Heated SteeringWheel on page 5‑3.

Remote Start Climate ControlOperation: For vehicles withthe remote vehicle start feature,the climate control system mayrun when the vehicle is startedremotely. The system uses thedriver's previous settings to heator cool the inside of the vehicle.See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 2‑8.

The rear window defogger turns onif it is cold outside.

Sensor

The solar sensor, located on topof the instrument panel near thewindshield, monitors the solar heat.

The climate control systemuses the sensor information toadjust the temperature, fan speed,recirculation, and air delivery modefor best comfort.

Do not cover the sensor or theautomatic climate control systemmay not work properly.



Air VentsUse the louvers located on the airvents to change the direction of theairflow.

To open the vent, move thethumbwheel to R. To close the vent,

move the thumbwheel to (.

Operation Tips. Keep all outlets open whenever

possible for best systemperformance.

. Keep the path under all seatsclear of objects to help circulatethe air inside the vehicle moreeffectively.

. Use of non-GM approved hooddeflectors can adversely affectthe performance of the system.

Maintenance

Air IntakeClear away any ice, snow, or leavesfrom the air intake at the base of thewindshield that can block the flow ofair into the vehicle.

Passenger CompartmentAir FilterThe filter removes dust, pollen, andother airborne irritants from outsideair that is pulled into the vehicle.

The filter should be replaced as partof routine scheduled maintenance.See Scheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑2 for replacement intervals.To find out what type of filter to use,see Maintenance ReplacementParts on page 11‑9.

The passenger compartment airfilter can be accessed by removingthe entire glove box.

1. Open the passenger side door.Remove the end cover locatedon the side of the instrumentpanel in the top right corner.Remove the screw affixed tothe side of the glove box.

2. Open the glove box door andremove the attached screwsfrom around the glove box.

3. Lower the loosened glove boxhousing.

4. Unplug both wire cables andremove the glove box.



5. Pull the three tabs to releaseand open the filter door.

6. Remove the old air filter.

7. Install the new air filter.

8. Reinstall the air filter door.Re‐install the glove box.

See your dealer if additionalassistance is needed.



2 NOTES


Driving and Operating 9-1

Driving andOperating

Driving InformationDefensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 9-7Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-8Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . 9-11Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

Starting and OperatingNew Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-16Ignition Positions(Key Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17

Ignition Positions(Keyless Access) . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19

Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-20Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24

Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25Shifting Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-26Parking Over ThingsThat Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27

Engine ExhaustEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28

Automatic TransmissionAutomatic Transmission . . . . . 9-28Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30

Drive SystemsAll-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31

BrakesAntilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32

Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . 9-35

Ride Control SystemsTraction ControlSystem (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36

Electronic StabilityControl (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37

Limited-Slip Differential . . . . . . 9-38Selective Ride Control . . . . . . . 9-38

Cruise ControlCruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39

Object Detection SystemsUltrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 9-42Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44

Rear VisionCamera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46


9-2 Driving and Operating

FuelFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-50Gasoline Specifications(U.S. and Canada Only) . . . . 9-51

California FuelRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51

Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-52Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54

TowingGeneral TowingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55

Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-60Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-61

Conversions and Add-OnsAdd-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-62

Driving Information

Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “alwaysexpect the unexpected.” The firststep in driving defensively is to wearthe safety belt. See Safety Belts onpage 3‑13.

{ WARNING

Assume that other road users(pedestrians, bicyclists, and otherdrivers) are going to be carelessand make mistakes. Anticipatewhat they might do and be ready.In addition:

. Allow enough followingdistance between you andthe driver in front of you.

. Focus on the task of driving.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Driver distraction can causecollisions resulting in injury orpossible death. These simpledefensive driving techniquescould save your life.

Drunk Driving

{ WARNING

Drinking and then driving isvery dangerous. Your reflexes,perceptions, attentiveness, andjudgment can be affected byeven a small amount of alcohol.You can have a serious — oreven fatal — collision if you driveafter drinking. Do not drink anddrive or ride with a driver who hasbeen drinking. Ride home in acab; or if you are with a group,designate a driver who will notdrink.



Death and injury associated withdrinking and driving is a globaltragedy.

Alcohol affects four things thatanyone needs to drive a vehicle:judgment, muscular coordination,vision, and attentiveness.

Police records show thatalmost 40 percent of all motorvehicle-related deaths involvealcohol. In most cases, thesedeaths are the result of someonewho was drinking and driving.In recent years, more than17,000 annual motor vehicle-relateddeaths have been associated withthe use of alcohol, with about250,000 people injured.

For persons under 21, it is againstthe law in every U.S. state to drinkalcohol. There are good medical,psychological, and developmentalreasons for these laws.

The obvious way to eliminate theleading highway safety problem isfor people never to drink alcoholand then drive.

Medical research shows thatalcohol in a person's systemcan make crash injuries worse,especially injuries to the brain,spinal cord, or heart. This meansthat when anyone who has beendrinking — driver or passenger — isin a crash, that person's chance ofbeing killed or permanently disabledis higher than if the person had notbeen drinking.

Control of a VehicleThe following three systemshelp to control the vehicle whiledriving — brakes, steering, andaccelerator. At times, as whendriving on snow or ice, it is easy toask more of those control systemsthan the tires and road can provide.Meaning, you can lose control ofthe vehicle. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 9‑36.

Adding non‐dealer accessoriescan affect vehicle performance.See Accessories and Modificationson page 10‑3.

BrakingSee Brake System Warning Light onpage 5‑19.

Braking action involves perceptiontime and reaction time. Decidingto push the brake pedal isperception time. Actually doingit is reaction time.

Average reaction time is aboutthree‐fourths of a second.But that is only an average.It might be less with one driverand as long as two or three secondsor more with another. Age, physicalcondition, alertness, coordination,and eyesight all play a part. So doalcohol, drugs, and frustration.But even in three‐fourths of asecond, a vehicle moving at100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m(66 ft). That could be a lot ofdistance in an emergency, sokeeping enough space betweenthe vehicle and others is important.



And, of course, actual stoppingdistances vary greatly with thesurface of the road, whether it ispavement or gravel; the conditionof the road, whether it is wet, dry,or icy; tire tread; the condition of thebrakes; the weight of the vehicle;and the amount of brake forceapplied.

Avoid needless heavybraking. Some people drive inspurts — heavy accelerationfollowed by heavy braking — ratherthan keeping pace with traffic.This is a mistake. The brakesmight not have time to coolbetween hard stops. The brakeswill wear out much faster with alot of heavy braking. Keeping pacewith the traffic and allowing realisticfollowing distances eliminates a lotof unnecessary braking. That meansbetter braking and longer brake life.

If the engine ever stops whilethe vehicle is being driven, brakenormally but do not pump thebrakes. If the brakes are pumped,the pedal could get harder to pushdown. If the engine stops, therewill still be some power brake assistbut it will be used when the brakeis applied. Once the power assist isused up, it can take longer to stopand the brake pedal will be harderto push.

Adding non‐dealer accessoriescan affect vehicle performance.See Accessories and Modificationson page 10‑3.

Steering

Power Steering

If power steering assist is lostbecause the engine stops or thepower steering system is notfunctioning, the vehicle can besteered but it will take more effort.

Speed Variable Assist Steering

The vehicle has a steering systemthat varies the amount of effortrequired to steer the vehicle inrelation to the speed of the vehicle.

The amount of steering effortrequired is less at slowerspeeds to make the vehicle moremaneuverable and easier to park.At faster speeds, the steering effortincreases to provide a sport-likefeel to the steering. This providesmaximum control and stability.

If the vehicle seems harder to steerthan normal when parking or drivingslowly, there may be a problemwith the system. You will still havepower steering, but steering will bestiffer than normal at slow speeds.See your dealer for service.



Steering Tips

It is important to take curves at areasonable speed.

Traction in a curve depends onthe condition of the tires and theroad surface, the angle at which thecurve is banked, and vehicle speed.While in a curve, speed is the onefactor that can be controlled.

If there is a need to reduce speed,do it before entering the curve, whilethe front wheels are straight.

Try to adjust the speed so you candrive through the curve. Maintain areasonable, steady speed. Wait toaccelerate until out of the curve,and then accelerate gently intothe straightaway.

Steering in Emergencies

There are times when steeringcan be more effective than braking.For example, you come over a hilland find a truck stopped in yourlane, or a car suddenly pulls outfrom nowhere, or a child darts outfrom between parked cars and stopsright in front of you. These problemscan be avoided by braking— if youcan stop in time. But sometimes youcannot stop in time because thereis no room. That is the time forevasive action— steering aroundthe problem.

The vehicle can perform verywell in emergencies like these.First apply the brakes. See Brakingon page 9‑3. It is better to removeas much speed as possible froma collision. Then steer aroundthe problem, to the left or rightdepending on the space available.

An emergency like this requiresclose attention and a quick decision.If holding the steering wheel atthe recommended 9 and 3 o'clockpositions, it can be turned a full180 degrees very quickly withoutremoving either hand. But you haveto act fast, steer quickly, and just asquickly straighten the wheel onceyou have avoided the object.

The fact that such emergencysituations are always possible is agood reason to practice defensivedriving at all times and wear safetybelts properly.



Off-Road RecoveryThe vehicle's right wheels can dropoff the edge of a road onto theshoulder while driving.

If the level of the shoulder isonly slightly below the pavement,recovery should be fairly easy.Ease off the accelerator and then,

if there is nothing in the way, steerso that the vehicle straddles theedge of the pavement. Turn thesteering wheel 8 to 13 cm (3 to5 in), about one-eighth turn, untilthe right front tire contacts thepavement edge. Then turn thesteering wheel to go straightdown the roadway.

Loss of ControlLet us review what driving expertssay about what happens when thethree control systems— brakes,steering, and acceleration— do nothave enough friction where the tiresmeet the road to do what the driverhas asked.

In any emergency, do not give up.Keep trying to steer and constantlyseek an escape route or area ofless danger.

Skidding

In a skid, a driver can lose control ofthe vehicle. Defensive drivers avoidmost skids by taking reasonablecare suited to existing conditions,and by not overdriving thoseconditions. But skids are alwayspossible.

The three types of skids correspondto the vehicle's three controlsystems. In the braking skid,the wheels are not rolling. In thesteering or cornering skid, too muchspeed or steering in a curve causestires to slip and lose cornering force.And in the acceleration skid, toomuch throttle causes the drivingwheels to spin.

If the vehicle starts to slide, easeyour foot off the accelerator pedaland quickly steer the way youwant the vehicle to go. If you startsteering quickly enough, the vehiclemay straighten out. Always be readyfor a second skid if it occurs.



Of course, traction is reduced whenwater, snow, ice, gravel, or othermaterial is on the road. For safety,slow down and adjust your drivingto these conditions. It is importantto slow down on slippery surfacesbecause stopping distance is longerand vehicle control more limited.

While driving on a surface withreduced traction, try to avoidsudden steering, acceleration,or braking, including reducingvehicle speed by shifting to a lowergear. Any sudden changes couldcause the tires to slide. You mightnot realize the surface is slipperyuntil the vehicle is skidding. Learn torecognize warning clues— such asenough water, ice, or packed snowon the road to make a mirroredsurface— and slow down whenyou have any doubt.

Remember: Antilock brakes helpavoid only the braking skid.

Driving on Wet RoadsRain and wet roads can reducevehicle traction and affect yourability to stop and accelerate.Always drive slower in these typesof driving conditions and avoiddriving through large puddles anddeep‐standing or flowing water.

{ WARNING

Wet brakes can cause crashes.They might not work as well ina quick stop and could causepulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a largepuddle of water or a car/vehiclewash, lightly apply the brakepedal until the brakes worknormally.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Flowing or rushing water createsstrong forces. Driving throughflowing water could cause thevehicle to be carried away. If thishappens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and bevery cautious about trying todrive through flowing water.

Hydroplaning

Hydroplaning is dangerous. Watercan build up under the vehicle'stires so they actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the roadis wet enough and you are goingfast enough. When the vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or nocontact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is toslow down when the road is wet.



Other Rainy Weather Tips

Besides slowing down, other wetweather driving tips include:. Allow extra following distance.. Pass with caution.. Keep windshield wiping

equipment in good shape.. Keep the windshield washer fluid

reservoir filled.. Have good tires with proper

tread depth. See Tires onpage 10‑46.

. Turn off cruise control.

Highway HypnosisAlways be alert and pay attentionto your surroundings while driving.If you become tired or sleepy, finda safe place to park the vehicleand rest.

Other driving tips include:. Keep the vehicle well ventilated.. Keep interior temperature cool.. Keep your eyes moving — scan

the road ahead and to the sides.. Check the rearview mirror and

vehicle instruments often.

Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or throughmountains is different than drivingon flat or rolling terrain. Tips fordriving in these conditions include:. Keep the vehicle serviced and in

good shape.. Check all fluid levels and brakes,

tires, cooling system, andtransmission.

. Shift to a lower gear when goingdown steep or long hills.

{ WARNING

If you do not shift down, thebrakes could get so hot that theywould not work well. You wouldthen have poor braking or evennone going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let the engineassist the brakes on a steepdownhill slope.



{ WARNING

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)or with the ignition off isdangerous. The brakes willhave to do all the work of slowingdown and they could get so hotthat they would not work well.You would then have poor brakingor even none going down a hill.You could crash. Always have theengine running and the vehicle ingear when going downhill.

. Stay in your own lane. Do notswing wide or cut across thecenter of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay inyour own lane.

. Top of hills: Bealert — something couldbe in your lane (stalled car,accident).

. Pay attention to special roadsigns (falling rocks area, windingroads, long grades, passing orno-passing zones) and takeappropriate action.

Winter Driving

Driving on Snow or Ice

Drive carefully when there issnow or ice between the tiresand the road, creating less tractionor grip. Wet ice can occur at about0°C (32°F) when freezing rainbegins to fall, resulting in even lesstraction. Avoid driving on wet ice orin freezing rain until roads can betreated with salt or sand.

Drive with caution, whatever thecondition. Accelerate gently sotraction is not lost. Accelerating tooquickly causes the wheels to spinand makes the surface under thetires slick, so there is even lesstraction.

Try not to break the fragile traction.If you accelerate too fast, the drivewheels will spin and polish thesurface under the tires even more.

The Antilock Brake System (ABS)on page 9‑32 improves vehiclestability during hard stops onslippery roads, but apply the brakessooner than when on dry pavement.

Allow greater following distanceon any slippery road and watchfor slippery spots. Icy patches canoccur on otherwise clear roads inshaded areas. The surface of acurve or an overpass can remainicy when the surrounding roadsare clear. Avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers and braking whileon ice.

Turn off cruise control on slipperysurfaces.



Blizzard Conditions

Being stuck in snow can be aserious situation. Stay with thevehicle unless there is help nearby.If possible, use the RoadsideAssistance Program (U.S. andCanada) on page 13‑8 or RoadsideAssistance Program (Mexico) onpage 13‑10. To get help and keepeveryone in the vehicle safe:. Turn on the hazard warning

flashers.. Tie a red cloth to an outside

mirror.

{ WARNING

Snow can trap engine exhaustunder the vehicle. This maycause exhaust gases to getinside. Engine exhaust containsCarbon Monoxide (CO) whichcannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousnessand even death.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:. Clear away snow from aroundthe base of your vehicle,especially any that is blockingthe exhaust pipe.

. Check again from time totime to be sure snow doesnot collect there.

. Open a window about5 cm (2 in) on the side ofthe vehicle that is away fromthe wind to bring in fresh air.

. Fully open the air outletson or under the instrumentpanel.

. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting thatcirculates the air insidethe vehicle and set the fanspeed to the highest setting.See Climate Control Systemin the Index.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑27.

Snow can trap exhaust gasesunder your vehicle. This cancause deadly CO (CarbonMonoxide) gas to get inside. COcould overcome you and kill you.You cannot see it or smell it, soyou might not know it is in yourvehicle. Clear away snow fromaround the base of your vehicle,especially any that is blockingthe exhaust.

Run the engine for short periodsonly as needed to keep warm,but be careful.



To save fuel, run the engine for onlyshort periods as needed to warmthe vehicle and then shut the engineoff and close the window most ofthe way to save heat. Repeat thisuntil help arrives but only when youfeel really uncomfortable from thecold. Moving about to keep warmalso helps.

If it takes some time for help toarrive, now and then when you runthe engine, push the acceleratorpedal slightly so the engineruns faster than the idle speed.This keeps the battery charged torestart the vehicle and to signal forhelp with the headlamps. Do thisas little as possible to save fuel.

If the Vehicle is StuckSlowly and cautiously spin thewheels to free the vehicle whenstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.

If stuck too severely for the tractionsystem to free the vehicle, turn thetraction system off and use therocking method.

{ WARNING

If the vehicle's tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, andyou or others could be injured.The vehicle can overheat,causing an engine compartmentfire or other damage. Spin thewheels as little as possible andavoid going above 55 km/h(35 mph).

For information about using tirechains on the vehicle, see TireChains on page 10‑69.

Rocking the Vehicle to Getit Out

Turn the steering wheel left andright to clear the area aroundthe front wheels. Turn off anytraction system. Shift back andforth between R (Reverse) and aforward gear, spinning the wheelsas little as possible. To preventtransmission wear, wait until thewheels stop spinning before shiftinggears. Release the acceleratorpedal while shifting, and presslightly on the accelerator pedalwhen the transmission is in gear.Slowly spinning the wheels in theforward and reverse directionscauses a rocking motion that couldfree the vehicle. If that does notget the vehicle out after a few tries,it might need to be towed out.If the vehicle does need to betowed out, see Towing the Vehicleon page 10‑89.



Vehicle Load LimitsIt is very important to knowhow much weight the vehiclecan carry. This weight is calledthe vehicle capacity weightand includes the weight ofall occupants, cargo and allnonfactory‐installed options.Two labels on the vehicleshow how much weight itmay properly carry, the Tireand Loading Information labeland the Certification label.

{ WARNING

Do not load the vehicleany heavier than theGross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way thevehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoshorten the life of the vehicle.

Tire and Loading InformationLabel

Label Example

A vehicle-specific Tire andLoading Information labelis attached to the vehicle'scenter pillar (B-pillar). Withthe driver's door open, youwill find the label attachedbelow the door lock post.



The Tire and LoadingInformation label shows thenumber of occupant seatingpositions (A), and the maximumvehicle capacity weight (B) inkilograms and pounds.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label also showsthe tire size of the originalequipment tires (C) and therecommended cold tire inflationpressures (D). For moreinformation on tires and inflationsee Tires on page 10‑46 andTire Pressure on page 10‑54.

There is also important loadinginformation on the Certificationlabel. It tells you the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)and the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) for the frontand rear axle. See “CertificationLabel” later in this section.

Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit

1. Locate the statement“The combined weight ofoccupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kg orXXX lbs” on your vehicle'splacard.

2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will beriding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers from XXX kgor XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equalsthe available amount ofcargo and luggage loadcapacity. For example,if the “XXX” amount equals1400 lbs and there will befive 150 lb passengers inyour vehicle, the amountof available cargo andluggage load capacityis 650 lbs (1400 − 750(5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage and cargobeing loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safelyexceed the available cargoand luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.



6. If your vehicle will be towinga trailer, the load from yourtrailer will be transferred toyour vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine how thisreduces the available cargoand luggage load capacityof your vehicle.

See Trailer Towing on page 9‑60for important information ontowing a trailer, towing safetyrules, and trailering tips. Example 1

A. Vehicle Capacity Weightfor Example 1 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs).

B. Subtract Occupant Weight@ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 =136 kg (300 lbs).

C. Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 317 kg(700 lbs).

Example 2


B. Subtract Occupant Weight@ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 =340 kg (750 lbs).

C. Available CargoWeight = 113 kg (250 lbs).



Example 3


B. Subtract Occupant Weight@ 91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 =453 kg (1,000 lbs).

C. Available CargoWeight = 0 kg (0 lbs).

Refer to the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information label forspecific information about thevehicle's capacity weight and

seating positions. The combinedweight of the driver, passengers,and cargo should never exceedthe vehicle's capacity weight.

Certification Label

Label Example

A vehicle-specific Certificationlabel is attached to the driverside center pillar (B-pillar).The label tells the gross weightcapacity of the vehicle, calledthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR). The GVWR includesthe weight of the vehicle, all

occupants, fuel, and cargo.Never exceed the GVWR forthe vehicle, or the Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR) for eitherthe front or rear axle.

And, if there is a heavy load,it should be spread out.See “Steps for DeterminingCorrect Load Limit” earlierin this section.

{ WARNING

Do not load the vehicleany heavier than theGross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way thevehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoshorten the life of the vehicle.



If you put things inside thevehicle— like suitcases,tools, packages, or anythingelse— they will go as fast asthe vehicle goes. If you have tostop or turn quickly, or if there isa crash, they will keep going.

{ WARNING

Things inside the vehicle canstrike and injure people in asudden stop or turn, or in acrash.

. Put things in the cargoarea of the vehicle. In thecargo area, put them asfar forward as possible.Try to spread the weightevenly.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Never stack heavierthings, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are abovethe tops of the seats.

. Do not leave anunsecured child restraintin the vehicle.

. Secure loose items in thevehicle.

. Do not leave a seat foldeddown unless needed.

Starting andOperating

New Vehicle Break-InNotice: The vehicle does notneed an elaborate break-in. But itwill perform better in the long runif you follow these guidelines:. Do not drive at any oneconstant speed, fast or slow,for the first 805 km (500mi).Do not make full-throttlestarts. Avoid downshifting tobrake or slow the vehicle.

. During the first 1 000 km(600mi), avoid using morethan moderate accelerationin lower gears and avoidvehicle speeds above110 km/h (68mph).

. Between the first1 000 km (600mi) and5 000 km (3,000 mi),heavy acceleration inlower gears can be used.



Vehicle speeds above110 km/h (68mph) shouldbe limited to five minutesper use.

. Avoid making hard stopsfor the first 322 km (200mi)or so. During this time thenew brake linings are notyet broken in. Hard stopswith new linings can meanpremature wear and earlierreplacement. Follow thisbreaking-in guideline everytime you get new brakelinings.

. Do not tow a trailer duringbreak-in. See DrivingCharacteristics and TowingTips on page 9‑56 for thetrailer towing capabilitiesof your vehicle and moreinformation.

Following break‐in, enginespeed and load can be graduallyincreased.

Ignition Positions(Key Access)

The ignition switch has four differentpositions.

Notice: Using a tool to force thekey to turn in the ignition couldcause damage to the switch orbreak the key. Use the correctkey, make sure it is all the way in,and turn it only with your hand.If the key cannot be turned byhand, see your dealer.

The key must be fully extended tostart the vehicle.

To shift out of P (Park), turn theignition to ON/RUN and apply thebrake pedal.

A (STOPPING THE ENGINE/LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle isstopped, turn the ignition switch toLOCK/OFF to turn the engine off.Retained Accessory Power (RAP)will remain active. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 9‑24 for more information.

This is the only position fromwhich the key can be removed.This locks the ignition and automatictransmission.

Do not turn the engine off when thevehicle is moving. This will causea loss of power assist in the brakeand steering systems and disablethe airbags.



In an emergency, if the vehicle mustbe shut off while driving:

1. Brake using a firm and steadypressure. Do not pump thebrakes repeatedly. This maydeplete power assist, requiringincreased brake pedal force.

2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral).This can be done while thevehicle is moving. After shiftingto N (Neutral), firmly apply thebrakes and steer the vehicle toa safe location.

3. Come to a complete stop, shiftto P (Park), and turn the ignitionto LOCK/OFF. On vehicles withan automatic transmission, theshift lever must be in P (Park)to turn the ignition switch tothe LOCK/OFF position.

4. Set the parking brake.See Parking Brake onpage 9‑33.

{ WARNING

Turning off the vehicle whilemoving may cause loss of powerassist in the brake and steeringsystems and disable the airbags.While driving, only shut thevehicle off in an emergency.

5. If the vehicle must be shut offwhile driving, turn the ignition toACC/ACCESSORY.

The ignition switch can bind in theLOCK/OFF position with the wheelsturned off center. If this happens,move the steering wheel fromright to left while turning the keyto ACC/ACCESSORY. If this doesnot work, then the vehicle needsservice.

B (ACC/ACCESSORY): Thisposition provides power to some ofthe electrical accessories. It unlocksthe ignition. To move the key fromACC/ACCESSORY to LOCK/OFF,the shift lever must be in P (Park).

C (ON/RUN): The ignitionswitch stays in this positionwhen the engine is running.This position can be used tooperate the electrical accessories,including the ventilation fan and12‐volt power outlet, as well as todisplay some warning and indicatorlights. The transmission is alsounlocked in this position.

The battery could be drained if thekey is left in the ACC/ACCESSORYor ON/RUN position with the engineoff. The vehicle might not restart ifthe battery is allowed to drain for anextended period of time.

D (START): This position startsthe engine. When the engine starts,release the key. The ignition switchwill return to ON/RUN for normaldriving.

A warning tone sounds when thedriver door is opened when theignition is still in ACC/ACCESSORYand the key is in the ignition.



Ignition Positions(Keyless Access)

The vehicle has an electronickeyless ignition with push‐buttonstart.

Pressing the button cycles it throughthree modes, ACC/ACCESSORY,ON/RUN/START, and Stopping theEngine/OFF.

The transmitter must be in thevehicle for the system to operate.If the push-button start is notworking, the vehicle may be near

a strong radio antenna signalcausing interference to the keylessaccess system. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2‑4 for moreinformation.

To shift out of P (Park), the vehiclemust be in ACC/ACCESSORY orON/RUN and the brake pedal mustbe applied.

Stopping the Engine/OFF(No LED Lights): When thevehicle is stopped, press theengine START/STOP buttononce to turn the engine off.

If the vehicle is in P (Park), theignition will turn off, and RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) will remainactive. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 9‑24 formore information.

If the vehicle is not in P (Park),the ignition will return to ACC/ACCESSORY and display themessage SHIFT TO PARK in theDriver Information Center (DIC).

See Transmission Messages onpage 5‑38 for more information.When the vehicle is shifted intoP (Park), the ignition system willswitch to OFF.

Do not turn the engine off when thevehicle is moving. This will cause aloss of power assist in the brakeand steering systems and disablethe airbags.

In an emergency, if the vehicle mustbe shut off while driving:

1. Brake using a firm and steadypressure. Do not pump thebrakes repeatedly. This maydeplete power assist, requiringincreased brake pedal force.

2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral).This can be done while thevehicle is moving. After shiftingto N (Neutral), firmly apply thebrakes and steer the vehicle toa safe location.



3. Come to a complete stop, shiftto P (Park), and turn the ignitionto LOCK/OFF. On vehicles withan automatic transmission, theshift lever must be in P (Park)to turn the ignition switch to theLOCK/OFF position.

4. Set the parking brake.See Parking Brake onpage 9‑33.

{ WARNING

Turning off the vehicle whilemoving may cause loss of powerassist in the brake and steeringsystems and disable the airbags.While driving, only shut thevehicle off in an emergency.

5. If the vehicle must be shut offwhile driving, switch the ignitionto ACC/ACCESSORY.

ACC/ACCESSORY (Amber LEDLight): This mode allows you touse some electrical accessorieswhen the engine is off.

With the ignition off, pressing thebutton one time without the brakepedal applied will place the ignitionsystem in ACC/ACCESSORY.

The ignition will switch fromACC/ACCESSORY to OFF afterfive minutes to prevent batteryrun down.

ON/RUN/START (Green LEDLight): This mode is for drivingand starting. With the ignitionoff, and the brake pedal applied,pressing the button once willplace the ignition system inON/RUN/START. Once enginecranking begins, release thebutton. Engine cranking willcontinue until the engine starts.See Starting the Engine onpage 9‑20 for more information.The ignition will then remain inON/RUN.

Starting the EngineMove the shift lever to P (Park) orN (Neutral). The engine will not startin any other position. To restart theengine when the vehicle is alreadymoving, use N (Neutral) only.

Notice: Do not try to shift toP (Park) if the vehicle is moving.If you do, you could damage thetransmission. Shift to P (Park)only when the vehicle is stopped.

Notice: The engine is designedto work with the electronics inthe vehicle. If you add electricalparts or accessories, you couldchange the way the engineoperates. Before adding electricalequipment, check with yourdealer. If you do not, the enginemight not perform properly. Anyresulting damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.



Starting Procedure (Key Access)

1. With your foot off the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition key toSTART. When the engine starts,let go of the ignition.

The idle speed will go down asyour engine gets warm. Do notrace the engine immediatelyafter starting it. Operate theengine and transmission gentlyto allow the oil to warm up andlubricate all moving parts.

The vehicle has aComputer-Controlled CrankingSystem. This feature assistsin starting the engine andprotects components. If theignition key is turned to theSTART position, and thenreleased when the enginebegins cranking, the enginewill continue cranking for afew seconds or until the vehicle

starts. If the engine does notstart and the key is held inSTART for many seconds,cranking will be stopped after15 seconds to prevent crankingmotor damage. To preventgear damage, this systemalso prevents cranking if theengine is already running.Engine cranking can be stoppedby turning the ignition switchto ACC/ACCESSORY orLOCK/OFF.

Notice: Cranking the engine forlong periods of time, by returningthe key to the START positionimmediately after cranking hasended, can overheat and damagethe cranking motor, and drain thebattery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.

2. If the engine does not start after5‐10 seconds, especially in verycold weather (below −18°C or0°F), it could be flooded with toomuch gasoline. Try pushing theaccelerator pedal all the wayto the floor and holding it thereas you hold the key in START,or press the START button, forup to a maximum of 15 seconds.Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to allow thecranking motor to cool down.When the engine starts, let goof the key or button, and theaccelerator. If the vehicle startsbriefly but then stops again,do the same thing. This clearsthe extra gasoline from theengine. Do not race the engineimmediately after starting it.Operate the engine andtransmission gently until theoil warms up and lubricatesall moving parts.



Starting Procedure(Keyless Access)

1. If the vehicle has the keylessaccess system, the transmittermust be in the vehicle. Putyour foot on the brake pedaland push the START button.When the engine beginscranking, let go of the button.

The idle speed will go downas your engine gets warm.Do not race the engineimmediately after starting it.Operate the engine andtransmission gently to allowthe oil to warm up and lubricateall moving parts.

If the transmitter is not inthe vehicle or something isinterfering with the transmitter,the Driver Information Center

(DIC) will display NO REMOTEDETECTED. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑25 for more information.

If the battery in the keylessaccess transmitter needsreplacing, the DIC displaysREPLACE BATTERY INREMOTE KEY. The vehiclecan still be driven. See “Startingthe Vehicle with a LowTransmitter Battery” in RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2‑4 formore information.

The vehicle has aComputer-Controlled CrankingSystem. This feature assistsin starting the engine andprotects components. If theSTART button is pressed, andthen released when the engine

begins cranking, the enginewill continue cranking for a fewseconds or until the vehiclestarts. If the engine does notstart and the button is pressedfor many seconds, cranking willbe stopped after 15 seconds toprevent cranking motor damage.To prevent gear damage, thissystem also prevents crankingif the engine is already running.Engine cranking can be stoppedby pressing the START button asecond time.

Notice: Cranking the engine forlong periods of time, by returningthe key to the START positionimmediately after cranking hasended, can overheat and damagethe cranking motor, and drain thebattery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.



2. If the engine does not start after5‐10 seconds, especially in verycold weather (below −18°C or0°F), it could be flooded with toomuch gasoline. Try pushing theaccelerator pedal all the wayto the floor and holding it thereas you hold the key in START,or press the START button, forup to a maximum of 15 seconds.Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to allow thecranking motor to cool down.When the engine starts, let goof the key or button, and theaccelerator. If the vehicle startsbriefly but then stops again,do the same thing. This clearsthe extra gasoline from theengine. Do not race the engineimmediately after starting it.Operate the engine andtransmission gently until theoil warms up and lubricatesall moving parts.

Engine HeaterThe engine coolant heater,if available, can help in cold weatherconditions at or below −18°C (0°F)for easier starting and better fueleconomy during engine warm-up.Plug in the coolant heater at leastfour hours before starting thevehicle. An internal thermostat inthe plug-end of the cord will preventengine coolant heater operation attemperatures above −18°C (0°F).

To Use the Engine CoolantHeater

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap theelectrical cord.

V6 Engine

The electrical cord is locatedon the driver side of theengine compartment, betweenthe fender and the enginecompartment fuse block onvehicles with a six cylinderengine.



4 Cylinder Engine

The electrical cord is locatedon the passenger side of theengine compartment, betweenthe fender and the air cleaneron vehicles with a four cylinderengine.

3. Plug it into a normal, grounded110-volt AC outlet.

{ WARNING

Plugging the cord into anungrounded outlet could causean electrical shock. Also, thewrong kind of extension cordcould overheat and cause a fire.You could be seriously injured.Plug the cord into a properlygrounded three-prong 110-volt ACoutlet. If the cord will not reach,use a heavy-duty three-prongextension cord rated for at least15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, besure to unplug and store thecord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engine parts.

The length of time the heater shouldremain plugged in depends onseveral factors. Ask a dealer in thearea where you will be parking thevehicle for the best advice on this.

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP)These vehicle accessories can beused for up to 10 minutes after theengine is turned off:. Audio System. Power Windows. Sunroof (If Equipped). Auxiliary Power Outlet

Power to the audio system willcontinue to operate for up to10 minutes or until the driverdoor is opened.

Power to the power windows andsunroof will continue to operate forup to 10 minutes or until any door isopened.

All of these features will workwhen the ignition is in ON/RUNor ACC/ACCESSORY.



Shifting Into Park

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to get out ofthe vehicle if the shift lever is notfully in P (Park) with the parkingbrake firmly set. The vehicle canroll. If you have left the enginerunning, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure the vehicle willnot move, even when you are onfairly level ground, use the stepsthat follow.

1. Hold the brake pedal down andset the parking brake.

See Parking Brake on page 9‑33for more information.

2. Move the shift lever into P (Park)by pushing the lever all the waytoward the front of the vehicle.

3. Turn the ignition off.

Leaving the Vehicle with theEngine Running

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to leave thevehicle with the engine running.The vehicle could move suddenlyif the shift lever is not fully inP (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. And, if you leave thevehicle with the engine running,it could overheat and even catchfire. You or others could beinjured. Do not leave the vehiclewith the engine running.

If you have to leave the vehiclewith the engine running, be surethe vehicle is in P (Park) and theparking brake is firmly set beforeyou leave it. After you have movedthe shift lever into P (Park), holddown the regular brake pedal. See ifyou can move the shift lever awayfrom P (Park) without first pulling ittoward you. If you can, it means thatthe shift lever was not fully lockedinto P (Park).



Torque Lock

Torque lock is when the weightof the vehicle puts too muchforce on the parking pawl in thetransmission. This happens whenparking on a hill and shifting thetransmission into P (Park) is notdone properly and then it is difficultto shift out of P (Park). To preventtorque lock, set the parking brakeand then shift into P (Park). To findout how, see "Shifting Into P (Park)"listed previously.

If torque lock does occur, yourvehicle may need to be pusheduphill by another vehicle to relievethe parking pawl pressure, so youcan shift out of P (Park).

If you are towing a trailer andparking on a hill, see DrivingCharacteristics and TowingTips on page 9‑56.

Shifting Out of Park

Automatic TransmissionShift Lock

The vehicle has an electronic shiftlock release system. The shift lockrelease is designed to:. Prevent ignition key removal

unless the shift lever is inP (Park).

. Prevent movement of the shiftlever out of P (Park), unless theignition is in ON/RUN and thebrake pedal is applied.

The shift lock is always functionalexcept in the case of an unchargedor low voltage (less than 9‐volt)battery.

If the vehicle has an unchargedbattery or a battery with low voltage,try charging or jump starting thebattery. See Jump Starting onpage 10‑86.

If the console shift lever cannot bemoved out of P (Park):

1. Apply and maintain the regularbrakes.

2. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUNposition. See Ignition Positions(Key Access) on page 9‑17or Ignition Positions (KeylessAccess) on page 9‑19 for moreinformation.

3. Let up on the shift lever andmake sure the shift lever ispushed all the way into P (Park).

4. Press the shift lever button.

5. Move the shift lever into thedesired gear.

If you still cannot move the shiftlever from P (Park), consult yourdealer or a professional towingservice.



Parking Over ThingsThat Burn

{ WARNING

Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under thevehicle and ignite. Do not parkover papers, leaves, dry grass,or other things that can burn.

Engine Exhaust

{ WARNING

Engine exhaust contains CarbonMonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness andeven death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:. The vehicle idles in areaswith poor ventilation (parkinggarages, tunnels, deep snowthat may block underbodyairflow or tail pipes).

. The exhaust smells orsounds strange or different.

. The exhaust system leaksdue to corrosion or damage.

. The vehicle exhaust systemhas been modified, damagedor improperly repaired.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. There are holes or openingsin the vehicle body fromdamage or after-marketmodifications that are notcompletely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected orif it is suspected that exhaust iscoming into the vehicle:

. Drive it only with the windowscompletely down.

. Have the vehicle repairedimmediately.

Never park the vehicle with theengine running in an enclosedarea such as a garage or abuilding that has no fresh airventilation.



Running the VehicleWhile ParkedIt is better not to park with theengine running. But if you ever haveto, here are some things to know.

{ WARNING

Idling a vehicle in an enclosedarea with poor ventilation isdangerous. Engine exhaust mayenter the vehicle. Engine exhaustcontains Carbon Monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousnessand even death. Never run theengine in an enclosed areathat has no fresh air ventilation.For more information, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑27.

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to get outof the vehicle if the automatictransmission shift lever is notfully in P (Park) with the parkingbrake firmly set. The vehiclecan roll. Do not leave the vehiclewhen the engine is runningunless you have to. If you haveleft the engine running, thevehicle can move suddenly.You or others could be injured.To be sure the vehicle will notmove, even when you are onfairly level ground, always setthe parking brake and movethe shift lever to P (Park).

Follow the proper steps to besure the vehicle will not move.See Shifting Into Park onpage 9‑25.

If parking on a hill and pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9‑56.

AutomaticTransmissionThe automatic transmission has ashift lever located on the consolebetween the seats.

P (Park): This position locks thefront wheels. It is the best positionto use when starting the enginebecause the vehicle cannot moveeasily.



{ WARNING

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle whenthe engine is running unlessyou have to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park onpage 9‑25. If you are pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9‑56.

Make sure the shift lever is fully inP (Park) before starting the engine.The vehicle has an automatictransmission shift lock controlsystem. The regular brake must

be fully applied first and then theshift lever button pressed beforeshifting from P (Park) when theignition key is in ON/RUN. If youcannot shift out of P (Park), easepressure on the shift lever, thenpush the shift lever all the wayinto P (Park) as you maintain brakeapplication. Then press the shiftlever button and move the shiftlever into another gear. See ShiftingOut of Park on page 9‑26.

R (Reverse): Use this gear toback up.

Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)while the vehicle is movingforward could damage thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Shift to R (Reverse)only after the vehicle is stopped.

To rock the vehicle back and forth toget out of snow, ice, or sand withoutdamaging the transmission, see Ifthe Vehicle is Stuck on page 9‑11.

N (Neutral): In this position, theengine does not connect withthe wheels. To restart the enginewhen the vehicle is already moving,use N (Neutral) only. Also, useN (Neutral) when the vehicle isbeing towed.

{ WARNING

Shifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speedis dangerous. Unless your footis firmly on the brake pedal, thevehicle could move very rapidly.You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shiftinto a drive gear while the engineis running at high speed.

Notice: Shifting out of P (Park)or N (Neutral) with the enginerunning at high speed maydamage the transmission.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Be surethe engine is not running at highspeed when shifting the vehicle.



D (Drive): This position is fornormal driving. It provides thebest fuel economy. If more poweris needed for passing, and thevehicle is:. Going less than 56 km/h

(35 mph), push the acceleratorpedal about halfway down.

. Going about 56 km/h (35 mph) ormore, push the accelerator allthe way down.

Notice: If the vehicle seems toaccelerate slowly or not shiftgears when you go faster, andyou continue to drive the vehiclethat way, you could damage thetransmission. Have the vehicleserviced right away. You candrive in L (Low) when you aredriving less than 56 km/h (35mph)and D (Drive) for higher speedsuntil then.

Manual Mode: This position isshown on the shifter as a +/−.It allows the driver to select thegears appropriate for current drivingconditions. See Manual Mode onpage 9‑30 for more information.

Manual Mode

Driver Shift Control (DSC)

Notice: If you drive the vehicleat a high rpm without upshiftingwhile using Driver Shift Control(DSC), you could damage thevehicle. Always upshift whennecessary while using DSC.

Driver Shift Control (DSC)allows you to shift an automatictransmission similar to a manualtransmission. To use the DSCfeature:

With Selective Ride Control

1. Move the shift lever to the leftfrom D (Drive).

The vehicle will be in SportMode. The gear indicator inthe DIC will still display a D forDrive, and the SPORT MODEON message will be displayedmomentarily. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑25. When you are inSport Mode, the vehicle will

still shift automatically, butchassis tuning is modified.See Selective Ride Control onpage 9‑38. If you move theshift lever forward or rearward,the transmission will enterManual Mode, and the DICgear indicator will change toan M followed by a numberrepresenting the gear thevehicle is currently in.

2. In Manual Mode, press theshift lever forward to upshiftor rearward to downshift.

Without Selective Ride Control

1. Move the shift lever to the leftfrom D (Drive).

The transmission will enterManual Mode. The DIC gearindicator will change to anM followed by a numberrepresenting the gear thevehicle is currently in.

2. In Manual Mode, press theshift lever forward to upshiftor rearward to downshift.



Uplevel Display Shown,Base Model Similar

The display on the instrument panelcluster will show which gear thevehicle is in. The number indicatesthe requested gear range whenmoving the shift lever forward orrearward.

The transmission will only allowyou to shift into gears appropriatefor the vehicle speed and enginerevolutions per minute (rpm). Thetransmission will not automaticallyshift to the next lower gear if theengine rpm is too high, nor to thenext higher gear when the maximumengine rpm is reached.

While in the DSC mode, thetransmission will automaticallydownshift when the vehicle comesto a stop. This will allow for morepower during take-off.

When accelerating the vehicle froma stop in snowy and icy conditions,you may want to shift into secondgear. A higher gear allows you togain more traction on slipperysurfaces.

Drive Systems

All-Wheel DriveVehicles with this feature alwayssend engine power to all fourwheels. It is fully automatic, andadjusts itself as needed for roadconditions.

When using a compact sparetire on an AWD vehicle, thesystem automatically detectsthe compact spare and disablesAWD. To restore AWD operationand prevent excessive wear onthe system, replace the compactspare with a full-size tire as soon aspossible. See Compact Spare Tireon page 10‑85 for more information.



Brakes

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)This vehicle has the AntilockBrake System (ABS), an advancedelectronic braking system that helpsprevent a braking skid.

When the engine is started andthe vehicle begins to drive away,ABS checks itself. A momentarymotor or clicking noise might beheard while this test is going on,and it might even be noticed thatthe brake pedal moves a little.This is normal.

If there is a problem with ABS, thiswarning light stays on. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) Warning Lighton page 5‑21.

If driving safely on a wet roadand it becomes necessary toslam on the brakes and continuebraking to avoid a sudden obstacle,a computer senses that the wheelsare slowing down. If one of thewheels is about to stop rolling,the computer will separately workthe brakes at each wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressureto each wheel, as required, fasterthan any driver could. This can helpthe driver steer around the obstaclewhile braking hard.

As the brakes are applied, thecomputer keeps receiving updateson wheel speed and controlsbraking pressure accordingly.

Remember: ABS does not changethe time needed to get a foot up tothe brake pedal or always decreasestopping distance. If you get tooclose to the vehicle in front of you,there will not be enough time toapply the brakes if that vehiclesuddenly slows or stops. Alwaysleave enough room up ahead tostop, even with ABS.



Using ABS

Do not pump the brakes. Just holdthe brake pedal down firmly and letABS work. You might hear the ABSpump or motor operating and feelthe brake pedal pulsate, but this isnormal.

Braking in Emergencies

ABS allows the driver to steer andbrake at the same time. In manyemergencies, steering can helpmore than even the very bestbraking.

Parking Brake

The vehicle has an Electric ParkingBrake (EPB). The switch for theEPB is in the center console.

The EPB can always be activated,even if the ignition is off. To preventdraining the battery, avoid repeatedcycles of the EPB system when theengine is not running.

The system has a parking brakestatus light and a parking brakewarning light. See Electric ParkingBrake Light on page 5‑20. There arealso three Driver Information Center(DIC) messages. See Brake SystemMessages on page 5‑33 for moreinformation. In case of insufficientelectrical power, the EPB cannotbe applied or released.

Before leaving the vehicle, checkthe parking brake status light toensure that the parking brake isapplied.



EPB Apply

The EPB can be applied any timethe vehicle is stopped. The EPB isapplied by momentarily lifting up onthe EPB switch. Once fully applied,the parking brake status light will beon. While the brake is being applied,the status light will flash until fullapply is reached. If the light doesnot come on, or remains flashing,you need to have the vehicleserviced. Do not drive the vehicleif the parking brake status lightis flashing. See your dealer. SeeElectric Parking Brake Light onpage 5‑20 for more information.

If the EPB is applied while thevehicle is in motion, a chime willsound, and the DIC messageRELEASE PARK BRAKE SWITCHwill be displayed. The vehicle willdecelerate as long as the switch isheld in the up position. Releasingthe EPB switch during thedeceleration will release the parkingbrake. If the switch is held in the upposition until the vehicle comes to astop, the EPB will remain applied.

If the parking brake status lightflashes continuously, the EPB isonly partially applied or released,or there is a problem with the EPB.The DIC message SERVICE PARKBRAKE will be displayed. If this lightflashes continuously, release theEPB, and attempt to apply it again.If this light continues to flash, do notdrive the vehicle. See your dealer.

If the parking brake warning light ison, the EPB has detected an errorin another system and is operatingwith reduced functionality. To applythe EPB when this light is on, lift upon the EPB switch and hold it in theup position. Full application of theparking brake by the EPB systemmay take a longer period of timethan normal when this light is on.Continue to hold the switch until theparking brake status light remainson. If the parking brake warninglight is on, see your dealer.

If the EPB fails to apply, the rearwheels should be blocked toprevent vehicle movement.

EPB Release

To release the EPB, place theignition in the ON/RUN position,apply and hold the brake pedal,and push down momentarily onthe EPB switch. If you attempt torelease the EPB without the brakepedal applied, a chime will sound,and the DIC message PRESSBRAKE PEDAL TO RELEASEPARK BRAKE will be displayed.The EPB is released when theparking brake status light is off.

If the parking brake warning lightis on, the EPB has detected anerror in another system and isoperating with reduced functionality.To release the EPB when this lightis on, push down on the EPB switchand hold it in the down position.EPB release may take a longerperiod of time than normal whenthis light is on. Continue to hold theswitch until the parking brake statuslight is off. If the light is on, see yourdealer.



Notice: Driving with the parkingbrake on can overheat the brakesystem and cause prematurewear or damage to brake systemparts. Make sure that the parkingbrake is fully released and thebrake warning light is off beforedriving.

Automatic EPB Release

The EPB will automaticallyrelease if the vehicle is running,placed into gear, and an attemptis made to drive away. Avoid rapidacceleration when the EPB isapplied, to preserve parking brakelining life.

For maximum EPB force whentowing a trailer or parking on a hill,pull the EPB switch twice. If youare towing a trailer and parking on ahill, see Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips on page 9‑56 for moreinformation.

Brake AssistThis vehicle has a brake assistfeature designed to assist thedriver in stopping or decreasingvehicle speed in emergencydriving conditions. This featureuses the stability system hydraulicbrake control module to supplementthe power brake system underconditions where the driver hasquickly and forcefully appliedthe brake pedal in an attempt toquickly stop or slow down thevehicle. The stability systemhydraulic brake control moduleincreases brake pressure at eachcorner of the vehicle until theABS activates. Minor brake pedalpulsation or pedal movement duringthis time is normal and the drivershould continue to apply the brakepedal as the driving situationdictates. The brake assist featurewill automatically disengage whenthe brake pedal is released orbrake pedal pressure is quicklydecreased.

Hill Start Assist (HSA)This vehicle has a Hill Start Assist(HSA) feature, which may be usefulwhen the vehicle is stopped on agrade. This feature is designedto prevent the vehicle from rolling,either forward or rearward, duringvehicle drive off. After the drivercompletely stops and holds thevehicle in a complete standstill ona grade, HSA will be automaticallyactivated. During the transitionperiod between when the driverreleases the brake pedal andstarts to accelerate to drive offon a grade, HSA holds the brakingpressure to ensure that there is norolling. The brakes will automaticallyrelease when the accelerator pedalis applied within the two‐secondwindow. It will not activate if thevehicle is in a drive gear and facingdownhill or if the vehicle is facinguphill and in R (Reverse).



Ride Control Systems

Traction ControlSystem (TCS)The vehicle has a tractioncontrol system that limits wheelspin. This is especially useful inslippery road conditions. On afront-wheel-drive vehicle, thesystem operates if it senses thatone or both of the front wheelsare spinning or beginning to losetraction. On an All-Wheel-Drive(AWD) vehicle, the system willoperate if it senses that any of thewheels are spinning or beginningto lose traction. When this happens,the system brakes the spinningwheel(s) and/or reduces enginepower to limit wheel spin.

The system may be heard or feltwhile it is working, but this isnormal.

The TCS/StabiliTrak warning lightflashes to indicate that the tractioncontrol system is active.

This warning light comes on if thereis a problem with the traction controlsystem.

See Traction Off Light on page 5‑21.When this warning light is on, thesystem does not limit wheel spin.Adjust your driving accordingly.

TCS automatically comes onwhenever the vehicle is started.To limit wheel spin, especially inslippery road conditions, the systemshould always be left on. But,TCS can be turned off if needed.

Notice: Do not repeatedly brakeor accelerate heavily when TCS isoff. The vehicle's driveline couldbe damaged.

The TCS off light comes on toindicate that the traction controlsystem has been turned off.

When TCS is switched off on AWDvehicles, the system may still makenoise. This is normal and necessarywith the AWD hardware on thevehicle.

It might be necessary to turn thesystem off if the vehicle gets stuckin sand, mud or snow and rockingthe vehicle is required. See If theVehicle is Stuck on page 9‑11 formore information. See also WinterDriving on page 9‑9 for informationon using TCS when driving in snowyor icy conditions.



To turn the system off, press glocated on the console to the rightof the shifter.

Press and release g and the tractioncontrol system turns off and thetraction control system warning lightcomes on. Press g again to turn thesystem back on. For information onturning StabiliTrak off and on, seeElectronic Stability Control (ESC) onpage 9‑37.

Adding non‐GM accessories canaffect the vehicle's performance.See Accessories and Modificationson page 10‑3 for more information.

Electronic StabilityControl (ESC)The vehicle has a vehiclestability enhancement systemcalled StabiliTrak. It is an advancedcomputer controlled system thatassists with directional control of thevehicle in difficult driving conditions.

StabiliTrak activates when thecomputer senses a differencebetween the intended path andthe direction the vehicle is actuallytraveling. StabiliTrak selectivelyapplies braking pressure at any oneof the vehicle's brakes to help steerthe vehicle in the intended direction.

When the stability control systemactivates, the Traction ControlSystem (TCS)/StabiliTrak lightflashes on the instrument panel.This also occurs when tractioncontrol is activated. A noise mightbe heard or vibration might be feltin the brake pedal. This is normal.Continue to steer the vehicle in theintended direction.

If there is a problem detected withStabiliTrak, the TCS/StabiliTrak lightcomes on and the system is notoperational. See Electronic StabilityControl (ESC)/Traction ControlSystem (TCS) Indicator/WarningLight on page 5‑22. Driving shouldbe adjusted accordingly.



StabiliTrak comes on automaticallywhenever the vehicle is started.To assist with directional controlof the vehicle, the system shouldalways be left on.

StabiliTrak can be turned offif needed by pressing andholding g until the StabiliTrakOff light comes on the instrumentpanel. For information on turningTCS off and on, see TractionControl System (TCS) onpage 9‑36.

If cruise control is being used whenStabiliTrak activates, the cruisecontrol automatically disengages.Press the cruise control button toreengage when road conditionsallow. See Cruise Control onpage 9‑39 for more information.

Limited-Slip DifferentialVehicles with a limited-slipdifferential can give more tractionon snow, mud, ice, sand, or gravel.It works like a standard differentialmost of the time, but when tractionis low, this feature allows the drivewheel with the most traction tomove the vehicle.

Selective Ride ControlThe vehicle may have a ride controlsystem called Selective RideControl. The system provides thefollowing performance benefits:. Reduced Impact Harshness. Improved Road Isolation. Improved High-Speed Stability. Improved Handling Response. Better Control of Body Ride

Motions

To switch from TOUR to SPORTmode, move the shift lever tothe left while the transmissionis in D (Drive).

TOUR: Use for normal city andhighway driving. This settingprovides a smooth, soft ride.

SPORT: Use where road conditionsor personal preference demandmore control. This setting providesmore “feel,” or response to roadconditions through increasedsteering effort and suspensiontuning.

The setting can be changed at anytime. Based on road conditions,steering wheel angle, and vehiclespeed, the system automaticallyadjusts to provide the best handlingwhile providing a smooth ride.The TOUR and SPORT modeswill feel similar on a smooth road.



Cruise ControlWith cruise control, the vehicle canmaintain a speed of about 40 km/h(25 mph) or more without keepingyour foot on the accelerator. Cruisecontrol does not work at speedsbelow 40 km/h (25 mph).

On vehicles with the TractionControl System (TCS) or ElectronicStability Control (ESC), the systemmay begin to limit wheel spinwhile you are using cruise control.If this happens, the cruise controlwill automatically disengage. SeeTraction Control System (TCS) onpage 9‑36 or Electronic StabilityControl (ESC) on page 9‑37.

{ WARNING

Cruise control can be dangerouswhere you cannot drive safely ata steady speed. So, do not usethe cruise control on windingroads or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerouson slippery roads. On such roads,fast changes in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip, andyou could lose control. Do not usecruise control on slippery roads.

The cruise control buttons arelocated on the steering wheel.

5 (On/Off): Press to turn thecruise control system on and off.An indicator light will turn on oroff in the instrument panel cluster.

\ (Cancel): Press to disengagecruise control without erasing theset speed from memory.



RES/+ (Resume/Accelerate):Move the thumbwheel up to makethe vehicle resume to a previouslyset speed or to accelerate.

SET/− (Set/Coast): Move thethumbwheel down to set the speedand activate cruise control or makethe vehicle decelerate.

Setting Cruise Control

If the cruise button is on when not inuse, it could get bumped and go intocruise when not desired. Keep thecruise control switch off when cruiseis not being used.

1. Press5 to turn the cruisecontrol system on. The indicatorlight in the instrument panelcluster comes on.

2. Get to the speed desired.

3. Move the thumbwheel downtoward SET/− and release it.The desired set speed brieflyappears in the instrument panelcluster.

4. Take your foot off the acceleratorpedal.

Resuming a Set Speed

If the cruise control is set at adesired speed and then the brakesare applied or the Cancel buttonis pressed, the cruise control isdisengaged without erasing theset speed from memory.

Once the vehicle reaches about40 km/h (25 mph) or more, movethe thumbwheel up toward RES/+briefly. The vehicle returns to theprevious set speed and stays there.

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated,. Move the thumbwheel up

toward RES/+ and hold it untilthe vehicle accelerates tothe desired speed, and thenrelease it.

. To increase the speed in smallamounts, move the thumbwheelup toward RES/+ briefly andthen release it. Each time thisis done, the vehicle goes about1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster.



Reducing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated,. Move the thumbwheel toward

SET/− and hold until the desiredlower speed is reached, thenrelease it.

. To slow down in small amounts,move the thumbwheel towardSET/− briefly and then releaseit. Each time this is done, thevehicle goes about 1.6 km/h(1 mph) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle WhileUsing Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal toincrease the vehicle's speed.When you take your foot off thepedal, the vehicle will slow downto the previous set cruise controlspeed.

Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well the cruise control workson hills depends upon the vehicle'sspeed, load, and the steepnessof the hills. When going up steephills, you might have to step onthe accelerator pedal to maintainthe vehicle's speed. When goingdownhill, you might have to brakeor shift to a lower gear to maintainthe vehicle's speed. When thebrakes are applied the cruisecontrol shuts off.

Ending Cruise Control

There are three ways to end cruisecontrol:. To disengage cruise control,

step lightly on the brake pedalor clutch; when cruise controldisengages, the indicator lightwill not be lit.

. Press [ on the steering wheel.

. To turn off the cruise control,press5 on the steering wheel.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speed iserased from memory by pressingthe 5 button or if the ignition isturned off.



Object DetectionSystems

Ultrasonic Parking AssistFor vehicles with the UltrasonicRear Parking Assist (URPA)system, it assists the driver withparking and avoiding objects whilein R (Reverse). URPA operates atspeeds less than 8 km/h (5 mph),and the sensors on the rear bumperdetect objects up to 2.5 m (8 ft)behind the vehicle, and at least20 cm (8 in) off the ground.

{ WARNING

The Ultrasonic Rear ParkingAssist (URPA) system does notreplace driver vision. It cannotdetect:

. Objects that are below thebumper, underneath thevehicle, or too close or farfrom the vehicle.

. Children, pedestrians,bicyclists, or pets.

If you do not use proper carebefore and while backing, vehicledamage, injury, or death couldoccur. Even with URPA, alwayscheck behind the vehicle beforebacking up. While backing, besure to look for objects and checkthe vehicle's mirrors.

How the System Works

URPA comes on automaticallywhen the shift lever is moved intoR (Reverse). A single tone soundsto indicate the system is working.

URPA operates only at speeds lessthan 8 km/h (5 mph).

An obstacle is indicated by audiblebeeps. The interval betweenthe beeps becomes shorter asthe vehicle gets closer to theobstacle. When the distance isless than 30 cm (12 in) the beepsare continuous.

To be detected, objects must be atleast 20 cm (8 in) off the ground andbelow trunk level. Objects must alsobe within 2.5 m (8 ft) from the rearbumper. The distance objects canbe detected may be less duringwarmer or humid weather.



PARK ASSIST OFF displays onthe Driver Information Center (DIC)to indicate that URPA is off. Themessage disappears after a shortperiod of time.

Turning the System On and Off

The URPA system can be turned onand off using the park assist buttonlocated next to the shift lever.

The park assist button lights upwhen the system is on and turnsoff when it has been disabled.

URPA defaults to the on settingeach time the vehicle is started.

When the System Does NotSeem to Work Properly

SERVICE PARK ASSIST: If thismessage occurs, take the vehicleto your dealer to repair the system.

PARK ASSIST OFF: If the URPAsystem does not activate due to atemporary condition, the messagedisplays on the DIC. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑25 for more information.This can occur under the followingconditions:. The driver has disabled the

system.. The ultrasonic sensors are not

clean. Keep the vehicle's rearbumper free of mud, dirt, snow,ice, and slush. For cleaninginstructions, see Exterior Careon page 10‑92.

. An object was hanging out of thetrunk during the last drive cycle.Once the object is removed,URPA will return to normaloperation.

. The vehicle's bumper isdamaged. Take the vehicle toyour dealer to repair the system.

. Other conditions may affectsystem performance, such asvibrations from a jackhammeror the compression of air brakeson a very large truck.

If the system is still disabled afterdriving forward at least 40 km/h(25 mph), take the vehicle to yourdealer.



Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA)The vehicle may have a SideBlind Zone Alert (SBZA) system.Read this entire section beforeusing the system.

{ WARNING

SBZA is only a lane changingaid and does not replace drivervision. SBZA does not detect:

. Vehicles outside the sideblind zones which may berapidly approaching.

. Pedestrians, bicyclists,or animals.

Failure to use proper care whenchanging lanes may result indamage to the vehicle, injury,or death. Always check theoutside and rearview mirrors,glance over your shoulder,and use the turn signal beforechanging lanes.

When the system detects a vehiclein the side blind zone, amberSBZA displays will light up in theside mirrors. This indicates that itmay be unsafe to change lanes.Before making a lane change,always check the SBZA display,check the outside and rearviewmirrors, look over your shoulderfor vehicles and hazards, and usethe turn signal.

SBZA Detection Zones

The SBZA sensor covers azone of approximately one laneover from both sides of the vehicle,or 3.5 m (11 ft). This zone startsat each side mirror and goesback approximately 5.0 m (16 ft.).The height of the zone isapproximately between 0.5 m (1.5 ft)and 2.0 m (6 ft) off the ground.

The SBZA detection zones do notchange if the vehicle is towing atrailer. So be extra careful whenchanging lanes while towing atrailer.

How the System Works

Left Side MirrorDisplay

Right Side MirrorDisplay

When the vehicle is started, bothoutside mirror displays will brieflycome on to indicate that the systemis operating. While driving forward,the left or right side mirror SBZAdisplay will light up if a vehicle isdetected in that blind zone. If youactivate a turn signal and a vehiclehas been detected on the sameside, the SBZA display will flashto give you extra warning not tochange lanes.



SBZA displays do not come onwhile the vehicle is approaching orpassing other vehicles. At speedsgreater than 32 km/h (20 mph),SBZA displays may come onwhen a vehicle you have passedremains in or drops back into thedetection zone.

SBZA can be disabled throughVehicle Personalization.See Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑39 for more information.If the SBZA is disabled by thedriver, the SBZA mirror displays willnot light up during normal driving.

When the System Does Not SeemTo Work Properly

Occasional missed alerts canoccur under normal circumstancesand will increase in wet conditions.The system does not need to beserviced due to an occasionalmissed alert. The number of missedalerts will increase with increasedrainfall or road spray.

If the SBZA displays do not light upwhen the system is on and vehiclesare in the blind zone, the systemmay need service. Take the vehicleto your dealer.

SBZA is designed to ignorestationary objects; however, thesystem may occasionally light updue to guard rails, signs, trees,shrubs, and other stationary objects.This is normal system operation;the vehicle does not need service.

SBZA does not operate when theleft or right corners of the rearbumper are covered with mud,dirt, snow, ice, or slush, or inheavy rainstorms. For cleaninginstructions, see Exterior Care onpage 10‑92. If the infotainmentdisplay still shows the SIDEBLIND ZONE SYS. UNAVAILABLEmessage after cleaning the bumper,see your dealer.

The SBZA displays may remain onif a trailer is attached to the vehicle,or a bicycle or object is extendingout to either side of the vehicle.

When SBZA is disabled for anyreason other than the driver turningit off, the driver will not be able toturn SBZA back on using VehiclePersonalization. The SIDE BLINDZONE ALERT ON option will notbe selectable if the conditionsfor normal system operation arenot met. Until normal operatingconditions for SBZA are met, youshould not rely upon SBZA whiledriving.



SBZA Error Messages

The following messages mayappear on the infotainment display:

SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERTSYSTEM OFF: This messageindicates that the driver has turnedthe system off.

SIDE BLIND ZONE SYS.UNAVAILABLE: This messageindicates that the SBZA systemis disabled because the sensor isblocked and cannot detect vehiclesin the blind zone. The sensor maybe blocked by mud, dirt, snow, ice,or slush. This message may alsoactivate during heavy rain or due toroad spray. The vehicle does notneed service. For cleaning, seeExterior Care on page 10‑92.

SERVICE SIDE BLIND ZONEALERT SYSTEM: If this messageappears, both SBZA displays willremain on indicating there is aproblem with the SBZA system.If these displays remain on aftercontinued driving, the system needsservice. Take the vehicle to yourdealer.

FCC Information

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑20 for FCC information.

Rear VisionCamera (RVC)This vehicle may have an RVCsystem. Read this entire sectionbefore using it.

The RVC system can assistthe driver when backing up bydisplaying a view of the areabehind the vehicle.

{ WARNING

The Rear Vision Camera (RVC)system does not replace drivervision. RVC does not:

. Detect objects that areoutside the camera's fieldof view, below the bumper,or underneath the vehicle.

. Detect children, pedestrians,bicyclists, or pets.

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

Do not back the vehicle by onlylooking at the RVC screen, or usethe screen during longer, higherspeed backing maneuvers orwhere there could be cross-traffic.Your judged distances using thescreen will differ from actualdistances.

If you do not use proper carebefore backing up, you couldhit a vehicle, child, pedestrian,bicyclist, or pet, resulting invehicle damage, injury, or death.Even though the vehicle hasthe RVC system, always checkcarefully before backing up bychecking behind and around thevehicle.

An image appears on the navigationscreen with the message CheckSurroundings for Safety when thevehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).The navigation screen goes to theprevious screen after approximately10 seconds once the vehicle isshifted out of R (Reverse).

To cancel the delay, do one of thefollowing:. Press a hard key on the

navigation system.. Shift into P (Park).. Reach a vehicle speed of

8 km/h (5 mph).

Turning the Rear Vision CameraSystem On or Off

To turn the RVC system on or off:

1. Shift into P (Park).

2. Press the CONFIG button toenter the configure menuoptions.

3. Select Display.

4. Select Rear Camera Options.

5. Select Camera. When acheckmark appears next to theCamera option, then the RVCsystem is on.



Symbols

The navigation system mayhave a feature that lets the driverview symbols on the navigationscreen while using the RVC.The Ultrasonic Rear Park Assist(URPA) system must not bedisabled to use the caution symbols.The error message Rear ParkingAssist Symbols Unavailable maydisplay if URPA has been disabledand the symbols have been turnedon. See Ultrasonic Parking Assiston page 9‑42.

The symbols appear and maycover an object when viewing thenavigation screen when an objectis detected by the URPA system.

To turn the symbols on or off:


2. Press the CONFIG buttonto enter the configure menuoptions.

3. Select Display.


5. Select Symbols. When acheckmark appears next tothe Symbols option, symbolswill appear.

Guidelines

The RVC system has a guidelineoverlay that can help the driver alignthe vehicle when backing into aparking spot.

To turn the guidelines on or off:


2. Press the CONFIG buttonto enter the configure menuoptions.

3. Select Display.


5. Select Guidelines. When acheckmark appears next to theGuidelines option, guidelines willappear.

Rear Vision Camera ErrorMessages

SERVICE REAR VISION CAMERASYSTEM: This message candisplay when the system is notreceiving information it requiresfrom other vehicle systems.

If any other problem occurs or if aproblem persists, see your dealer.



Rear Vision Camera Location

The camera is located above thelicense plate.

The area displayed by the camera islimited. It does not display objectsthat are close to either corner orunder the bumper and can varydepending on vehicle orientation orroad conditions. The distance of theimage that appears on the screen isdifferent from the actual distance.

The following illustration showsthe field of view that the cameraprovides.

A. View displayed by the camera.

B. Corner of the rear bumper.

When the System Does NotSeem to Work Properly

The RVC system may not workproperly or display a clear image if:. The RVC is turned off.

See “Turning the Rear CameraSystem On or Off” earlier inthis section.

. It is dark.

. The sun or the beam ofheadlamps are shining directlyinto the camera lens.

. Ice, snow, mud, or anything elsebuilds up on the camera lens.Clean the lens, rinse it withwater, and wipe it with a softcloth.

. The back of the vehicle is inan accident. The position andmounting angle of the cameracan change or the camera canbe affected. Be sure to havethe camera and its position andmounting angle checked at yourdealer.



FuelUse of the recommended fuelis an important part of the propermaintenance of this vehicle. To helpkeep the engine clean and maintainoptimum vehicle performance,we recommend the use of gasolineadvertised as TOP TIER DetergentGasoline.

Look for the TOP TIER label onthe fuel pump to ensure gasolinemeets enhanced detergencystandards developed by autocompanies. A list of marketersproviding TOP TIER DetergentGasoline can be found atwww.toptiergas.com.

The eighth digit of the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) showsthe code letter or number thatidentifies the vehicle's engine.The VIN is at the top left of theinstrument panel. See VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) onpage 12‑1.

Recommended FuelIf the vehicle has a 2.4L L4 engine(VIN Code C), use regular unleadedgasoline with a posted octanerating of 87 or higher. If the octanerating is less than 87, an audibleknocking noise, commonly referredto as spark knock, might be heardwhen driving. If this occurs, usea gasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher as soon as possible. If heavyknocking is heard when usinggasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher, the engine needs service.

If the vehicle has the 3.6L V6 engine(VIN Code D), use premiumunleaded gasoline with a postedoctane rating of 91 or higher.



You can also use regular unleadedgasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher, but the vehicle's accelerationcould be slightly reduced, anda slight audible knocking noise,commonly referred to as sparkknock, might be heard. If the octaneis less than 87, a heavy knockingnoise might be heard when driving.If this occurs, use a gasoline ratedat 87 octane or higher as soon aspossible. Otherwise, you coulddamage the engine. If heavyknocking is heard when usinggasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher, the engine needs service.

Gasoline Specifications(U.S. and Canada Only)At a minimum, gasolineshould meet ASTM specificationD 4814 in the United States orCAN/CGSB‐3.5 or 3.511 in Canada.Some gasolines contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). We recommendagainst the use of gasolinescontaining MMT. See Fuel Additiveson page 9‑52 for additionalinformation.

California FuelRequirementsIf the vehicle is certified to meetCalifornia Emissions Standards,it is designed to operate on fuelsthat meet California specifications.See the underhood emission controllabel. If this fuel is not available instates adopting California EmissionsStandards, the vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meetingfederal specifications, but emissioncontrol system performance mightbe affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp could turn on and thevehicle might fail a smog‐check test.See Malfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5‑17. If this occurs, return toyour authorized dealer for diagnosis.If it is determined that the conditionis caused by the type of fuel used,repairs might not be covered by thevehicle warranty.



Fuels in ForeignCountriesNever use leaded gasoline or anyother fuel not recommended in theprevious text on fuel. Costly repairscaused by use of improper fuelwould not be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

To check the fuel availability, askan auto club, or contact a major oilcompany that does business in thecountry where you will be driving.

Fuel AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolinesin the United States are nowrequired to contain additivesthat help prevent engine and fuelsystem deposits from forming,allowing the emission controlsystem to work properly. In mostcases, nothing should have to beadded to the fuel. However, somegasolines contain only the minimumamount of additive required to meet

U.S. Environmental ProtectionAgency regulations. To help keepfuel injectors and intake valvesclean and avoid problems due todirty injectors or valves, look forgasoline that is advertised asTOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.Look for the TOP TIER label onthe fuel pump to ensure gasolinemeets enhanced detergencystandards developed by the autocompanies. A list of marketersproviding TOP TIER DetergentGasoline can be found atwww.toptiergas.com.

For customers who do not useTOP TIER Detergent Gasolineregularly, one bottle of GM FuelSystem Treatment PLUS, addedto the fuel tank at every engine oilchange, can help clean depositsfrom fuel injectors and intakevalves. GM Fuel System TreatmentPLUS is the only gasoline additiverecommended by General Motors.It is available at your dealer.

Gasolines containing oxygenates,such as ethers and ethanol,and reformulated gasolinesmight be available in your area.We recommend that you use thesegasolines, if they comply with thespecifications described earlier.However, E85 (85% ethanol) andother fuels containing more than10% ethanol must not be used invehicles that were not designedfor those fuels.

Notice: This vehicle was notdesigned for fuel that containsmethanol. Do not use fuelcontaining methanol. It cancorrode metal parts in the fuelsystem and also damage plasticand rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under thevehicle warranty.



Some gasolines that arenot reformulated for lowemissions can contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendantwhere you buy gasoline whether thefuel contains MMT. We recommendagainst the use of such gasolines.Fuels containing MMT can reducespark plug life and affect emissioncontrol system performance. Themalfunction indicator lamp mightturn on. If this occurs, return toyour dealer for service.

Filling the Tank

{ WARNING

Fuel vapor burns violently and afuel fire can cause bad injuries.To help avoid injuries to you andothers, read and follow all theinstructions on the fuel pumpisland. Turn off the engine whenrefueling. Do not smoke nearfuel or when refueling the vehicle.Do not use cellular phones. Keepsparks, flames, and smokingmaterials away from fuel. Do notleave the fuel pump unattendedwhen refueling the vehicle. This isagainst the law in some places.Do not re-enter the vehicle whilepumping fuel. Keep children awayfrom the fuel pump; never letchildren pump fuel.

The tethered fuel cap is behindthe fuel door on the vehicle'spassenger side. Turn the fuelcap counterclockwise to remove.



While refueling, hang the tetheredfuel cap from the hook on the fueldoor. Reinstall the cap by turning itclockwise until it clicks

{ WARNING

Fuel can spray out on youif you open the fuel cap tooquickly. If you spill fuel and thensomething ignites it, you couldbe badly burned. This spray canhappen if the tank is nearly full,and is more likely in hot weather.Open the fuel cap slowly and waitfor any hiss noise to stop. Thenunscrew the cap all the way.

Do not top off or overfill the tank andwait a few seconds before removingthe nozzle. Clean fuel from paintedsurfaces as soon as possible.See Exterior Care on page 10‑92.

{ WARNING

If a fire starts while you arerefueling, do not remove thenozzle. Shut off the flow of fuelby shutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant.Leave the area immediately.

Notice: If a new fuel cap isneeded, be sure to get the righttype of cap from your dealer.The wrong type of fuel cap mightnot fit properly, might cause themalfunction indicator lamp tolight, and could damage thefuel tank and emissions system.See Malfunction Indicator Lampon page 5‑17.

Filling a Portable FuelContainer

{ WARNING

Never fill a portable fuel containerwhile it is in the vehicle. Staticelectricity discharge from thecontainer can ignite the fuelvapor. You can be badly burnedand the vehicle damaged if thisoccurs. To help avoid injury toyou and others:

. Dispense fuel only intoapproved containers.

. Do not fill a container whileit is inside a vehicle, in avehicle's trunk, pickup bed,or on any surface other thanthe ground.

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

. Bring the fill nozzle in contactwith the inside of the fillopening before operating thenozzle. Contact should bemaintained until the filling iscomplete.

. Do not smoke whilepumping fuel.

. Do not use a cellular phonewhile pumping fuel.

Towing

General TowingInformationOnly use towing equipment thathas been designed for the vehicle.Contact your dealer or traileringdealer for assistance with preparingthe vehicle for towing a trailer.

See the following trailer towinginformation in this section:. For information on driving

while towing a trailer, see“Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips.”

. For maximum vehicle and trailerweights, see “Trailer Towing.”

. For information on equipmentto tow a trailer, see “TowingEquipment.”

For information on towing a disabledvehicle, see Towing the Vehicle onpage 10‑89. For information ontowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle such as a motor home, seeRecreational Vehicle Towing onpage 10‑89.



Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips

{ WARNING

The driver can lose control whenpulling a trailer if the correctequipment is not used or thevehicle is not driven properly.For example, if the trailer istoo heavy, the brakes maynot work well— or even at all.The driver and passengerscould be seriously injured.The vehicle may also bedamaged; the resulting repairswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Pull a traileronly if all the steps in this sectionhave been followed. Ask yourdealer for advice and informationabout towing a trailer with thevehicle.

The vehicle can tow a trailer whenequipped with the proper trailertowing equipment. For traileringcapacity, see Trailer Towing onpage 9‑60. Trailering changeshandling, acceleration, braking,durability and fuel economy.With the added weight, the engine,transmission, wheel assemblies andtires are forced to work harder andunder greater loads. The trailer alsoadds wind resistance, increasingthe pulling requirements. For safetrailering, correctly use the propertrailering equipment.

The following information hasimportant trailering tips and rulesfor your safety and that of yourpassengers. Read this sectioncarefully before pulling a trailer.

Pulling a Trailer

Here are some important points:. There are many laws, including

speed limit restrictions that applyto trailering. Check for legalrequirements.

. Do not tow a trailer at all duringthe first 1 600 km (1,000 mi)the new vehicle is driven.The engine, axle or otherparts could be damaged.

. During the first 800 km (500 mi)that a trailer is towed, do notdrive over 80 km/h (50 mph)and do not make starts at fullthrottle. This reduces wear onthe vehicle.

. The vehicle can tow in D (Drive).Use a lower gear if thetransmission shifts too often.



. Do not use the Fuel Saver Modewhen towing.

. Obey speed limit restrictions.Do not drive faster than themaximum posted speed fortrailers, or no more than 90 km/h(55 mph), to reduce wear on thevehicle.

Driving with a Trailer

Towing a trailer requires experience.Get familiar with handling andbraking with the added trailerweight. The vehicle is now longerand not as responsive as thevehicle is by itself.

Check all trailer hitch parts andattachments, safety chains,electrical connectors, lamps, tiresand mirror adjustments. If the trailerhas electric brakes, start the vehicleand trailer moving and then applythe trailer brake controller by handto be sure the brakes are working.

During the trip, check regularly to besure that the load is secure, and thelamps and trailer brakes are workingproperly.

Towing with a Stability ControlSystem

When towing, the sound of thestability control system might beheard. The system is reacting tothe vehicle movement caused bythe trailer, which mainly occursduring cornering. This is normalwhen towing heavier trailers.

Following Distance

Stay at least twice as far behind thevehicle ahead as you would whendriving the vehicle without a trailer.This can help to avoid situationsthat require heavy braking andsudden turns.

Passing

More passing distance is neededwhen towing a trailer. Because therig is longer, it is necessary to gofarther beyond the passed vehiclebefore returning to the lane.

Backing Up

Hold the bottom of the steeringwheel with one hand. To move thetrailer to the left, move that handto the left. To move the trailer tothe right, move your hand to theright. Always back up slowly and,if possible, have someoneguide you.



Making Turns

Notice: Making very sharp turnswhile trailering could cause thetrailer to come in contact withthe vehicle. The vehicle couldbe damaged. Avoid making verysharp turns while trailering.

When turning with a trailer, makewider turns than normal so thetrailer will not strike soft shoulders,curbs, road signs, trees or otherobjects. Use the turn signal well inadvance and avoid jerky or suddenmaneuvers.

Turn Signals when Towing aTrailer

The turn signal indicators on theinstrument panel flash wheneversignaling a turn or lane change.Properly hooked up, the trailerlamps also flash, telling otherdrivers the vehicle is turning,changing lanes or stopping.

When towing a trailer, the arrows onthe instrument panel flash for turnseven if the bulbs on the trailer areburned out. Check occasionally tobe sure the trailer bulbs are stillworking.

Driving on Grades

Reduce speed and shift to alower gear before starting downa long or steep downgrade. If thetransmission is not shifted down,the brakes might have to be usedso much that they would get hotand no longer work well.

The vehicle can tow in D (Drive).Use a lower gear if the transmissionshifts too often.

When towing at high altitude onsteep uphill grades, engine coolantboils at a lower temperature thanat normal altitudes. If the engine isturned off immediately after towingat high altitude on steep uphillgrades, the vehicle could showsigns similar to engine overheating.To avoid this, let the engine runwhile parked, preferably on levelground, with the transmission inP (Park) for a few minutes beforeturning the engine off. If theoverheat warning comes on, seeEngine Overheating on page 10‑21.



Parking on Hills

{ WARNING

Parking the vehicle on a hillwith the trailer attached can bedangerous. If something goeswrong, the rig could start to move.People can be injured, and boththe vehicle and the trailer can bedamaged. When possible, alwayspark the rig on a flat surface.

If parking the rig on a hill:

1. Press the brake pedal, but donot shift into P (Park) yet. Turnthe wheels into the curb if facingdownhill or into traffic if facinguphill.

2. Have someone place chocksunder the trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are inplace, release the brake pedaluntil the chocks absorb the load.

4. Reapply the brake pedal. Thenapply the parking brake and shiftinto P (Park).

5. Release the brake pedal.

Leaving After Parking on a Hill

1. Apply and hold the brake pedalwhile you:. Start the engine.. Shift into a gear.. Release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer isclear of the chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick upand store the chocks.

Maintenance when TrailerTowing

The vehicle needs servicemore often when pulling a trailer.See the Maintenance Schedulebooklet for more information.Things that are especially importantin trailer operation are automatictransmission fluid, engine oil, axlelubricant, belts, cooling system andbrake system. Inspect these beforeand during the trip.

Check periodically to see that allhitch nuts and bolts are tight.

Engine Cooling when TrailerTowing

The cooling system may temporarilyoverheat during severe operatingconditions. See Engine Overheatingon page 10‑21.



Trailer TowingBefore pulling a trailer, there arethree important considerations thathave to do with weight:. The weight of the trailer.. The weight of the trailer tongue.. The total weight on your

vehicle's tires.

Weight of the Trailer

How heavy can a trailer safely be?

For a vehicle with a V6 engine,it should never weigh more than454 kg (1,000 lbs). But even thatcan be too heavy.

It depends on how the rig is used.For example, speed, altitude, roadgrades, outside temperature andhow much the vehicle is used topull a trailer are all important. It can

depend on any special equipmenton the vehicle, and the amount oftongue weight the vehicle can carry.See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue”later in this section for moreinformation.

Maximum trailer weight is calculatedassuming only the driver is inthe tow vehicle and it has all therequired trailering equipment.The weight of additional optionalequipment, passengers and cargo inthe tow vehicle must be subtractedfrom the maximum trailer weight.

Ask your dealer for traileringinformation or advice, or write us atour Customer Assistance Offices.See Customer Assistance Offices(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑5or Customer Assistance Offices(Mexico) on page 13‑6 for moreinformation.

Weight of the Trailer Tongue

The tongue load (A) of any traileris an important weight to measurebecause it affects the total grossweight of the vehicle. The GrossVehicle Weight (GVW) includesthe curb weight of the vehicle, anycargo carried in it, and the peoplewho will be riding in the vehicle.If there are a lot of options,equipment, passengers or cargo inthe vehicle, it will reduce the tongueweight the vehicle can carry, whichwill also reduce the trailer weight thevehicle can tow. If towing a trailer,the tongue load must be added tothe GVW because the vehicle willbe carrying that weight, too. SeeVehicle Load Limits on page 9‑12for more information.



The trailer tongue (A) should weigh10‐15 percent of the total loadedtrailer weight (B).

After loading the trailer, weighthe trailer and then the tongue,separately, to see if the weights areproper. If they are not, adjustmentsmight be made by moving someitems around in the trailer.

Total Weight on Your Vehicle'sTires

Be sure the vehicle's tires areinflated to the upper limit for coldtires. These numbers can be foundon the Tire-Loading Informationlabel. See Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑12. Make sure not to goover the GVW limit for the vehicle,including the weight of the trailertongue.

Towing Equipment

Hitches

Use the correct hitch equipment.See your dealer or a hitch dealerfor assistance.. The rear bumper on the vehicle

is not intended for hitches.Do not attach rental hitchesor other bumper-type hitchesto it. Use only a frame-mountedhitch that does not attach to thebumper.

. Will any holes be made in thebody of the vehicle when thetrailer hitch is installed? If thereare, seal the holes when thehitch is removed. If the holesare not sealed, dirt, water, anddeadly carbon monoxide (CO)from the exhaust can get into thevehicle. See Engine Exhaust onpage 9‑27.



Safety Chains

Always attach chains between thevehicle and the trailer. Cross thesafety chains under the tongueof the trailer to help prevent thetongue from contacting the road if itbecomes separated from the hitch.Leave enough slack so the rig canturn. Never allow safety chains todrag on the ground.

Trailer Brakes

Does the trailer have its ownbrakes? Be sure to read and followthe instructions for the trailer brakesso they are installed, adjusted, andmaintained properly.

Because the vehicle has antilockbrakes, do not tap into the vehicle'sbrake system. If this is done, bothbrake systems will not work well,or at all.

Conversions andAdd-Ons

Add-On ElectricalEquipmentNotice: Do not add anythingelectrical to the vehicle unlessyou check with your dealer first.Some electrical equipment candamage the vehicle and thedamage would not be coveredby the vehicle's warranty. Someadd-on electrical equipment cankeep other components fromworking as they should.

Add-on equipment can drain thevehicle's 12‐volt battery, even if thevehicle is not operating.

The vehicle has an airbagsystem. Before attempting to addanything electrical to the vehicle,see Servicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3‑41 and AddingEquipment to the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3‑42.


Vehicle Care 10-1

Vehicle Care

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2California Proposition65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

California PerchlorateMaterials Requirements . . . . 10-3

Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Vehicle ChecksDoing Your OwnService Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5Engine CompartmentOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-13Automatic TransmissionFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-15

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-21Overheated EngineProtectionOperating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22

Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . 10-23Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-27Automatic Transmission ShiftLock Control FunctionCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-29

Wiper BladeReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-30

Bulb ReplacementBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-33Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33High Intensity Discharge(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33

Headlamps, Front TurnSignal and ParkingLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34

Taillamps, Turn Signal,Stoplamps, and Back-UpLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35

License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-36Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-37

Electrical SystemElectrical SystemOverload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38

Fuses and CircuitBreakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39

Engine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39

Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42

Rear Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44


10-2 Vehicle Care

Wheels and TiresTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-48Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50Tire Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54Tire Pressure MonitorSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56

Tire Pressure MonitorOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57

Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64Different Size Tires andWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-68Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-70Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72

Storing the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79

Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-85

Jump StartingJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86

TowingTowing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-89Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89

Appearance CareExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-92Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-97Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-100

General InformationFor service and parts needs,visit your dealer. You will receivegenuine GM parts and GM-trainedand supported service people.

Genuine GM parts have one ofthese marks:


Vehicle Care 10-3

California Proposition65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including thisone, contain and/or emit chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and birth defects orother reproductive harm. Engineexhaust, many parts and systems,many fluids, and some componentwear by-products contain and/oremit these chemicals.

California PerchlorateMaterials RequirementsCertain types of automotiveapplications, such as airbaginitiators, seat belt pretensioners,and lithium batteries contained inRemote Keyless Entry transmitters,may contain perchlorate materials.Special handling may be necessary.For additional information, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Accessories andModificationsAdding non‐dealer accessoriesto the vehicle can affect vehicleperformance and safety, includingsuch things as airbags, braking,stability, ride and handling,emissions systems, aerodynamics,durability, and electronic systemslike antilock brakes, traction control,and stability control. Some ofthese accessories could evencause malfunction or damage notcovered by the vehicle warranty.


10-4 Vehicle Care

Damage to vehicle componentsresulting from the installation or useof non‐GM certified parts, includingcontrol module modifications, isnot covered under the terms of thevehicle warranty and may affectremaining warranty coverage foraffected parts.

GM Accessories are designed tocomplement and function with othersystems on the vehicle. Your GMdealer can accessorize the vehicleusing genuine GM Accessories.When you go to your GM dealerand ask for GM Accessories,you will know that GM-trained andsupported service technicians willperform the work using genuineGM Accessories.

Also, see Adding Equipment tothe Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑42.

Vehicle Checks

Doing Your OwnService Work

{ WARNING

You can be injured and thevehicle could be damaged if youtry to do service work on a vehiclewithout knowing enough about it.

. Be sure you have sufficientknowledge, experience,the proper replacementparts, and tools beforeattempting any vehiclemaintenance task.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Be sure to use the propernuts, bolts, and otherfasteners. Metric andEnglish fasteners canbe easily confused. If thewrong fasteners are used,parts can later break or falloff. You could be hurt.

If doing some of your own servicework, use the proper servicemanual. It tells you much moreabout how to service the vehiclethan this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Informationon page 13‑15.


Vehicle Care 10-5

This vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to do your ownservice work, see Servicing theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑41.

Keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the dateof any service work performed.See Maintenance Records onpage 11‑10.

HoodTo open the hood, do the following:

1. Pull the interior hood releasehandle located to the left ofthe steering column belowthe instrument panel.

2. Push the secondary hoodrelease lever, located underthe center of the hood abovethe grille, to the right todisengage it.

3. Lift the hood.

Before closing the hood, makesure all the filler caps are properlysecured. Pull the hood down andclose it firmly.


10-6 Vehicle Care

Engine Compartment Overview

2.4 L L4 Engine


Vehicle Care 10-7

A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10‑15.

B. Engine Cover.

C. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See EngineOil on page 10‑9.

D. Engine Oil Dipstick. See EngineOil on page 10‑9.

E. Transmission Fluid Cap andDipstick. See AutomaticTransmission Fluid onpage 10‑15.

F. Brake Master CylinderReservoir. See Brakes onpage 10‑24.

G. Power Steering Reservoir andCap. See Power Steering Fluidon page 10‑23.

H. Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap. See EngineCoolant on page 10‑18.

I. Battery Cover. See Battery onpage 10‑27.

J. Engine Compartment FuseBlock on page 10‑39.

K. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See WasherFluid on page 10‑24.


10-8 Vehicle Care

3.6 L V6 Engine


Vehicle Care 10-9

A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10‑15.

B. Power Steering Reservoir andCap. See Power Steering Fluidon page 10‑23.

C. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See EngineOil on page 10‑9.

D. Engine Oil Dipstick. See EngineOil on page 10‑9.

E. Engine Cover.

F. Transmission Fluid Cap andDipstick. See AutomaticTransmission Fluid onpage 10‑15.

G. Brake Master CylinderReservoir. See Brakes onpage 10‑24.

H. Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap. See EngineCoolant on page 10‑18.

I. Battery Cover. See Battery onpage 10‑27.

J. Engine Compartment FuseBlock on page 10‑39.

K. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑24.

Engine OilTo ensure proper engineperformance and long life,careful attention must be paidto engine oil. Following thesesimple, but important steps willhelp protect your investment:. Always use engine oil approved

to the proper specification andof the proper viscosity grade.See “Selecting the Right EngineOil” in this section.

. Check the engine oil levelregularly and maintain theproper oil level. See “CheckingEngine Oil” and “When to AddEngine Oil” in this section.

. Change the engine oil at theappropriate time. See EngineOil Life System on page 10‑13.

. Always dispose of engine oilproperly. See “What to Do withUsed Oil” in this section.


10-10 Vehicle Care

Checking Engine Oil

It is a good idea to check theengine oil level at each fuel fill.In order to get an accuratereading, the vehicle must beon level ground. The engine oildipstick handle is a yellow loop.See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for the location ofthe engine oil dipstick.

Obtaining an accurate oil levelreading is essential:

1. If the engine has been runningrecently, turn off the engine andallow several minutes for the oilto drain back into the oil pan.Checking the oil level too soonafter engine shutoff will notprovide an accurate oil levelreading.

2. Pull out the dipstick and cleanit with a paper towel or cloth,then push it back in all the way.Remove it again, keeping the tipdown, and check the level.

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the cross-hatchedarea at the tip of the dipstick, add1 L (1 qt) of the recommendedoil and then recheck the level.See “Selecting the RightEngine Oil” in this section for anexplanation of what kind of oil touse. For engine oil crankcasecapacity, see Capacities andSpecifications on page 12‑2.

Notice: Do not add too muchoil. Oil levels above or belowthe acceptable operating rangeshown on the dipstick are harmfulto the engine. If you find thatyou have an oil level above theoperating range, i.e., the enginehas so much oil that the oil levelgets above the cross-hatchedarea that shows the properoperating range, the enginecould be damaged. You shoulddrain out the excess oil or limitdriving of the vehicle and seek aservice professional to removethe excess amount of oil.

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for the location of theengine oil fill cap.

Add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operatingrange. Push the dipstick all the wayback in when through.


Vehicle Care 10-11

Selecting the Right Engine Oil

Selecting the right engine oildepends on both the proper oilspecification and viscosity grade:

Specification

Use and ask for engine oilswith the dexos™ certification mark.Oils meeting the requirements ofthe vehicle should have the dexoscertification mark on the container.This certification mark indicates thatthe oil has been approved to thedexos specification.

This vehicle was filled at the factorywith dexos‐approved engine oil.

Notice: Use only engine oilthat is approved to the dexosspecification or an equivalentengine oil of the appropriateviscosity grade. Engine oilsapproved to the dexosspecification will show thedexos symbol on the container.

Failure to use the recommendedengine oil or equivalent canresult in engine damage notcovered by the vehicle warranty.If you are unsure whether theoil is approved to the dexosspecification, ask your serviceprovider.

Use of Substitute Engine Oils ifdexos is unavailable: In the eventthat dexos‐approved engine oil isnot available at an oil change orfor maintaining proper oil level,you may use substitute engine oildisplaying the API Starburst symboland of SAE 5W-30 viscosity grade.


10-12 Vehicle Care

Use of oils that do not meet thedexos specification, however, mayresult in reduced performance undercertain circumstances.

Viscosity Grade

SAE 5W-30 is the best viscositygrade for the vehicle. Do notuse other viscosity oils such asSAE 10W‐30, 10W‐40, or 20W-50.

Cold Temperature Operation:In an area of extreme cold,where the temperature fallsbelow −29°C (−20°F), anSAE 0W-30 oil should be used.An oil of this viscosity gradewill provide easier cold startingfor the engine at extremely lowtemperatures. When selecting an oilof the appropriate viscosity grade,be sure to always select an oil thatmeets the required specification,dexos. See “Specification” earlier inthis section for more information.


Vehicle Care 10-13

Engine Oil Additives/EngineOil Flushes

Do not add anything to the oil.The recommended oils with thedexos specification and displayingthe dexos certification mark are allthat is needed for good performanceand engine protection.

Engine oil system flushes are notrecommended and could causeengine damage not covered bythe vehicle warranty.

What to Do with Used Oil

Used engine oil contains certainelements that can be unhealthy foryour skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean yourskin and nails with soap and water,or a good hand cleaner. Wash orproperly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See themanufacturer's warnings about theuse and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to theenvironment. If you change yourown oil, be sure to drain all theoil from the filter before disposal.Never dispose of oil by puttingit in the trash or pouring it on theground, into sewers, or into streamsor bodies of water. Recycle it bytaking it to a place that collectsused oil.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine Oil

This vehicle has a computer systemthat indicates when to change theengine oil and filter. This is basedon engine revolutions and enginetemperature, and not on mileage.Based on driving conditions, themileage at which an oil change isindicated can vary considerably.For the oil life system to workproperly, the system must be resetevery time the oil is changed.

When the system has calculatedthat oil life has been diminished,it indicates that an oil change isnecessary. A CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message comes on.


10-14 Vehicle Care

See Engine Oil Messages onpage 5‑35. Change the oil assoon as possible within the next1 000 km (600miles). It is possiblethat, if driving under the bestconditions, the oil life systemmight indicate that an oil changeis not necessary for up to a year.The engine oil and filter must bechanged at least once a year and,at this time, the system must bereset. Your dealer has trainedservice people who will performthis work and reset the system.It is also important to check theoil regularly over the course ofan oil drain interval and keepit at the proper level.

If the system is ever resetaccidentally, the oil must bechanged at 5 000 km (3,000 miles)since the last oil change.Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine OilLife System

Reset the system whenever theengine oil is changed so that thesystem can calculate the nextengine oil change. To reset thesystem:


2. Press the DIC menu button onthe turn signal lever to enterthe Vehicle Information Menu.Use the thumbwheel to scrollthrough the menu items until youreach REMAINING OIL LIFE.

3. Press the SET/CLR button toreset the oil life at 100%.


The system is reset when theCHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage is off and the REMAININGOIL LIFE 100% message isdisplayed.

If the CHANGE ENGINE OILmessage comes back on whenthe vehicle is started, the engineoil life system has not been reset.Repeat the procedure.


Vehicle Care 10-15

Automatic TransmissionFluid

How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid

It is not necessary to checkthe transmission fluid level.A transmission fluid leak is theonly reason for fluid loss. If a leakoccurs, take the vehicle to yourdealer service department andhave it repaired as soon aspossible.

There is a special procedurefor checking and changing thetransmission fluid. Becausethis procedure is difficult, youshould have this done at yourdealer service department.

Contact your dealer for additionalinformation or the procedure canbe found in the service manual.To purchase a service manual,see Service Publications OrderingInformation on page 13‑15.

Change the fluid and filter atthe intervals listed in ScheduledMaintenance on page 11‑2, andbe sure to use the fluid listedin Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑7.

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterThe engine air cleaner/filter islocated in the engine compartmenton the driver side of the vehicle.See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for more informationon location.

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

Inspect the air cleaner/filter atthe scheduled maintenanceintervals and replace it at the firstoil change after each 80 000 km(50,000 mi) interval. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 11‑2 for moreinformation. If you are driving industy/dirty conditions, inspect thefilter at each engine oil change.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

To inspect the air cleaner/filter,remove the filter from the vehicleand lightly shake the filter to releaseloose dust and dirt. If the filterremains covered with dirt, a newfilter is required.


10-16 Vehicle Care

To inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter do the following:

2.4 L L4 Engine

1. Remove the screws on top ofthe engine air cleaner/filterhousing.

2. Lift the filter cover housing awayfrom the engine.

3. Pull out the filter.

4. Inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter.

5. Lower the filter cover housingtoward the engine.

6. Install the screws on the top ofthe housing to lock the cover inplace.

3.6 L V6 Engine

1. Remove the screws on top ofthe engine air cleaner/filterhousing.

2. Lift the filter cover housing awayfrom the engine.

3. Pull out the filter.

4. Inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter.

5. Lower the filter cover housingtoward the engine.

6. Install the screws on the top ofthe housing to lock the cover inplace.

{ WARNING

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause youor others to be burned. The aircleaner not only cleans the air;it helps to stop flames if theengine backfires. Use cautionwhen working on the engineand do not drive with the aircleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter isoff, dirt can easily get into theengine, which could damage it.Always have the air cleaner/filterin place when you are driving.


Vehicle Care 10-17

Cooling SystemThe cooling system allows theengine to maintain the correctworking temperature.

When it is safe to lift the hood:

2.4 L L4 Engine

A. Engine Cooling Fan(Out of View)

B. Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap

3.6 L V6 Engine

A. Engine Cooling Fans(Out of View)

B. Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap

{ WARNING

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can cause injury. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

{ WARNING

Heater and radiator hoses, andother engine parts, can be veryhot. Do not touch them. If you do,you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if thereis a leak. If you run the engine, itcould lose all coolant. That couldcause an engine fire, and youcould be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

Notice: Using coolant other thanDEX-COOL® can cause prematureengine, heater core, or radiatorcorrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant could require changingsooner, at 50 000 km (30,000mi)or 24months, whichever occursfirst. Any repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Always use DEX-COOL(silicate-free) coolant in thevehicle.


10-18 Vehicle Care

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in the vehicleis filled with DEX-COOL® enginecoolant. This coolant is designed toremain in the vehicle for 5 years or240 000 km (150,000 mi), whicheveroccurs first.

The following explains the coolingsystem and how to check and addcoolant when it is low. If there is aproblem with engine overheating,see Engine Overheating onpage 10‑21.

What to Use

{ WARNING

Adding only plain water or someother liquid to the cooling systemcan be dangerous. Plain waterand other liquids, can boil beforethe proper coolant mixture will.The coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture.With plain water or the wrongmixture, the engine could gettoo hot but you would notget the overheat warning.The engine could catch fire andyou or others could be burned.Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOLcoolant.

Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOLcoolant. If using this mixture,nothing else needs to be added.This mixture:. Gives freezing protection down

to −37°C (−34°F), outsidetemperature.

. Gives boiling protection upto 129°C (265°F), enginetemperature.

. Protects against rust andcorrosion.

. Will not damage aluminum parts.

. Helps keep the proper enginetemperature.


Vehicle Care 10-19

Notice: If an improper coolantmixture is used, the engine couldoverheat and be badly damaged.The repair cost would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Too much water in the mixturecan freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core, and otherparts.

Never dispose of engine coolantby putting it in the trash, pouringit on the ground, or into sewers,streams, or bodies of water.Have the coolant changed by anauthorized service center, familiarwith legal requirements regardingused coolant disposal. This willhelp protect the environmentand your health.

Checking Coolant

The vehicle must be on a levelsurface when checking the coolantlevel.

Check to see if coolant is visiblein the coolant surge tank. If thecoolant inside the coolant surgetank is boiling, do not do anythingelse until it cools down. If coolant isvisible but the coolant level is not ator above the mark pointed to, adda 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant at thecoolant surge tank, but be sure thecooling system is cool before thisis done.

If no coolant is visible in the coolantsurge tank, add coolant as follows:

How to Add Coolant to theCoolant Surge Tank

{ WARNING

You can be burned if you spillcoolant on hot engine parts.Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine partsare hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

Notice: This vehicle has aspecific coolant fill procedure.Failure to follow this procedurecould cause the engine tooverheat and be severelydamaged.


10-20 Vehicle Care

{ WARNING

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start upeven when the engine is notrunning and can cause injury.Keep hands, clothing, and toolsaway from any underhoodelectric fan.

{ WARNING

Steam and scalding liquidsfrom a hot cooling system canblow out and burn you badly.They are under pressure, and ifyou turn the surge tank pressurecap— even a little— they cancome out at high speed. Neverturn the cap when the coolingsystem, including the surge tankpressure cap, is hot. Wait for thecooling system and surge tankpressure cap to cool if you everhave to turn the pressure cap.

The coolant surge tank pressurecap can be removed when thecooling system, including thesurge tank pressure cap andupper radiator hose, is nolonger hot.

1. Turn the pressure cap slowlycounterclockwise. If a hiss isheard, wait for that to stop.A hiss means there is stillsome pressure left.

2. Then keep turning the cap andremove it.

3. Fill the coolant surge tank withthe proper mixture to the markpointed to on the front of thecoolant surge tank.


Vehicle Care 10-21

4. With the coolant surge tank capoff, start the engine and let itrun until the upper radiator hosestarts getting hot. Watch outfor the engine cooling fan(s).By this time, the coolant levelinside the coolant surge tankmay be lower. If the level islower, add more of the propermixture to the coolant surgetank until the level reaches themark pointed to on the front ofthe coolant surge tank.

5. Replace the cap. Be sure thecap is hand–tight and fullyseated.

Notice: If the pressure cap isnot tightly installed, coolant lossand possible engine damage mayoccur. Be sure the cap is properlyand tightly secured.

If coolant is needed, add the properDEX-COOL coolant mixture at thecoolant surge tank.

Engine OverheatingThe vehicle has several indicatorsto warn of engine overheating.

There is a coolant temperaturegauge and a warning light onthe instrument panel cluster thatindicate an overheated enginecondition. See Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge on page 5‑13for more information.

You may decide not to lift the hoodwhen this warning appears, butinstead get service help right away.See Roadside Assistance Program(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑8or Roadside Assistance Program(Mexico) on page 13‑10.

If you do decide to lift the hood,make sure the vehicle is parkedon a level surface.

Then check to see if the enginecooling fans are running. If theengine is overheating, the fan(s)should be running. If not, do notcontinue to run the engine andhave the vehicle serviced.

Notice: Engine damage fromrunning the engine withoutcoolant is not covered by thewarranty.

If Steam is Coming from theEngine Compartment

See Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode on page 10‑22 forinformation on driving to a safeplace in an emergency.


10-22 Vehicle Care

If No Steam is Coming fromthe Engine Compartment

If an engine overheat warning isdisplayed but no steam can be seenor heard, the problem might not betoo serious. Sometimes the enginecan get a little too hot when thevehicle:. Climbs a long hill on a hot day. Stops after high-speed driving. Idles for long periods in traffic. Tows a trailer

If the overheat warning displays withno sign of steam:

1. Turn the air conditioning off.

2. Turn the heater on to the highesttemperature and to the highestfan speed. Open the windowsas necessary.

3. In heavy traffic, let the engineidle in N (Neutral) while stopped.If it is safe to do so, pull offthe road, shift to P (Park)or N (Neutral) and let theengine idle.

If the temperature overheat gaugeis no longer in the overheat zoneor an overheat warning no longerdisplays, the vehicle can be driven.Continue to drive the vehicle slowlyfor about 10 minutes. Keep a safevehicle distance from the vehicle infront. If the warning does not comeback on, continue to drive normally.

If the warning continues, pullover, stop, and park the vehicleright away.

If there is no sign of steam,idle the engine for three minuteswhile parked. If the warning is stilldisplayed, turn off the engine until itcools down. Also, see OverheatedEngine Protection Operating Modeon page 10‑22.

Overheated EngineProtectionOperating ModeThis emergency operating modeallows the vehicle to be drivento a safe place in an emergencysituation. If an overheated enginecondition exists, an overheatprotection mode which alternatesfiring groups of cylinders helpsprevent engine damage. In thismode, there is significant loss inpower and engine performance.The engine coolant temperaturewarning light comes on theinstrument panel, to indicate thevehicle has entered overheatedengine protection operating mode.The temperature gauge alsoindicates an overheat conditionexists. Driving extended km (mi)and/or towing a trailer in theoverheat protection mode shouldbe avoided.


Vehicle Care 10-23

Power Steering Fluid

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for information on thelocation of the power steering fluidreservoir.

When to Check Power SteeringFluid

It is not necessary to regularlycheck power steering fluid unless aleak is suspected in the system oran unusual noise is heard. A fluidloss in this system could indicate aproblem. Have the system inspectedand repaired.

How to Check Power SteeringFluid

Check the level after the vehicle hasbeen driven for at least 20 minutesso the fluid is warm.

To check the power steering fluid:

1. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFFand let the engine compartmentcool down.

2. Wipe the cap and the top of thereservoir clean.

3. Unscrew the cap and pull itstraight up.

4. Wipe the dipstick with aclean rag.

5. Replace the cap and completelytighten it.

6. Remove the cap again and lookat the fluid level on the dipstick.

When the engine is hot, the levelshould be at the hot MAX level.When the engine is cold, the fluidlevel should be between MIN andMAX on the dipstick.

What to Use

To determine what kind of fluid touse, see Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑7. Alwaysuse the proper fluid.


10-24 Vehicle Care

Washer Fluid

What to Use

When windshield washer fluidis needed, be sure to read themanufacturer instructions beforeuse. If operating the vehicle in anarea where the temperature canfall below freezing, use a fluid thathas sufficient protection againstfreezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

Open the cap with the washersymbol on it. Add washer fluiduntil the tank is full. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for reservoir location.

Notice:. When using concentratedwasher fluid, follow themanufacturer's instructionsfor adding water.

. Do not mix water withready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solutionto freeze and damage thewasher fluid tank and otherparts of the washer system.Also, water does not cleanas well as washer fluid.

. Fill the washer fluid tankonly three-quarters full whenit is very cold. This allowsfor fluid expansion iffreezing occurs, whichcould damage the tank ifit is completely full.

. Do not use engine coolant(antifreeze) in the windshieldwasher. It can damage thewindshield washer systemand paint.

BrakesThis vehicle has disc brakes.Disc brake pads have built-in wearindicators that make a high-pitchedwarning sound when the brake padsare worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or beheard all the time the vehicle ismoving, except when applying thebrake pedal firmly.

{ WARNING

The brake wear warning soundmeans that soon the brakes willnot work well. That could lead toa crash. When the brake wearwarning sound is heard, have thevehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive withworn-out brake pads could resultin costly brake repair.


Vehicle Care 10-25

Some driving conditions or climatescan cause a brake squeal whenthe brakes are first applied orlightly applied. This does not meansomething is wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts arenecessary to help prevent brakepulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wearand evenly tighten wheel nutsin the proper sequence to torquespecifications in Capacities andSpecifications on page 12‑2.

Brake linings should always bereplaced as complete axle sets.

Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer if the brakepedal does not return to normalheight, or if there is a rapid increasein pedal travel. This could be asign that brake service might berequired.

Brake Adjustment

Every time the brakes are applied,with or without the vehicle moving,the brakes adjust for wear.

Replacing Brake System Parts

The braking system on a vehicle iscomplex. Its many parts have to beof top quality and work well togetherif the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. The vehicle was designedand tested with top-quality brakeparts. When parts of the brakingsystem are replaced, be sure to getnew, approved replacement parts.If this is not done, the brakes mightnot work properly. For example,installing disc brake pads that arewrong for the vehicle, can changethe balance between the frontand rear brakes — for the worse.The braking performance expectedcan change in many other ways ifthe wrong replacement brake partsare installed.

Brake Fluid

The brake master cylinder reservoiris filled with DOT 3 brake fluidas indicated on the reservoir cap.See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for the location of thereservoir.

There are only two reasons whythe brake fluid level in the reservoirmight go down:. The brake fluid level goes down

because of normal brake liningwear. When new linings areinstalled, the fluid level goesback up.

. A fluid leak in the brakehydraulic system can also causea low fluid level. Have the brakehydraulic system fixed, since aleak means that sooner or laterthe brakes will not work well.


10-26 Vehicle Care

Do not top off the brake fluid.Adding fluid does not correct aleak. If fluid is added when thelinings are worn, there will be toomuch fluid when new brake liningsare installed. Add or remove brakefluid, as necessary, only when workis done on the brake hydraulicsystem.

{ WARNING

If too much brake fluid is added,it can spill on the engineand burn, if the engine is hotenough. You or others could beburned, and the vehicle could bedamaged. Add brake fluid onlywhen work is done on the brakehydraulic system.

When the brake fluid falls to a lowlevel, the brake warning light comeson. See Brake System WarningLight on page 5‑19.

What to Add

Use only new DOT 3 brakefluid from a sealed container.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑7.

Always clean the brake fluidreservoir cap and the areaaround the cap before removing it.This helps keep dirt from enteringthe reservoir.

{ WARNING

With the wrong kind of fluid inthe brake hydraulic system,the brakes might not work well.This could cause a crash. Alwaysuse the proper brake fluid.

Notice:. Using the wrong fluidcan badly damage brakehydraulic system parts.For example, just a fewdrops of mineral-based oil,such as engine oil, in thebrake hydraulic system candamage brake hydraulicsystem parts so badly thatthey will have to be replaced.Do not let someone put inthe wrong kind of fluid.

. If brake fluid is spilledon the vehicle's paintedsurfaces, the paint finishcan be damaged. Be carefulnot to spill brake fluid on thevehicle. If you do, wash it offimmediately.


Vehicle Care 10-27

BatteryRefer to the replacement numberon the original battery label when anew battery is needed.

{ DANGER

Battery posts, terminals, andrelated accessories contain leadand lead compounds, chemicalsknown to the State of Californiato cause cancer and reproductiveharm. Wash hands after handling.

If the battery has a very low chargeor is dead, it might not be possibleto remove the ignition key fromthe ignition switch or shift out ofP (Park). See Shifting Out of Parkon page 9‑26.

Vehicle Storage

{ WARNING

Batteries have acid that can burnyou and gas that can explode.You can be badly hurt if you arenot careful. See Jump Starting onpage 10‑86 for tips on workingaround a battery withoutgetting hurt.

Infrequent Usage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery to keep the battery fromrunning down.

Extended Storage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery or use a battery tricklecharger.

Starter Switch Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parkingbrake and the regular brake.See Parking Brake onpage 9‑33.

Do not use the acceleratorpedal, and be ready to turnoff the engine immediatelyif it starts.


10-28 Vehicle Care

3. Try to start the engine in eachgear. The vehicle should startonly in P (Park) or N (Neutral).If the vehicle starts in any otherposition, contact your dealer forservice.

Automatic TransmissionShift Lock ControlFunction Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check,be sure there is enough roomaround the vehicle. It shouldbe parked on a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parkingbrake. See Parking Brake onpage 9‑33.

Be ready to apply the regularbrake immediately if the vehiclebegins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn theignition on, but do not start theengine. Without applying theregular brake, try to move theshift lever out of P (Park) withnormal effort. If the shift levermoves out of P (Park), contactyour dealer for service.

Ignition TransmissionLock CheckWhile parked, and with the parkingbrake set, try to turn the ignitionto LOCK/OFF in each shift leverposition.. The ignition should turn to

LOCK/OFF only when theshift lever is in P (Park).

. With the key access ignitionsystem, the ignition key shouldcome out only in LOCK/OFF.See Ignition Positions (KeyAccess) on page 9‑17 or IgnitionPositions (Keyless Access) onpage 9‑19.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.


Vehicle Care 10-29

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing this check,the vehicle could begin to move.You or others could be injuredand property could be damaged.Make sure there is room in frontof the vehicle in case it begins toroll. Be ready to apply the regularbrake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with thevehicle facing downhill. Keepingyour foot on the regular brake, setthe parking brake.. To check the parking brake's

holding ability: With the enginerunning and the transmission inN (Neutral), slowly remove footpressure from the regular brakepedal. Do this until the vehicle isheld by the parking brake only.

. To check the P (Park)mechanism's holding ability:With the engine running, shiftto P (Park). Then release theparking brake followed by theregular brake.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Wiper Blade ReplacementWindshield wiper blades should beinspected for wear and cracking.See Scheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑2 for more information.

Replacement blades come indifferent types and are removedin different ways. For proper typeand length, see MaintenanceReplacement Parts on page 11‑9.

To replace the windshield wiperblade:

1. Pull the windshield wiperassembly away from thewindshield.


10-30 Vehicle Care

2. Lift up on theplastic latch in themiddle of the wiper blade wherethe wiper arm attaches.

3. With the latch open, pull thewiper blade down toward thewindshield far enough to releaseit from the J-hooked end of thewiper arm.

4. Remove the wiper blade.

Allowing the wiper blade armto touch the windshield whenno wiper blade is installedcould damage the windshield.Any damage that occurs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not allow the wiperblade to touch the windshield.

5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 forwiper blade replacement.

Headlamp AimingThe headlamp aiming system hasbeen preset at the factory.

If the vehicle is damaged in anaccident, the aim of the headlampsmay be affected and adjustmentmay be necessary.

It is recommended that a dealeradjust the headlamps. To re-aimthe headlamps yourself, use thefollowing procedure.

The vehicle should be properlyprepared as follows:. The vehicle should be placed so

the headlamps are 7.6 m (25 ft)from a light‐colored wall.

. The vehicle must have all fourtires on a level surface which islevel all the way to the wall.


Vehicle Care 10-31

. The vehicle should be placed soit is perpendicular to the wall orother flat surface.

. The vehicle should not have anysnow, ice, or mud on it.

. The vehicle should be fullyassembled and all other workstopped while headlamp aimingis being performed.

. The vehicle should be normallyloaded with a full tank of fuel andone person or 75 kg (160 lbs)sitting in the driver seat.

. Tires should be properly inflated.

Headlamp aiming is done with thevehicle's low-beam headlamps.The high-beam headlamps will becorrectly aimed if the low-beamheadlamps are aimed properly.

To adjust the vertical aim:

1. Open the hood. See Hood onpage 10‑5.

Base

Uplevel

2. Locate the aim dot on the lens ofthe low‐beam headlamp.

3. Measure the distance from theground to the aim dot on thelow‐beam headlamp. Recordthe distance.


10-32 Vehicle Care

4. At the wall, measure fromthe ground upward (A) tothe recorded distance fromStep 3 and mark it.

5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B)on the wall the width of thevehicle at the height of themark in Step 4.

Notice: Do not cover a headlampto improve beam cut-off whenaiming. Covering a headlamp maycause excessive heat build-upwhich may cause damage to theheadlamp.

6. Turn on the low-beamheadlamps and place apiece of cardboard or equivalentin front of the headlamp notbeing adjusted. This allowsonly the beam of light fromthe headlamp being adjustedto be seen on the flat surface.

Base

Uplevel

7. Locate the vertical headlampaiming screw, which are underthe hood near each headlampassembly.

8. Turn the vertical aimingscrew until the headlampbeam is aimed to the horizontaltape line. Turn it clockwise orcounterclockwise to raise orlower the angle of the beam.


Vehicle Care 10-33

9. Make sure that the lightfrom the headlamp is positionedat the bottom edge of thehorizontal tape line. The lampon the left (A) shows the correctheadlamp aim. The lamp onthe right (B) shows the incorrectheadlamp aim.

10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 forthe opposite headlamp.

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacementbulbs, see Replacement Bulbs onpage 10‑37.

For any bulb changing procedurenot listed in this section, contactyour dealer.

Halogen Bulbs

{ WARNING

Halogen bulbs have pressurizedgas inside and can burst if youdrop or scratch the bulb. You orothers could be injured. Be sureto read and follow the instructionson the bulb package.

High Intensity Discharge(HID) Lighting

{ WARNING

The low beam high intensitydischarge lighting systemoperates at a very high voltage.If you try to service any of thesystem components, you couldbe seriously injured. Have yourdealer or a qualified technicianservice them.

After an HID headlamp bulb hasbeen replaced, the beam might bea slightly different shade than it wasoriginally. This is normal.


10-34 Vehicle Care

Headlamps, Front TurnSignal and ParkingLamps

Base Headlamp Assembly

The base model vehicle has ahalogen high-beam headlamp,a low-beam/Daytime RunningLamp (DRL) headlamp, and aturn signal/parking lamp on theheadlamp assembly.

To replace one of these bulbs:


A. Low-Beam Headlamp/DRL

B. High-Beam Headlamp

C. Parking/Turn Signal Lamp

2. If replacing a headlamp bulb,remove the dust cover from theback of the headlamp housingby turning counterclockwiseone‐quarter turn.

3. Remove the bulb socketfrom the headlamp byturning counterclockwiseone‐quarter turn.

4. Remove the bulb from thesocket. If replacing thehigh/low‐beam bulb, pry thetwo clips on either end of thebulb and pull straight out.

5. Install the new bulb in thesocket.


Vehicle Care 10-35

6. Install the bulb socket by turningclockwise one‐quarter turn.

7. If a headlamp bulb wasreplaced, install the dust coverin the back of the headlamphousing by turning clockwiseone‐quarter turn.

Uplevel Headlamp Assembly

The uplevel model vehicle hasa high intensity discharge (HID)high/low beam, a dedicated DRLand a parking/turn signal lamp onthe headlamp assembly. See HighIntensity Discharge (HID) Lightingon page 10‑33 for more information.



A. DRL Lamp

B. Parking/Turn Signal Lamp

2. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise to remove itfrom the headlamp assembly.

3. Pull the bulb straight out fromthe socket.

4. Push the new bulb into thesocket and reinstall the socketinto the headlamp assembly byturning it clockwise.

Taillamps, Turn Signal,Stoplamps, and Back-UpLamps

A. Turn Signal Lamp

B. Back–Up Lamp

To replace one of these lamps:

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk onpage 2‑12.

2. Remove fasteners and pull backthe trunk trim.


10-36 Vehicle Care

3. Remove the four plastic wingnuts retaining the taillampassembly in place.

4. Pull out the taillamp assemblyand disconnect the wiringharness.

A. Back-Up Lamp

B. Turn Signal Lamp

5. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise to remove it.

6. Pull the old bulb straight out ofthe bulb socket.

7. Push the new bulb straight intothe bulb socket until it clicks.

8. Turn the bulb socket clockwiseto reinstall.

9. Reconnect the wiring harness.

10. Push the taillamp assemblyback into place on the vehicle.

11. Turn the four wing nutsclockwise to reinstall them.

12. Place the trunk trim to itsoriginal location.

License Plate LampThe license plate lamps for thisvehicle are on the trunk lid.


1. Open the trunk. See Trunk onpage 2‑12 for more information.

2. Push the end on either of thelamp assemblies (passengerside shown) and then move thelamp assembly down to removeit from the trunk lid.


Vehicle Care 10-37

A. Bulb Socket

B. Bulb

C. Lamp Assembly

3. Turn the bulb socket (A)counterclockwise to remove itfrom the lamp assembly (C).

4. Pull the bulb (B) straight out ofthe bulb socket.

5. Push the replacement bulbstraight into the bulb socket andturn the bulb socket clockwise toinstall it into the lamp assembly.

6. Move the lamp assembly intothe trunk lid engaging the clipside first.

7. Push on the lamp side oppositethe clip until the lamp assemblysnaps into place.

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior LampBulb

Number

Back-Up Lamp W16WLL

Daytime RunningLamp (Uplevel)

3157K LCP

Front Turn Signal/Parking Lamp

3757NAKLCP

Headlamp HighBeam (Base)

H9

Headlamp LowBeam (Base)

H11LL

License Plate Lamp W5WLL

Rear Turn Signal3757AKLCP

For replacement bulbs not listedhere, contact your dealer.


10-38 Vehicle Care

Electrical System

Electrical SystemOverloadThe vehicle has fuses and circuitbreakers to protect against anelectrical system overload.

When the current electrical load istoo heavy, the circuit breaker opensand closes, protecting the circuituntil the current load returns tonormal or the problem is fixed.This greatly reduces the chanceof circuit overload and fire causedby electrical problems.

Fuses and circuit breakers protectthe following in the vehicle:. Headlamp Wiring. Windshield Wiper Motor. Power Windows and Other

Power Accessories

Replace a bad fuse with a new oneof the identical size and rating.

If there is a problem on the roadand a fuse needs to be replaced,the same amperage fuse can beborrowed. Choose some feature ofthe vehicle that is not needed to useand replace it as soon as possible.

Headlamp Wiring

An electrical overload may causethe lamps to go on and off, or insome cases to remain off. Havethe headlamp wiring checked rightaway if the lamps go on and off orremain off.

Windshield Wipers

If the wiper motor overheats due toheavy snow or ice, the windshieldwipers will stop until the motor coolsand will then restart.


Vehicle Care 10-39

Although the circuit is protectedfrom electrical overload, overloaddue to heavy snow or ice maycause wiper linkage damage.Always clear ice and heavy snowfrom the windshield before usingthe windshield wipers.

If the overload is caused by anelectrical problem and not snowor ice, be sure to get it fixed.

Fuses and CircuitBreakersThe wiring circuits in the vehicle areprotected from short circuits by acombination of fuses and circuitbreakers. This greatly reducesthe chance of damage causedby electrical problems.

To check a fuse, look at thesilver-colored band inside the fuse.If the band is broken or melted,replace the fuse. Be sure to replacea bad fuse with a new one of theidentical size and rating.

Fuses of the same amperagecan be temporarily borrowed fromanother fuse location, if a fuse goesout. Replace the fuse as soon aspossible.

To identify and check fuses,circuit breakers, and relays,see Engine Compartment FuseBlock on page 10‑39, InstrumentPanel Fuse Block on page 10‑42,and Rear Compartment Fuse Blockon page 10‑44.

Engine CompartmentFuse Block

To remove the fuse block cover,squeeze the three retaining clipson the cover and lift it straight up.

Notice: Spilling liquid on anyelectrical component on thevehicle may damage it. Alwayskeep the covers on any electricalcomponent.


10-40 Vehicle Care

Engine Compartment Fuse Block

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.

J-CaseFuses

Usage

6 Wiper

12 Starter

J-CaseFuses

Usage

21Rear PowerWindows

22 Sunroof

24Front PowerWindows

J-CaseFuses

Usage

26Antilock BrakeSystem Pump

27 Electric Park Brake

28Rear WindowDefogger

41BrakeVacuum Pump

42 Cooling Fan K2

45 Cooling Fan K1

Mini Fuses Usage

1 TransmissionControl Module

2Engine ControlModule Battery

5Engine ControlModule Ignition

8 Ignition Coils ‐ Even

9 Ignition Coils ‐ Odd


Vehicle Care 10-41

Mini Fuses Usage

10 Engine ControlModule

11Post CatalyticConverter OxygenSensor Heater

13Trans Ignition/FuelSystem ControlModule

16 MAF

17 Airbag Module

18 SBZ Ignition

23 Variable EffortSteering

29 Power Lumbar, Left

32Body ControlModule

33 Heated Seat

34Antilock BrakeSystem Valves

35 Amplifier

Mini Fuses Usage

36 AFL Ignition

37 Right High Beam

38 Left High Beam

46 Cooling Fan Relay

47Pre CatalyticConverter OxygenSensor Heater

48 Fog Lamps

49Right High IntensityDischargeHeadlamp

50Left High IntensityDischargeHeadlamp

51 Horn

52 Cluster Ignition

53

Inside RearviewMirror, RearVision Camera,Vacuum Pump

Mini Fuses Usage

54 Heating, Ventilationand Air Conditioning

55

Outside RearviewMirror, UniversalGarage DoorOpener, WindowSwitch

56 Windshield Washer

60 Heated Mirror

62 Canister Vent

64 AFL Battery

65 Theft‐Deterrent Horn

67Fuel System ControlModule

69Regulated VoltageControl Sensor

70Ultrasonic ParkingAssist/SideBlind Zone


10-42 Vehicle Care

Mini Relays Usage

7 Engine ControlModule

9 Cooling Fan

13 Cooling Fan

15 Run/Crank

17Rear WindowDefogger

MicroRelays

Usage

2 Starter

4 Wiper Speed

5 Wiper Control

10 Cooling Fan

14HeadlampLow Beam

Instrument Panel FuseBlock

The instrument panel fuse blockis located in the instrument panel,on the driver side of the vehicle.To access the fuses, open thefuse panel door by pulling downat the top.

Press in on the sides of the door torelease it from the instrument panel.

Pull the door toward you to releaseit from the hinge.


Vehicle Care 10-43

Instrument Panel Fuse Block


Fuses Usage

1 Steering WheelControls Backlight

2Body ControlModule 7


4 Radio

5OnStar UniversalHands‐Free Phone

6 Power Outlet 1

7 Power Outlet 2

8 Body ControlModule 1


Fuses Usage


11Front HeaterVentilation AirConditioning/Blower

12 Passenger Seat

13 Driver Seat

14Diagnostic LinkConnector

15 Airbag

16 Trunk

17Heater VentilationAir ConditioningController


10-44 Vehicle Care

Fuses Usage

18Radio, OnStar,UniversalHands‐Free Phone

19 Display

20Automatic OccupantSensing

21Instrument PanelCluster

22Discrete LogicIgnition Switch


Fuses Usage


25Rear HeaterVentilation AirConditioning/Blower

26 AC/DC Inverter

Relays Usage

R1 Trunk Relay

R2 Not Used

R3 Power Outlet Relay

Rear Compartment FuseBlock

The rear compartment fuse block islocated on the left side of the trunkbehind a cover.


Vehicle Care 10-45


Mini Fuses Usage

5 Not Used

6Heated SteeringWheel

Mini Fuses Usage

7 Not Used

8 Not Used

12 Not Used

15 Not Used

16 Not Used

Mini Fuses Usage

17 Not Used

18 PEPS

19 Not Used

20Rear Sunshade,Ventilated Seats

21 Not Used

22 Not Used

23 Not Used

24 Not Used

25 Not Used

26 Not Used

27 Not Used

28 Not Used

29 Not Used

30 Not Used


10-46 Vehicle Care

Mini Fuses Usage

31 ElectronicSuspension Control

32Rear SeatInfotainment

33 All‐Wheel Drive

J‐CaseFuses

Usage

1 Not Used

2 Not Used

3 Not Used

4 Not Used

9 Not Used

10 Not Used

11 Not Used

J‐CaseFuses

Usage

13 Not Used

14 Not Used

34 Not Used

35 PEPS

36 Not Used

37 Not Used

Relays Usage

K1 Not Used

K2Seat Ventilation,Sunshade

K3 Heated SteeringWheel

K4 Not Used

Wheels and Tires

TiresEvery new GM vehicle hashigh-quality tires made bya leading tire manufacturer.See the warranty manualfor information regardingthe tire warranty and whereto get service. For additionalinformation refer to the tiremanufacturer.

{ WARNING

. Poorly maintained andimproperly used tires aredangerous.

. Overloading the tires cancause overheating as aresult of too much flexing.There could be a blowout anda serious crash. See VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑12.

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 10-47

WARNING (Continued)

. Underinflated tires pose thesame danger as overloadedtires. The resulting crashcould cause serious injury.Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommendedpressure. Tire pressureshould be checked whenthe tires are cold.

. Overinflated tires are morelikely to be cut, punctured,or broken by a suddenimpact — such as whenhitting a pothole. Keeptires at the recommendedpressure.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Worn or old tires can causea crash. If the tread is badlyworn, replace them.

. Replace any tires that havebeen damaged by impactswith potholes, curbs, etc.

. Improperly repaired tirescan cause a crash. Only thedealer or an authorized tireservice center should repair,replace, dismount, and mountthe tires.

. Do not spin the tires inexcess of 55 km/h (35 mph)on slippery surfaces suchas snow, mud, ice, etc.Excessive spinning maycause the tires to explode.

Winter TiresConsider installing winter tireson the vehicle if frequent drivingon snow or ice covered roads isexpected. All season tires providegood overall performance on mostsurfaces, but they may not offerthe traction or the same level ofperformance as winter tires onsnow or ice covered roads.

Winter tires, in general, aredesigned for increased tractionon snow and ice covered roads.With winter tires, there may bedecreased dry road traction,increased road noise, and shortertread life. After changing to wintertires, be alert for changes in vehiclehandling and braking.


10-48 Vehicle Care

See your dealer for detailsregarding winter tire availabilityand proper tire selection. Also, seeBuying New Tires on page 10‑64.

If using snow tires:. Use tires of the same brand and

tread type on all four wheelpositions.

. Use only radial ply tires of thesame size, load range, andspeed rating as the originalequipment tires.

Winter tires with the same speedrating as the original equipment tiresmay not be available for H, V, W, Y,and ZR speed rated tires. If wintertires with a lower speed rating arechosen, never exceed the tire'smaximum speed capability.

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about atire is molded into its sidewall.The examples below show atypical passenger vehicle tireand a compact spare tiresidewall.

Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire Example

(A) Tire Size: The tire size isa combination of letters andnumbers used to define aparticular tire's width, height,

aspect ratio, construction type,and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in thissection for more detail.

(B) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meetor exceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(C) DOT (Departmentof Transportation): TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates thatthe tire is in compliancewith the U.S. Department ofTransportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.


Vehicle Care 10-49

(D) Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN): The lettersand numbers following the DOT(Department of Transportation)code are the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN). The TIN showsthe manufacturer and plantcode, tire size, and date the tirewas manufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(E) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(F) Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are requiredto grade tires based onthree performance factors:treadwear, traction, andtemperature resistance.For more informationsee Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 10‑66.

(G) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum loadthat can be carried and themaximum pressure neededto support that load.

Compact Spare Tire Example

(A) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(B) Temporary Use Only:The compact spare tire ortemporary use tire has atread life of approximately5 000 km (3,000 mi) and shouldnot be driven at speeds over105 km/h (65 mph). The compactspare tire is for emergency usewhen a regular road tire haslost air and gone flat. If thevehicle has a compact sparetire, see Compact Spare Tire onpage 10‑85 and If a Tire GoesFlat on page 10‑70.


10-50 Vehicle Care

(C) Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN): The lettersand numbers following the DOT(Department of Transportation)code is the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN). The TIN showsthe manufacturer and plantcode, tire size, and date the tirewas manufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(D) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum loadthat can be carried and themaximum pressure neededto support that load.

(E) Tire Inflation: Thetemporary use tire or compactspare tire should be inflatedto 420 kPa (60 psi). For moreinformation on tire pressureand inflation see Tire Pressureon page 10‑54.

(F) Tire Size: A combinationof letters and numbers define atire's width, height, aspect ratio,construction type, and servicedescription. The letter T as thefirst character in the tire sizemeans the tire is for temporaryuse only.

(G) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meetor exceed all federal safetyguidelines.

Tire Designations

Tire Size

The following is an exampleof a typical passenger vehicletire size.

(A) Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire:The United States versionof a metric tire sizing system.The letter P as the firstcharacter in the tire sizemeans a passenger vehicletire engineered to standardsset by the U.S. Tire and RimAssociation.


Vehicle Care 10-51

(B) Tire Width: The three‐digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters fromsidewall to sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digitnumber that indicates the tireheight‐to‐width measurements.For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 60, as shown initem C of the illustration, it wouldmean that the tire's sidewall is60 percent as high as it is wide.

(D) Construction Code: Aletter code is used to indicatethe type of ply construction inthe tire. The letter R meansradial ply construction; theletter D means diagonal orbias ply construction; and theletter B means belted‐bias plyconstruction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.

(F) Service Description: Thesecharacters represent the loadindex and speed rating of thetire. The load index representsthe load carrying capacity a tireis certified to carry. The speedrating is the maximum speed atire is certified to carry a load.

Tire Terminology andDefinitionsAir Pressure: The amountof air inside the tire pressingoutward on each square inchof the tire. Air pressure isexpressed in psi (pounds persquare inch) or kPa (kilopascal).

Accessory Weight: Thecombined weight of optionalaccessories. Some examplesof optional accessories are,automatic transmission, powersteering, power brakes, powerwindows, power seats, and airconditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationshipof a tire's height to its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer ofcords that is located betweenthe plies and the tread. Cordsmay be made from steel orother reinforcing materials.

Bead: The tire bead containssteel wires wrapped by steelcords that hold the tire ontothe rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatictire in which the plies are laidat alternate angles less than90 degrees to the centerlineof the tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: Theamount of air pressure in a tire,measured in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch)before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Tire Pressureon page 10‑54.


10-52 Vehicle Care

Curb Weight: The weight of amotor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment includingthe maximum capacity of fuel,oil, and coolant, but withoutpassengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A codemolded into the sidewall ofa tire signifying that the tireis in compliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation(DOT) Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumericdesignator which can alsoidentify the tire manufacturer,production plant, brand, anddate of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle WeightRating. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑12.

GAWR FRT: Gross AxleWeight Rating for the front axle.See Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑12.

GAWR RR: Gross AxleWeight Rating for the rear axle.See Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑12.

Intended Outboard Sidewall:The side of an asymmetrical tire,that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metricunit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire: Atire used on light duty trucks andsome multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index: An assignednumber ranging from 1 to 279that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure:The maximum air pressure towhich a cold tire can be inflated.The maximum air pressure ismolded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating:The load rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflationpressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded VehicleWeight: The sum of curbweight, accessory weight,vehicle capacity weight, andproduction options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight:The number of occupants avehicle is designed to seatmultiplied by 68 kg (150 lbs).See Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑12.

Occupant Distribution:Designated seating positions.


Vehicle Care 10-53

Outward Facing Sidewall:The side of an asymmetricaltire that has a particular sidethat faces outward whenmounted on a vehicle. Theside of the tire that contains awhitewall, bears white lettering,or bears manufacturer, brand,and/or model name moldingthat is higher or deeper thanthe same moldings on theother sidewall of the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:A tire used on passenger carsand some light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended InflationPressure: Vehiclemanufacturer's recommendedtire inflation pressure asshown on the tire placard.See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑54 and VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑12.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatictire in which the ply cords thatextend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tireand upon which the tire beadsare seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating: Analphanumeric code assigned toa tire indicating the maximumspeed at which a tire canoperate.

Traction: The friction betweenthe tire and the road surface.The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tirethat comes into contact withthe road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrowbands, sometimes called wearbars, that show across thetread of a tire when only 1.6 mm(1/16 in) of tread remains.See When It Is Time for NewTires on page 10‑63.

UTQGS (Uniform TireQuality Grading Standards):A tire information system thatprovides consumers withratings for a tire's traction,temperature, and treadwear.Ratings are determined bytire manufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures.The ratings are molded intothe sidewall of the tire.See Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 10‑66.


10-54 Vehicle Care

Vehicle Capacity Weight:The number of designatedseating positions multiplied by68 kg (150 lbs) plus the ratedcargo load. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑12.

Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire: Load on an individual tiredue to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, andcargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A labelpermanently attached to avehicle showing the vehiclecapacity weight and theoriginal equipment tire sizeand recommended inflationpressure. See “Tire andLoading Information Label”under Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑12.

Tire PressureTires need the correct amountof air pressure to operateeffectively.

Notice: Neither tireunderinflation noroverinflation is good.Underinflated tires, ortires that do not haveenough air, can result in:. Tire overloading andover-heating whichcould lead to a blowout.

. Premature orirregular wear.

. Poor handling.

. Reduced fuel economy.

Overinflated tires, or tiresthat have too much air, canresult in:. Unusual wear.. Poor handling.. Rough ride.. Needless damage fromroad hazards.

A vehicle-specific Tire andLoading Information labelis attached to the vehicle.This label shows the vehicle'soriginal equipment tires and thecorrect inflation pressures forthe tires when they are cold.The recommended cold tireinflation pressure, shown on thelabel, is the minimum amount ofair pressure needed to supportthe vehicle's maximum loadcarrying capacity.


Vehicle Care 10-55

For additional informationregarding how much weightthe vehicle can carry, and anexample of the Tire and LoadingInformation label, see VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑12.How you load the vehicleaffects vehicle handling andride comfort. Never load thevehicle with more weight thanit was designed to carry.

When to Check

Check the tires once a month ormore. Do not forget to check thecompact spare tire, if the vehiclehas one. The compact spareshould be at 420 kPa (60 psi).For additional informationregarding the compact sparetire, seeCompact Spare Tire onpage 10‑85.

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-typegauge to check tire pressure.You cannot tell if the tires areproperly inflated simply bylooking at them. Radial tiresmay look properly inflated evenwhen they are underinflated.Check the tire's inflationpressure when the tires arecold. Cold means the vehiclehas been sitting for at leastthree hours or driven no morethan 1.6 km (1 mi).

Remove the valve cap from thetire valve stem. Press the tiregauge firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement.

If the cold tire inflation pressurematches the recommendedpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label,no further adjustment isnecessary. If the inflationpressure is low, add air untilyou reach the recommendedamount.

If you overfill the tire, release airby pushing on the metal stemin the center of the tire valve.Re‐check the tire pressure withthe tire gauge.

Be sure to put the valve capsback on the valve stems. Theyhelp prevent leaks by keepingout dirt and moisture.


10-56 Vehicle Care

Tire Pressure MonitorSystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) uses radio and sensortechnology to check tire pressurelevels. The TPMS sensors monitorthe air pressure in your tires andtransmit tire pressure readings toa receiver located in the vehicle.

Each tire, including the spare(if provided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer onthe vehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard ortire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tireinflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with atire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire

pressure telltale when one ormore of your tires is significantlyunder‐inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate themto the proper pressure. Driving ona significantly under‐inflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under‐inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency andtire tread life, and may affect thevehicle's handling and stoppingability.

Please note that the TPMS isnot a substitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver'sresponsibility to maintain correcttire pressure, even if under‐inflationhas not reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also beenequipped with a TPMS malfunctionindicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly.

The TPMS malfunction indicator iscombined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated.This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start‐ups aslong as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicatoris illuminated, the system maynot be able to detect or signal lowtire pressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a varietyof reasons, including the installationof replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly.Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allowthe TPMS to continue to functionproperly.

See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10‑57 foradditional information.


Vehicle Care 10-57

Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) andIndustry Canada

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑20 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission(FCC) rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-210/220/310.

Tire Pressure MonitorOperationThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).The TPMS is designed to warnthe driver when a low tire pressurecondition exists. TPMS sensors aremounted onto each tire and wheelassembly, excluding the spare tireand wheel assembly. The TPMSsensors monitor the air pressurein the tires and transmits the tirepressure readings to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.

When a low tire pressure conditionis detected, the TPMS illuminatesthe low tire pressure warning lightlocated on the instrument cluster.If the warning light comes on, stopas soon as possible and inflatethe tires to the recommendedpressure shown on the tire loadinginformation label. See VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑12.

A message to check the pressure ina specific tire displays in the DriverInformation Center (DIC). The lowtire pressure warning light and theDIC warning message come on ateach ignition cycle until the tiresare inflated to the correct inflationpressure. Using the DIC, tirepressure levels can be viewed.

For additional information anddetails about the DIC operation anddisplays see Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑25.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven.This could be an early indicatorthat the air pressure is getting lowand needs to be inflated to theproper pressure.

A Tire and Loading Informationlabel, attached to your vehicle,shows the size of the originalequipment tires and the correctinflation pressure for the tires whenthey are cold. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑12, for an exampleof the Tire and Loading Informationlabel and its location. Also see TirePressure on page 10‑54.


10-58 Vehicle Care

The TPMS can warn about alow tire pressure condition butit does not replace normal tiremaintenance. See Tire Inspectionon page 10‑61, Tire Rotation onpage 10‑61 and Tires onpage 10‑46.

Notice: Tire sealant materials arenot all the same. A non-approvedtire sealant could damage theTPMS sensors. TPMS sensordamage caused by usingan incorrect tire sealant isnot covered by the vehiclewarranty. Always use onlythe GM-approved tire sealantavailable through your dealeror included in the vehicle.

Factory-installed Tire Inflator Kitsuse a GM approved liquid tiresealant. Using non-approved tiresealants could damage the TPMSsensors. See Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit on page 10‑72 forinformation regarding the inflatorkit materials and instructions.

TPMS Malfunction Light andMessage

The TPMS will not function properlyif one or more of the TPMS sensorsare missing or inoperable. Whenthe system detects a malfunction,the low tire warning light flashes forabout one minute and then stayson for the remainder of the ignitioncycle. A DIC warning message alsodisplays. The malfunction light andDIC warning message come on ateach ignition cycle until the problemis corrected. Some of the conditionsthat can cause these to comeon are:. One of the road tires has been

replaced with the spare tire.The spare tire does not have aTPMS sensor. The malfunctionlight and DIC message shouldgo off after the road tire isreplaced and the sensormatching process is performedsuccessfully. See “TPMS SensorMatching Process” later in thissection.

. The TPMS sensor matchingprocess was not done ornot completed successfullyafter rotating the tires. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off aftersuccessfully completing thesensor matching process.See "TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess" later in this section.

. One or more TPMS sensorsare missing or damaged.The malfunction light andthe DIC message should gooff when the TPMS sensorsare installed and the sensormatching process is performedsuccessfully. See your dealerfor service.


Vehicle Care 10-59

. Replacement tires or wheels donot match the original equipmenttires or wheels. Tires and wheelsother than those recommendedcould prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. See BuyingNew Tires on page 10‑64.

. Operating electronic devices orbeing near facilities using radiowave frequencies similar to theTPMS could cause the TPMSsensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioningproperly it cannot detect or signal alow tire condition. See your dealerfor service if the TPMS malfunctionlight and DIC message comes onand stays on.

TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess

Each TPMS sensor has a uniqueidentification code. The identificationcode needs to be matched to anew tire/wheel position after rotatingthe vehicle’s tires or replacingone or more of the TPMS sensors.The TPMS sensor matching processshould also be performed afterreplacing a spare tire with a roadtire containing the TPMS sensor.The malfunction light and the DICmessage should go off at the nextignition cycle. The sensors arematched to the tire/wheel positions,using a TPMS relearn tool, in thefollowing order: driver side front tire,passenger side front tire, passengerside rear tire, and driver side rear.See your dealer for service or topurchase a relearn tool.

There are two minutes to matchthe first tire/wheel position, andfive minutes overall to match allfour tire/wheel positions. If it takeslonger, the matching process stopsand must be restarted.

The TPMS sensor matchingprocess is:

1. Set the parking brake.


3. Use the MENU button to selectthe Vehicle Information Menuin the Driver InformationCenter (DIC).

4. Use the thumbwheel to scroll tothe Tire Pressure Menu Itemscreen.


10-60 Vehicle Care

5. Press the SET/CLR button tobegin the sensor matchingprocess.

A message asking if the processshould begin should appear.

6. Press the SET/CLR button againto confirm the selection.

The horn sounds twice tosignal the receiver is in relearnmode and the TIRE LEARNINGACTIVE message displays onthe DIC screen.

7. Start with the driver sidefront tire.

8. Place the relearn tool againstthe tire sidewall, near the valvestem. Then press the buttonto activate the TPMS sensor.A horn chirp confirms that thesensor identification code hasbeen matched to this tire andwheel position.

9. Proceed to the passengerside front tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 8.

10. Proceed to the passengerside rear tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 8.

11. Proceed to the driver side reartire, and repeat the procedurein Step 8. The horn soundstwo times to indicate thesensor identification code hasbeen matched to the driverside rear tire, and the TPMSsensor matching process isno longer active. The TIRELEARNING ACTIVE messageon the DIC display screengoes off.


13. Set all four tires to therecommended air pressurelevel as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.


Vehicle Care 10-61

Tire InspectionGM recommends that the tires,including the spare tire, if thevehicle has one, be inspectedfor signs of wear or damage atleast once a month.

Replace the tire if:. The indicators at three or

more places around the tirecan be seen.

. There is cord or fabricshowing through the tire'srubber.

. The tread or sidewall iscracked, cut, or snaggeddeep enough to show cordor fabric.

. The tire has a bump, bulge,or split.

. The tire has a puncture, cut,or other damage that cannotbe repaired well because ofthe size or location of thedamage.

Tire RotationTires should be rotatedevery 12 000 km (7,500 mi).See Scheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑2.

The purpose of a regular tirerotation is to achieve a uniformwear for all tires on the vehicle.This will ensure that the vehiclecontinues to perform most like itdid when the tires were new.

Any time you notice unusualwear, rotate the tires as soonas possible and check wheelalignment. Also check fordamaged tires or wheels.See When It Is Time for NewTires on page 10‑63 and WheelReplacement on page 10‑68.

When rotating the vehicle's tires,always use the correct rotationpattern shown here.


10-62 Vehicle Care

Do not include the compactspare tire in the tire rotation.

After the tires have beenrotated, adjust the front andrear inflation pressures asshown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See TirePressure on page 10‑54and Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑12.

Reset the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation onpage 10‑57.

Make certain that all wheelnuts are properly tightened.See “Wheel Nut Torque” underCapacities and Specifications onpage 12‑2.

{ WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle.In an emergency, use a cloth ora paper towel to do this; but besure to use a scraper or wirebrush later, if needed, to get allthe rust or dirt off. See If a TireGoes Flat on page 10‑70.

Lightly coat the center of thewheel hub with wheel bearinggrease after a wheel changeor tire rotation to preventcorrosion or rust build-up.Do not get grease on the flatwheel mounting surface oron the wheel nuts or bolts.


Vehicle Care 10-63

When It Is Time for NewTiresFactors such as maintenance,temperatures, driving speeds,vehicle loading, and road conditionsaffect the wear rate of the tires.

Treadwear indicators are one wayto tell when it is time for new tires.Treadwear indicators appear when

the tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)or less of tread remaining. See TireInspection on page 10‑61 and TireRotation on page 10‑61 for moreinformation.

The rubber in tires ages over time.This also applies for the spare tire,if the vehicle has one, even if it isnever used. Multiple conditionsincluding temperatures, loadingconditions, and inflation pressuremaintenance affect how fast agingtakes place. Tires will typicallyneed to be replaced due to wearbefore they may need to bereplaced due to age. Consultthe tire manufacturer for moreinformation on when tires shouldbe replaced.

Vehicle Storage

Tires age when stored normallymounted on a parked vehicle.Park a vehicle that will be storedfor at least a month in a cool, dry,clean area away from direct sunlightto slow aging. This area should befree of grease, gasoline, or othersubstances that can deterioraterubber.

Parking for an extended periodcan cause flat spots on the tiresthat may result in vibrations whiledriving. When storing a vehicle forat least a month, remove the tiresor raise the vehicle to reduce theweight from the tires.


10-64 Vehicle Care

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matchedspecific tires for the vehicle.The original equipment tiresinstalled on the vehicle, whenit was new, were designedto meet General MotorsTire Performance CriteriaSpecification (TPC Spec)system rating. If you needreplacement tires, GM stronglyrecommends that you gettires with the same TPC Specrating. This way, the vehiclewill continue to have tires thatare designed to give the sameperformance and vehicle safety,during normal use, as theoriginal tires.

GM's exclusive TPC Specsystem considers over adozen critical specificationsthat impact the overallperformance of the vehicle,including brake systemperformance, ride andhandling, traction control,and tire pressure monitoringperformance. GM's TPC Specnumber is molded onto thetire's sidewall near the tire size.If the tires have an all‐seasontread design, the TPC Specnumber will be followed byan MS for mud and snow.See Tire Sidewall Labeling onpage 10‑48 for additionalinformation.

GM recommends replacing tiresin sets of four. This is becauseuniform tread depth on all tires

will help keep the vehicleperforming most like it didwhen the tires were new.Replacing less than a full setof tires can affect the brakingand handling performance of thevehicle. See Tire Inspection onpage 10‑61 and Tire Rotation onpage 10‑61 for information onproper tire rotation.

{ WARNING

Tires could explode duringimproper service. Attempting tomount or dismount a tire couldcause injury or death. Only yourdealer or authorized tire servicecenter should mount or dismountthe tires.


Vehicle Care 10-65

{ WARNING

Mixing tires could cause youto lose control while driving.If you mix tires of differentsizes, brands, or types(radial and bias-belted tires),the vehicle may not handleproperly, and you could havea crash. Using tires of differentsizes, brands, or types mayalso cause damage to thevehicle. Be sure to use thecorrect size, brand, and typeof tires on all wheels. It isall right to drive with thecompact spare temporarily,as it was developed for useon the vehicle. See CompactSpare Tire on page 10‑85.

{ WARNING

Using bias-ply tires on thevehicle may cause the wheelrim flanges to develop cracksafter many miles of driving.A tire and/or wheel could failsuddenly and cause a crash.Use only radial-ply tires withthe wheels on the vehicle.

If you must replace the vehicle'stires with those that do nothave a TPC Spec number,make sure they are the samesize, load range, speed rating,and construction type (radial andbias‐belted tires) as the vehicle'soriginal tires.

Vehicles that have a tirepressure monitoring systemcould give an inaccuratelow‐pressure warning ifnon‐TPC Spec rated tiresare installed on the vehicle.Non‐TPC Spec rated tires maygive a low‐pressure warningthat is higher or lower than theproper warning level you wouldget with TPC Spec rated tires.See Tire Pressure MonitorSystem on page 10‑56.

The vehicle's original equipmenttires are listed on the Tire andLoading Information label.See Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑12 for more informationabout the Tire and LoadingInformation label and itslocation on the vehicle.


10-66 Vehicle Care

Different Size Tires andWheelsIf wheels or tires are installed thatare a different size than the originalequipment wheels and tires, vehicleperformance, including its braking,ride and handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollovermay be affected. If the vehicle haselectronic systems such as antilockbrakes, rollover airbags, tractioncontrol, and electronic stabilitycontrol, the performance of thesesystems can also be affected.

{ WARNING

If different sized wheels are used,there may not be an acceptablelevel of performance and safetyif tires not recommended forthose wheels are selected.This increases the chance ofa crash and serious injury.Only use GM specific wheeland tire systems developedfor the vehicle, and have themproperly installed by a GMcertified technician.

See Buying New Tires onpage 10‑64 and Accessoriesand Modifications on page 10‑3for additional information.

Uniform Tire QualityGradingQuality grades can be foundwhere applicable on the tiresidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width.For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature A

The following information relatesto the system developed by theUnited States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA), which grades tiresby treadwear, traction, andtemperature performance.This applies only to vehiclessold in the United States.


Vehicle Care 10-67

The grades are molded onthe sidewalls of most passengercar tires. The Uniform TireQuality Grading (UTQG)system does not apply to deeptread, winter-type snow tires,space-saver, or temporary usespare tires, tires with nominalrim diameters of 10 to 12 inches(25 to 30 cm), or to somelimited-production tires.

While the tires available onGeneral Motors passengercars and light trucks may varywith respect to these grades,they must also conform tofederal safety requirements andadditional General Motors TirePerformance Criteria (TPC)standards.

All Passenger Car Tires MustConform to Federal SafetyRequirements In AdditionTo These Grades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is acomparative rating basedon the wear rate of the tirewhen tested under controlledconditions on a specifiedgovernment test course.For example, a tire graded150 would wear one and ahalf (1½) times as well onthe government course as atire graded 100. The relativeperformance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and maydepart significantly from thenorm due to variations indriving habits, service practicesand differences in roadcharacteristics and climate.

Traction – AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, fromhighest to lowest, are AA, A, B,and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop onwet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditionson specified governmenttest surfaces of asphalt andconcrete. A tire marked C mayhave poor traction performance.Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is basedon straight-ahead brakingtraction tests, and does notinclude acceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.


10-68 Vehicle Care

Temperature – A, B, C

The temperature gradesare A (the highest), B, and C,representing the tire's resistanceto the generation of heat andits ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlledconditions on a specifiedindoor laboratory test wheel.Sustained high temperature cancause the material of the tireto degenerate and reduce tirelife, and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure.The grade C corresponds to alevel of performance which allpassenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades Band A represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimumrequired by law. Warning: Thetemperature grade for this tire is

established for a tire that isproperly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and TireBalanceThe tires and wheels werealigned and balanced at thefactory to provide the longest tirelife and best overall performance.Adjustments to wheel alignment andtire balancing will not be necessaryon a regular basis. However, checkthe alignment if there is unusual tirewear or if the vehicle is pulling toone side or the other. If the vehiclevibrates when driving on a smoothroad, the tires and wheels mightneed to be rebalanced. See yourdealer for proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent,cracked, or badly rusted orcorroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, andwheel nuts should be replaced.If the wheel leaks air, replace it.Some aluminum wheels can berepaired. See your dealer if anyof these conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind ofwheel that is needed.

Each new wheel should havethe same load-carrying capacity,diameter, width, offset, and bemounted the same way as theone it replaces.

Replace wheels, wheel bolts,wheel nuts, or Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS) sensors with newGM original equipment parts.


Vehicle Care 10-69

{ WARNING

Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel bolts, or wheelnuts can be dangerous. It couldaffect the braking and handlingof the vehicle. Tires can lose air,and cause loss of control, causinga crash. Always use the correctwheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheelcan also cause problems withbearing life, brake cooling,speedometer or odometercalibration, headlamp aim,bumper height, vehicle groundclearance, and tire or tire chainclearance to the body andchassis.

See If a Tire Goes Flat onpage 10‑70 for more information.

Used Replacement Wheels

{ WARNING

Replacing a wheel with a usedone is dangerous. How it hasbeen used or how far it has beendriven may be unknown. It couldfail suddenly and cause a crash.When replacing wheels, use anew GM original equipmentwheel.

Tire Chains

{ WARNING

Do not use tire chains. There isnot enough clearance. Tire chainsused on a vehicle without theproper amount of clearance cancause damage to the brakes,suspension or other vehicle parts.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

The area damaged by the tirechains could cause you to losecontrol of the vehicle and you orothers may be injured in a crash.

Use another type of tractiondevice only if its manufacturerrecommends it for use on thevehicle and tire size combinationand road conditions. Followthat manufacturer's instructions.To help avoid damage to thevehicle, drive slowly, readjustor remove the device if it iscontacting the vehicle, and do notspin the vehicle's wheels. If youdo find traction devices that willfit, install them on the front tires.


10-70 Vehicle Care

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowout,especially if the tires are maintainedproperly. See Tires. If air goes outof a tire, it is much more likely toleak out slowly. But if there is ever ablowout, here are a few tips aboutwhat to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tirecreates a drag that pulls thevehicle toward that side. Takeyour foot off the accelerator pedaland grip the steering wheel firmly.Steer to maintain lane position,and then gently brake to a stop,well off the road, if possible.

AA rear blowout, particularly on acurve, acts much like a skid andmay require the same correctionas used in a skid. Stop pressing

the accelerator pedal and steerto straighten the vehicle. It maybe very bumpy and noisy. Gentlybrake to a stop, well off the road,if possible.

{ WARNING

Driving on a flat tire will causepermanent damage to the tire.Re-inflating a tire after it hasbeen driven on while severelyunderinflated or flat may causea blowout and a serious crash.Never attempt to re-inflate a tirethat has been driven on whileseverely underinflated or flat.Have your dealer or an authorizedtire service center repair orreplace the flat tire as soonas possible.

{ WARNING

Lifting a vehicle and gettingunder it to do maintenance orrepairs is dangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only forchanging a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place, well off the road,if possible. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 6‑4.


Vehicle Care 10-71

{ WARNING

Changing a tire can bedangerous. The vehicle canslip off the jack and roll overor fall causing injury or death.Find a level place to change thetire. To help prevent the vehiclefrom moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put an automatictransmission shift lever inP (Park), or shift a manualtransmission to 1 (First) orR (Reverse).

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

3. Turn off the engine and donot restart while the vehicleis raised.

4. Do not allow passengers toremain in the vehicle.

5. Place wheel blocks onboth sides of the tire at theopposite corner of the tirebeing changed.

This vehicle may come with a jackand spare tire or a tire sealant andcompressor kit. To use the jackingequipment to change a sparetire safely, follow the instructionsbelow. Then see Tire Changing onpage 10‑79. To use the tire sealantand compressor kit, see TireSealant and Compressor Kit onpage 10‑72.

When the vehicle has a flat tire (B),use the following example as aguide to assist you in the placementof wheel blocks (A).

A. Wheel Block

B. Flat Tire

The following information explainshow to repair or change a tire.


10-72 Vehicle Care

Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit

{ WARNING

Idling a vehicle in an enclosedarea with poor ventilation isdangerous. Engine exhaust mayenter the vehicle. Engine exhaustcontains Carbon Monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousnessand even death. Never run theengine in an enclosed areathat has no fresh air ventilation.For more information, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑27.

{ WARNING

Overinflating a tire could causethe tire to rupture and youor others could be injured.Be sure to read and follow thetire sealant and compressor kitinstructions and inflate the tireto its recommended pressure.Do not exceed the recommendedpressure.

{ WARNING

Storing the tire sealant andcompressor kit or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store the tiresealant and compressor kit inits original location.

If this vehicle has a tire sealant andcompressor kit, there may not be aspare tire, tire changing equipment,and on some vehicles there may notbe a place to store a tire.

The tire sealant and compressorcan be used to temporarily sealpunctures up to 6 mm (¼ in) in thetread area of the tire. It can also beused to inflate an under inflated tire.

If the tire has been separated fromthe wheel, has damaged sidewalls,or has a large puncture, the tire istoo severely damaged for the tiresealant and compressor kit to beeffective. See Roadside AssistanceProgram (U.S. and Canada) onpage 13‑8 or Roadside AssistanceProgram (Mexico) on page 13‑10.

Read and follow all of the tiresealant and compressor kitinstructions.


Vehicle Care 10-73

The kit includes:

A. On/Off Button

B. Selector Switch(Sealant/Air or Air Only)

C. Pressure Relief Button

D. Pressure Gauge

E. Air Only Hose (Black)

F. Sealant/Air Hose (Clear)

G. Power Plug

Tire Sealant

Read and follow the safe handlinginstructions on the label adhered tothe compressor.

Check the tire sealant expirationdate on the sealant canister.The sealant canister should bereplaced before its expiration date.Replacement sealant canistersare available at your local dealer.See “Removal and Installation ofthe Sealant Canister” following.

There is only enough sealant toseal one tire. After usage, thesealant canister and sealant/airhose assembly must be replaced.See “Removal and Installation ofthe Sealant Canister” following.

Using the Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit toTemporarily Seal and Inflatea Punctured Tire

Follow the directions closely forcorrect sealant usage.

When using the tire sealantand compressor kit during coldtemperatures, warm the kit in aheated environment for five minutes.This will help to inflate the tirefaster.


10-74 Vehicle Care

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 6‑4.

See If a Tire Goes Flat onpage 10‑70 for other importantsafety warnings.

Do not remove any objects thathave penetrated the tire.

1. Remove the tire sealant andcompressor kit from its storagelocation. See Storing the TireSealant and Compressor Kit onpage 10‑79.

2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (F)and the power plug (G).

3. Place the kit on the ground.

Make sure the tire valve stem ispositioned close to the groundso the hose will reach it.

4. Remove the valve stem capfrom the flat tire by turning itcounterclockwise.

5. Attach the sealant/air hose (F)onto the tire valve stem. Turn itclockwise until it is tight.

6. Plug the power plug (G) into theaccessory power outlet in thevehicle. Unplug all items fromother accessory power outlets.See Power Outlets on page 5‑7.

If the vehicle has an accessorypower outlet, do not use thecigarette lighter.

If the vehicle only has a cigarettelighter, use the cigarette lighter.

Do not pinch the power plugcord in the door or window.

7. Start the vehicle. The vehiclemust be running while using theair compressor.

8. Turn the selector switch (B)clockwise to the Sealant + Airposition.

9. Press the on/off (A) buttonto turn the tire sealant andcompressor kit on.

The compressor will injectsealant and air into the tire.

The pressure gauge (D) willinitially show a high pressurewhile the compressor pushes thesealant into the tire. Once thesealant is completely dispersedinto the tire, the pressure willquickly drop and start to riseagain as the tire inflates withair only.

10. Inflate the tire to therecommended inflationpressure using the pressuregauge (D). The recommendedinflation pressure can befound on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See TirePressure on page 10‑54.


Vehicle Care 10-75

The pressure gauge (D) mayread higher than the actual tirepressure while the compressoris on. Turn the compressor offto get an accurate pressurereading. The compressor maybe turned on/off until thecorrect pressure is reached.

Notice: If the recommendedpressure cannot be reachedafter approximately 25 minutes,the vehicle should not be drivenfarther. The tire is too severelydamaged and the tire sealant andcompressor kit cannot inflatethe tire. Remove the power plugfrom the accessory power outletand unscrew the inflating hosefrom the tire valve. See RoadsideAssistance Program (U.S.and Canada) on page 13‑8 orRoadside Assistance Program(Mexico) on page 13‑10.

11. Press the on/off button (A)to turn the tire sealant andcompressor kit off.

The tire is not sealed andwill continue to leak air untilthe vehicle is driven and thesealant is distributed in the tire;therefore, Steps 12 through 18must be done immediately afterStep 11.

Be careful while handling thetire sealant and compressorkit as it could be warm afterusage.

12. Unplug the power plug (G) fromthe accessory power outlet inthe vehicle.

13. Turn the sealant/air hose (F)counterclockwise to removeit from the tire valve stem.

14. Replace the tire valvestem cap.

15. Return the sealant/air hose (F)and the power plug (G) back intheir original locations.

16. If the flat tire was able toinflate to the recommendedinflation pressure, remove themaximum speed label from thesealant canister and place itin a highly visible location.Do not exceed the speed onthis label until the damagedtire is repaired or replaced.

17. Return the equipment to itsoriginal storage location in thevehicle.

18. Immediately drive the vehicle8 km (5 mi) to distribute thesealant in the tire.


10-76 Vehicle Care

19. Stop at a safe location andcheck the tire pressure.Refer to Steps 1 through 11under “Using the Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit withoutSealant to Inflate a Tire (NotPunctured).”

If the tire pressure has fallenmore than 68 kPa (10 psi)below the recommendedinflation pressure, stopdriving the vehicle. The tireis too severely damaged andthe tire sealant cannot seal thetire. See Roadside AssistanceProgram (U.S. and Canada) onpage 13‑8 or RoadsideAssistance Program (Mexico)on page 13‑10.

If the tire pressure has notdropped more than 68 kPa(10 psi) from the recommendedinflation pressure, use thecompressor kit to inflate thetire to the recommendedinflation pressure.

20. Wipe off any sealant from thewheel, tire, and vehicle.

21. Dispose of the used sealantcanister and sealant/airhose (F) assembly at a localdealer or in accordance withlocal state codes and practices.

22. Replace it with a new canisteravailable from your dealer.

23. After temporarily sealinga tire using the tire sealantand compressor kit, takethe vehicle to an authorizeddealer within 161 km (100 mi)of driving to have the tirerepaired or replaced.

Using the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit withoutSealant to Inflate a Tire(Not Punctured)

To use the air compressor to inflatea tire with air only and not sealant:

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 6‑4.


Vehicle Care 10-77

See If a Tire Goes Flat onpage 10‑70 for other importantsafety warnings.

1. Remove the tire sealant andcompressor kit from its storagelocation. See Storing the TireSealant and Compressor Kit onpage 10‑79.

2. Unwrap the air only hose (E)and the power plug (G).

3. Place the kit on the ground.

Make sure the tire valve stem ispositioned close to the groundso the hose will reach it.

4. Remove the tire valve stem capfrom the flat tire by turning itcounterclockwise.

5. Attach the air only hose (E) ontothe tire valve stem by turning itclockwise until it is tight.

6. Plug the power plug (G) into theaccessory power outlet in thevehicle. Unplug all items fromother accessory power outlets.See Power Outlets on page 5‑7.

If the vehicle has an accessorypower outlet, do not use thecigarette lighter.

If the vehicle only has a cigarettelighter, use the cigarette lighter.

Do not pinch the power plugcord in the door or window.

7. Start the vehicle. The vehiclemust be running while using theair compressor.

8. Turn the selector switch (B)counterclockwise to the AirOnly position.

9. Press the on/off (A) button toturn the compressor on.

The compressor will inflate thetire with air only.

10. Inflate the tire to therecommended inflationpressure using the pressuregauge (D). The recommendedinflation pressure can befound on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See TirePressure on page 10‑54.

The pressure gauge (D) mayread higher than the actual tirepressure while the compressoris on. Turn the compressoroff to get an accurate reading.The compressor may be turnedon/off until the correct pressureis reached. If the tire is inflatedhigher than the recommendedpressure, press the pressurerelief button (C), if equipped,until the proper pressurereading is reached. This optionis only functional when usingthe air only hose (E).


10-78 Vehicle Care

11. Press the on/off button (A) toturn the tire sealant andcompressor kit off.

Be careful while handling thetire sealant and compressorkit as it could be warm afterusage.

12. Unplug the power plug (G) fromthe accessory power outlet inthe vehicle.

13. Disconnect the air onlyhose (E) from the tirevalve stem, by turning itcounterclockwise, andreplace the tire valvestem cap.

14. Return the air only hose (E)and the power plug (G) backto their original locations.

15. Return the equipment to itsoriginal storage location inthe vehicle.

Removal and Installation of theSealant Canister

To remove the sealant canister:

1. Remove the plastic cover.

2. Unscrew the connector (B) fromthe canister (A).

3. Pull up on the canister (A) toremove it.

4. Replace with a new canisterwhich is available from yourdealer.

5. Push the new canister intoplace.

6. Screw the connector (B) to thecanister (A).

7. Slide the plastic cover back on.


Vehicle Care 10-79

Storing the Tire Sealantand Compressor KitTo access the tire sealant andcompressor kit:

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk onpage 2‑12.

2. Lift the cover.

3. Turn the wing nutcounterclockwise to remove it.

4. Remove the tire sealant andcompressor kit.

To store the tire sealant andcompressor kit, reverse the steps.

Tire Changing

Removing the Spare Tire andTools

The equipment you need is locatedin the trunk.

1. Open the trunk.

2. Remove the spare tire cover.

3. Turn the retainer nutcounterclockwise andremove the spare tire.

4. Place the spare tire next to thetire being changed.

5. The jack and tools are storedbelow the spare tire.

This vehicle will have either acoin/pierce jack (D) and a jackhandle extension (C) or a hexhead jack (B) and a jack liftassist tool (A).

Place the tools next to the tirebeing changed.


10-80 Vehicle Care

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire

1. Do a safety check beforeproceeding. See If a Tire GoesFlat on page 10‑70 for moreinformation.

2. Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to loosenthe wheel nut caps.

If needed, finish loosening themby hand. The nut caps will notcome off of the wheel cover.

The edge of the wheel covercould be sharp, so do not tryto remove the cover with yourbare hands. Do not drop the capor lay it face down, as it couldbecome scratched or damaged.

Store the wheel cover in thetrunk until you have the flat tirerepaired or replaced.

3. Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to loosenall the wheel nuts, but do notremove them yet.

Notice: Make sure that the jacklift head is in the correct positionor you may damage your vehicle.The repairs would not be coveredby your warranty.

4. Position the jack head, asshown.

Set the jack to the necessaryheight before positioning it belowthe jacking point.


Vehicle Care 10-81

Coin/Pierce Jack Shown,Hex Head Jack Similar

5. If you have a coin/pierce jack,attach the jack handle extensionto the jack by sliding the hookthrough the end of the jack.

If you have a hex head jack,attach the jack lift assist toolto the jack by fitting both endsof the jack and tool over oneanother.

{ WARNING

Getting under a vehicle when itis jacked up is dangerous. If thevehicle slips off the jack, youcould be badly injured or killed.Never get under a vehicle whenit is supported only by a jack.

{ WARNING

Raising the vehicle with thejack improperly positioned candamage the vehicle and evenmake the vehicle fall. To helpavoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jacklift head into the proper locationbefore raising the vehicle.

{ WARNING

Lifting a vehicle and gettingunder it to do maintenance orrepairs is dangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only forchanging a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.


10-82 Vehicle Care

Hex Head Jack Shown,Coin/Pierce Jack Similar

6. Turn the jack handle clockwiseto raise the vehicle far enoughoff the ground for the compactspare to fit under the vehicle.

7. Remove all of the wheel nuts.

8. Remove the flat tire.

{ WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

In an emergency, use a cloth or apaper towel to do this; but be sureto use a scraper or wire brushlater, if needed, to get all the rustor dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flaton page 10‑70.

9. Remove any rust or dirt from thewheel bolts, mounting surfaces,and spare wheel.


Vehicle Care 10-83

10. Install the compact spare tire.

{ WARNING

Never use oil or grease on boltsor nuts because the nuts mightcome loose. The vehicle's wheelcould fall off, causing a crash.

11. Put the wheel nuts back onwith the rounded end of thenuts toward the wheel. Turneach nut clockwise by handuntil the wheel is held againstthe hub.

12. Lower the vehicle byturning the jack handlecounterclockwise. Lowerthe jack completely.

{ WARNING

Wheel nuts that are improperly orincorrectly tightened can causethe wheels to become loose or

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

come off. The wheel nuts shouldbe tightened with a torque wrenchto the proper torque specificationafter replacing. Follow thetorque specification supplied bythe aftermarket manufacturerwhen using accessory lockingwheel nuts. See Capacities andSpecifications on page 12‑2 fororiginal equipment wheel nuttorque specifications.

Notice: Improperly tightenedwheel nuts can lead to brakepulsation and rotor damage.To avoid expensive brake repairs,evenly tighten the wheel nutsin the proper sequence and tothe proper torque specification.See Capacities and Specificationson page 12‑2 for the wheel nuttorque specification.

13. Tighten the wheel nuts firmlyin a crisscross sequence, asshown.

14. Lower the jack all the way andremove the jack from under thevehicle.

15. Tighten the wheel nuts firmlywith the wheel wrench.

Notice: Wheel covers will not fiton the vehicle's compact spare.If you try to put a wheel cover onthe compact spare, the cover orthe spare could be damaged.


10-84 Vehicle Care

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{ WARNING

Storing a jack, a tire, or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all thesein the proper place.

To store the flat or spare tire andtools:

1. If the flat tire is larger thanthe spare tire, use the longermounting bolt.

2. Slide the shorter bolt to removeit from the floor and insert thelonger one.

3. Replace the jack and tools intheir original storage location.

4. Place the tire, lying flat, facingup in the spare tire well.

Secure it with the retainer nut.

Place the floor cover over thetire even though it may not layflat if the tire is larger than thespare.

The compact spare is for temporaryuse only. Replace the compactspare tire with a full-size tire assoon as you can.


Vehicle Care 10-85

Compact Spare Tire

{ WARNING

Driving with more than onecompact spare tire at a timecould result in loss of brakingand handling. This could leadto a crash and you or otherscould be injured. Use only onecompact spare tire at a time.

If this vehicle has a compact sparetire, it was fully inflated when thevehicle was new; however, it canlose air after a time. Check theinflation pressure regularly. It shouldbe 420 kPa (60 psi).

After installing the compact spareon the vehicle, stop as soonas possible and make sure thespare tire is correctly inflated.The compact spare is made toperform well at speeds up to105 km/h (65 mph) for distancesup to 5 000 km (3,000 mi), so youcan finish your trip and have thefull-size tire repaired or replacedat your convenience. Of course,it is best to replace the spare witha full-size tire as soon as possible.The spare tire will last longer and bein good shape in case it is neededagain.

Notice: When the compactspare is installed, do not takethe vehicle through an automaticcar wash with guide rails. Thecompact spare can get caught onthe rails which can damage thetire, wheel and other parts of thevehicle.

Do not use the compact spare onother vehicles.

Do not mix the compact spare tireor wheel with other wheels or tires.They will not fit. Keep the spare tireand its wheel together.

Notice: Tire chains will not fitthe compact spare. Using themcan damage the vehicle and candamage the chains too. Do notuse tire chains on the compactspare.


10-86 Vehicle Care

Jump StartingFor more information about thevehicle battery, see Battery onpage 10‑27.

If the battery has run down, try touse another vehicle and somejumper cables to start your vehicle.Be sure to use the following stepsto do it safely.

{ WARNING

Batteries can hurt you. They canbe dangerous because:

. They contain acid that canburn you.

. They contain gas that canexplode or ignite.

. They contain enoughelectricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these stepsexactly, some or all of thesethings can hurt you.

Notice: Ignoring these stepscould result in costly damageto the vehicle that would notbe covered by the warranty.

Trying to start the vehicle bypushing or pulling it will notwork, and it could damage thevehicle.

The jump start positive (A) islocated under a trim cover in theengine compartment on the driverside of the vehicle.

This post is used instead of a directconnection to the battery.

1. Check the other vehicle. It musthave a 12-volt battery with anegative ground system.

Notice: Only use a vehiclethat has a 12-volt system witha negative ground for jumpstarting. If the other vehicle doesnot have a 12-volt system with anegative ground, both vehiclescan be damaged.

2. Position the two vehicles so thatthey are not touching.


Vehicle Care 10-87

3. Set the parking brake firmly andput the shift lever in P (Park).See Shifting Into Park onpage 9‑25.

Notice: If the radio or otheraccessories are left on duringthe jump starting procedure, theycould be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by thewarranty. Always turn off theradio and other accessorieswhen jump starting the vehicle.

4. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFFand switch off all lights andaccessories in both vehicles,except the hazard warningflashers if needed.

{ WARNING

An electric fan can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can injure you. Keep hands,clothing and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

{ WARNING

Using a match near a battery cancause battery gas to explode.People have been hurt doingthis, and some have beenblinded. Use a flashlight if youneed more light.

Be sure the battery has enoughwater. You do not need to addwater to the battery installed inyour new vehicle. But if a batteryhas filler caps, be sure the rightamount of fluid is there. If it is low,add water to take care of thatfirst. If you don't, explosive gascould be present.

Battery fluid contains acid thatcan burn you. Do not get it onyou. If you accidentally get it inyour eyes or on your skin, flushthe place with water and getmedical help immediately.

{ WARNING

Fans or other moving engineparts can injure you badly. Keepyour hands away from movingparts once the engine is running.

5. Connect one end of the redpositive (+) cable to the jumpstart positive (+) post (A). Use aremote positive (+) terminal if thevehicle has one.


10-88 Vehicle Care

6. Do not let the other endof the red positive (+) cabletouch metal. Connect it tothe positive (+) terminal of thegood battery (B). Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehiclehas one.

7. Connect one end of theblack negative (–) cable tothe negative (–) terminal ofthe good battery (C). Use aremote negative (−) terminalif the vehicle has one.

Do not let the other end touchanything until the next step.The other end of the negative (–)cable does not go to the deadbattery. It goes to a heavy,unpainted metal engine part orto a remote negative (–) terminalon the vehicle with the deadbattery.

8. Connect the other end of theblack negative (–) cable to anunpainted heavy metal enginepart (D) away from the deadbattery, but not near engineparts that move.

9. Start the engine in the vehiclewith the good battery and runthe engine at idle speed for atleast four minutes.

10. Try to start the vehicle thathad the dead battery. If it willnot start after a few tries,it probably needs service.

Notice: If the jumper cablesare connected or removed inthe wrong order, electricalshorting may occur and damagethe vehicle. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Always connect andremove the jumper cables in thecorrect order, making sure thatthe cables do not touch eachother or other metal.

Jumper Cable Removal

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal EnginePart or Remote Negative (–)Terminal

B. Good Battery or RemotePositive (+) and RemoteNegative (–) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or RemotePositive (+) Terminal


Vehicle Care 10-89

To disconnect the jumper cablesfrom both vehicles:

1. Disconnect the blacknegative (−) cable from thevehicle that had the deadbattery.

2. Disconnect the blacknegative (−) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+)cable from the vehicle with thegood battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+)cable from the other vehicle.

5. Return the caps over thepositive (+) and negative (–)terminals to their originalpositions.

Towing

Towing the VehicleNotice: To avoid damage,the disabled vehicle shouldbe towed with all four wheelsoff the ground. Care must betaken with vehicles that havelow ground clearance and/orspecial equipment. Alwaysflatbed on a car carrier.

Consult your dealer or aprofessional towing service if thedisabled vehicle must be towed.See Roadside Assistance Program(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑8or Roadside Assistance Program(Mexico) on page 13‑10.

To tow the vehicle behind anothervehicle for recreational purposes,such as behind a motor home, see“Recreational Vehicle Towing” in thissection.

Recreational VehicleTowingRecreational vehicle towing meanstowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle such as a motor home.The two most common types ofrecreational vehicle towing areknown as dinghy towing and dollytowing. Dinghy towing is towing thevehicle with all four wheels on theground. Dolly towing is towing thevehicle with two wheels on theground and two wheels up ona device known as a dolly.

Here are some important things toconsider before recreational vehicletowing:. What is the towing capacity

of the towing vehicle?Be sure to read the towvehicle manufacturer'srecommendations.


10-90 Vehicle Care

. What is the distance that will betravelled? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and howlong they can tow.

. Is the proper towing equipmentgoing to be used? See yourdealer or trailering professionalfor additional advice andequipment recommendations.

. Is the vehicle ready to betowed? Just as preparing thevehicle for a long trip, makesure the vehicle is preparedto be towed.

Dinghy Towing from the Front

When dinghy towing, the vehicleshould be run at the beginning ofeach day and at each RV fuel stopfor about five minutes. This willensure proper lubrication oftransmission components.

Use the following procedure todinghy tow the vehicle from the frontwith all four wheels on the ground:

1. Position the vehicle being towedbehind the tow vehicle and shiftthe transmission to P (Park).

2. Turn the engine off and firmly setthe parking brake.

3. Following the manufacturer'sinstructions, securely attach thevehicle being towed to the towvehicle.

4. Turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY and shift thetransmission to N (Neutral).

5. Release the parking brake onlyafter the vehicle being towed isfirmly attached to the towingvehicle.

When towing the vehicle forextended periods of time, startthe vehicle as often as possible toprevent battery drain. This shouldbe done when the tow vehicle isparked.


Vehicle Care 10-91

Dinghy Towing from the Rear

The vehicle was not designed to betowed from the rear with all fourwheels on the ground.

Dolly Towing from the Front(Front-Wheel Drive)

Vehicles with front-wheel drive canbe dolly towed from the front.

Use the following procedure to dollytow the vehicle from the front:

1. Attach the dolly to the towvehicle following the dollymanufacturer's instructions.

2. Drive the front wheels onto thedolly.

3. Shift the transmission toP (Park).

4. Firmly set the parking brake.

5. Use an adequate clampingdevice designed for towing toensure that the front wheels arelocked into the straight-aheadposition.

6. Secure the vehicle to the dollyfollowing the manufacturer'sinstructions.

7. Release the parking brake onlyafter the vehicle being towed isfirmly attached to the towingvehicle.



10-92 Vehicle Care

Dolly Towing from the Front(All-Wheel Drive)

Vehicles with all-wheel drive cannotbe dolly towed.

Dolly Towing from the Rear

The vehicle cannot be dolly towedfrom the rear.

Appearance Care

Exterior Care

Cleaning ExteriorLamps/Lenses

Use only lukewarm or cold water, asoft cloth, and a car washing soapto clean exterior lamps and lenses.Follow instructions under “Washingthe Vehicle” later in this section.

Finish Care

Occasional waxing or mild polishingof the vehicle by hand may benecessary to remove residue fromthe paint finish. Approved cleaningproducts can be obtained from yourdealer.


Vehicle Care 10-93

If the vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, the clearcoatgives more depth and gloss tothe colored basecoat. Alwaysuse waxes and polishes that arenon-abrasive and made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish.

Notice: Machine compoundingor aggressive polishing on abasecoat/clearcoat paint finishmay damage it. Use onlynon-abrasive waxes and polishesthat are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on thevehicle.

Foreign materials such ascalcium chloride and other salts,ice melting agents, road oil and tar,tree sap, bird droppings, chemicalsfrom industrial chimneys, etc., candamage the vehicle's finish if theyremain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible.If necessary, use non-abrasivecleaners that are marked safefor painted surfaces to removeforeign matter.

Exterior painted surfaces aresubject to aging, weather, andchemical fallout that can taketheir toll over a period of years.To keep the paint finish lookingnew, keep the vehicle garagedor covered whenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright MetalParts

Bright metal parts should becleaned regularly to keep theirluster. Wash with water or usechrome polish on chrome orstainless steel trim, if necessary.

Use special care with aluminumtrim. To avoid damaging protectivetrim, never use auto or chromepolish, steam, or caustic soapto clean aluminum. A coatingof wax, rubbed to high polish,is recommended for all brightmetal parts.


10-94 Vehicle Care

Washing the Vehicle

To preserve the vehicle's finish,keep it clean by washing it often.

Do not wash the vehicle indirect sunlight and use a carwashing soap.

Notice: Do not use cleaningagents that are petroleumbased or that contain acidor abrasives, as they candamage the paint, metal,or plastic on the vehicle.Approved cleaning productscan be obtained from yourdealer. Follow all manufacturerdirections regarding correctproduct usage, necessary safetyprecautions, and appropriatedisposal of any vehicle careproduct. Certain cleaners containchemicals that can damagethe emblems or nameplates onthe vehicle. Check the cleaning

product label. If it states that itshould not be used on plasticparts, do not use it on the vehicleor damage may occur and itwould not be covered by thewarranty.

Rinse the vehicle well, beforewashing and after, to remove allcleaning agents completely. If theyare allowed to dry on the surface,they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel toavoid surface scratches and waterspotting.

High pressure car washes couldcause water to enter the vehicle.Avoid using high pressure washescloser than 30 cm (12 in) to thesurface of the vehicle. Use of powerwashers exceeding 8,274 kPa(1,200 psi) can result in damageor removal of paint and decals.

Notice: Conveyor systems onsome automatic car washes coulddamage the vehicle. There maynot be enough clearance for theundercarriage. Check with the carwash manager before using theautomatic car wash.

Weatherstrips

Silicone grease on weatherstripswill make them last longer, sealbetter, and not stick or squeak.Apply silicone grease with a cleancloth. During very cold, dampweather frequent application maybe required. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 11‑7.


Vehicle Care 10-95

Wheels and Trim—Aluminumor Chrome

The vehicle may have eitheraluminum or chrome-plated wheels.

Keep the wheels clean using asoft, clean cloth with mild soapand water. Rinse with clean water.After rinsing thoroughly, dry with asoft, clean towel. A wax may thenbe applied.

Notice: Chrome wheels andother chrome trim may bedamaged if the vehicle is notwashed after driving on roadsthat have been sprayed withmagnesium, calcium or sodiumchloride. These chlorides areused on roads for conditionssuch as ice and dust. Alwayswash the chrome with soap andwater after exposure.

Notice: Do not use strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes,cleaners, brushes, or cleanersthat contain acid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels, becausethe surface could be damaged.

The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Use onlyapproved cleaners on aluminumor chrome-plated wheels.

Notice: Never drive a vehicle thathas aluminum or chrome-platedwheels through an automatic carwash that uses silicone carbidetire cleaning brushes, as thiscould cause damage. The repairswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Notice: Driving the vehiclethrough an automatic car washthat has silicone carbide tirecleaning brushes, could damagethe aluminum or chrome-platedwheels. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Never drive a vehicle that hasaluminum or chrome-platedwheels through an automaticcar wash that uses siliconecarbide tire cleaning brushes.

Windshield and Wiper Blades

Clean the outside of the windshieldwith glass cleaner.

Clean the rubber blades usinga lint‐free cloth or paper towelsoaked with windshield washerfluid or a mild detergent. Washthe windshield thoroughly whencleaning the blades. Bugs, roadgrime, sap, and a buildup of vehiclewash/wax treatments may causewiper streaking. Replace the wiperblades if they are worn or damaged.

Wipers can be damaged by:. Extreme dusty conditions. Sand and salt. Heat and sun. Snow and ice, without proper

removal


10-96 Vehicle Care

Tires

Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner toclean the tires.

Notice: Using petroleum-basedtire dressing products on thevehicle may damage the paintfinish and/or tires. When applyinga tire dressing, always wipe offany overspray from all paintedsurfaces on the vehicle.

Sheet Metal Damage

If the vehicle is damaged andrequires sheet metal repair orreplacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosionmaterial to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacementparts will provide the corrosionprotection while maintaining thevehicle warranty.

Finish Damage

Any stone chips, fractures, or deepscratches in the finish should berepaired right away. Bare metal willcorrode quickly and may developinto major repair expense.

Minor chips and scratches can berepaired with touch-up materialsavailable from your dealer. Largerareas of finish damage can becorrected in your dealer's bodyand paint shop.

Underbody Maintenance

Chemicals used for ice and snowremoval and dust control can collecton the underbody. If these are notremoved, corrosion and rust candevelop on the underbody partssuch as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,and exhaust system even thoughthey have corrosion protection.

At least every spring, flush thesematerials from the underbodywith plain water. Clean any areaswhere mud and debris can collect.Dirt packed in close areas of theframe should be loosened beforebeing flushed. Your dealer or anunderbody car washing systemcan do this.

Chemical Paint Spotting

Some weather and atmosphericconditions can create a chemicalfallout. Airborne pollutants can fallupon and attack painted surfaceson the vehicle. This damage cantake two forms: blotchy, ring-shapeddiscolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paintsurface.


Vehicle Care 10-97

Interior CareThe interior will continue to lookits best if it is cleaned often.Dust and dirt can accumulateon the upholstery and causedamage to the carpet, fabric,leather, and plastic surfaces.Stains should be removed quicklyas extreme heat could causethem to set rapidly.

Lighter colored interiors mayrequire more frequent cleaning.Newspapers and garments thatcan transfer color to homefurnishings can also transfercolor to the interior.

Remove dust from small buttonsand knobs with a small brush withsoft bristles.

Your dealer has products forcleaning the interior. Whencleaning the interior, only usecleaners specifically designedfor the surfaces that are being

cleaned. Permanent damagecan result from using cleanerson surfaces for which they werenot intended. Apply the cleanerdirectly to the cleaning cloth toprevent over-spray. Remove anyaccidental over-spray from othersurfaces immediately.

Notice: Using abrasive cleanerswhen cleaning glass surfaceson the vehicle, could scratch theglass and/or cause damage tothe rear window defogger. Whencleaning the glass on the vehicle,use only a soft cloth and glasscleaner.

Cleaners can contain solventsthat can become concentratedin the interior. Before usingcleaners, read and adhere to allsafety instructions on the label.While cleaning the interior,maintain adequate ventilation byopening the doors and windows.

Do not clean the interior using thefollowing cleaners or techniques:. Never use a knife or any other

sharp object to remove a soilfrom any interior surface.

. Never use a stiff brush. It cancause damage.

. Never apply heavy pressure orrub aggressively with a cleaningcloth. Use of heavy pressure candamage the interior and doesnot improve the effectivenessof soil removal.

. Avoid laundry detergentsor dishwashing soaps withdegreasers. Using too muchsoap will leave a residue thatleaves streaks and attractsdirt. For liquid cleaners, about20 drops per 3.78 L (1 gal) ofwater is a good guide. Use onlymild, neutral-pH soaps.

. Do not heavily saturate theupholstery while cleaning.

. Cleaners that contain solventscan damage the interior.


10-98 Vehicle Care

Fabric/Carpet

Use a vacuum cleaner with a softbrush attachment to remove dustand loose dirt. A canister vacuumwith rotating brushes in the nozzlemay only be used on floor carpetand carpeted floor mats. For soils,always try to remove them first withplain water or club soda. Beforecleaning, gently remove as much ofthe soil as possible using one of thefollowing techniques:. For liquids: gently blot the

remaining soil with a papertowel. Allow the soil to absorbinto the paper towel until nomore can be removed.

. For solid dry soils: remove asmuch as possible and thenvacuum.

To clean:

1. Saturate a lint-free, clean whitecloth with water or club soda.

2. Remove excess moisture.

3. Start on the outside edge of thesoil and gently rub toward thecenter. Continue cleaning, usinga clean area of the cloth eachtime it becomes soiled.

4. Continue to gently rub thesoiled area.

5. If the soil is not completelyremoved, use a mild soapsolution and repeat the cleaningprocess with plain water.

If any of the soil remains, acommercial fabric cleaner or spotlifter may be necessary. Test asmall hidden area for colorfastnessbefore using a commercialupholstery cleaner or spot lifter.If the locally cleaned area givesany impression that a ring formationmay result, clean the entire surface.

A paper towel can be used to blotexcess moisture from the fabric orcarpet after the cleaning process.

Leather

Leather, and lighter colored leatherin particular, will need more frequentcleaning to prevent the buildup ofdust, dirt, and colors transferredfrom other items so that these donot become permanent stains.

To remove dust, a soft clothdampened with water canbe used. If a more thoroughcleaning is necessary, a softcloth dampened with a mild soapsolution can be used. Your dealerhas a GM approved leather cleaneravailable that provides superiorcleaning performance when usedregularly on finished automotiveleathers. Allow the leather to drynaturally.


Vehicle Care 10-99

Do not use heat, steam, spotlifters or spot removers, or shoepolish on leather. Many commercialleather cleaners and coatings thatare sold to preserve and protectleather may permanently changethe appearance and feel of theleather and are not recommended.Do not use silicone or wax-basedproducts, or those containingorganic solvents to clean theinterior because they can alterthe appearance by increasing thegloss in a non-uniform manner.

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, andOther Plastic Surfaces

To remove dust, a soft clothdampened with water can beused. If a more thorough cleaningis necessary, a clean soft clothdampened with a mild soap solution

can be used to gently removedust and dirt. Never use spotlifters or removers on plasticsurfaces. Many commercialcleaners and coatings that aresold to preserve and protect softplastic surfaces may permanentlychange the appearance andfeel of the interior and are notrecommended. Do not use siliconeor wax-based products, or thosecontaining organic solvents to cleanthe interior because they can alterthe appearance by increasing thegloss in a non-uniform manner.

Some commercial products mayincrease gloss on the instrumentpanel. The increase in gloss maycause annoying reflections in thewindshield and even make it difficultto see through the windshield undercertain conditions.

Notice: Air fresheners containsolvents that may causedamage to plastics andpainted surfaces. Follow themanufacturer’s instructionswhen using air fresheners in thevehicle. If air freshener comesin contact with paint or a plasticsurface, blot immediately with asoft cloth. Damage caused byusing air fresheners would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Care of Safety Belts

Keep belts clean and dry.

{ WARNING

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them.In a crash, they might not be ableto provide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.


10-100 Vehicle Care

Floor Mats

{ WARNING

If a floor mat is the wrong sizeor is not properly installed, it caninterfere with the acceleratorpedal and/or brake pedal.Interference with the pedals cancause unintended accelerationand/or increased stoppingdistance which can cause a crashand injury. Make sure the floormat does not interfere with theaccelerator or brake pedal.

Use the following guidelines forproper floor mat usage:. The original equipment floor

mats were designed for yourvehicle. If the floor mats needreplacing, it is recommendedthat GM certified floor mats bepurchased. Non-GM floor matsmay not fit properly and mayinterfere with the accelerator orbrake pedal. Always check thatthe floor mats do not interferewith the pedals.

. Use the floor mat with thecorrect side up. Do not turnit over.

. Do not place anything on top ofthe driver side floor mat.

. Use only a single floor mat onthe driver side.

. Do not place one floor mat ontop of another.

Removing and Replacing theFloor Mats

Pull up on the rear of the floor matto unlock each retainer and remove.

Reinstall by lining up the floor matretainer openings over the carpetretainers and snap into position.

Make sure the floor mat is properlysecured in place.

Verify the floor mat does notinterfere with the accelerator or thebrake pedal.


Service and Maintenance 11-1

Service andMaintenance

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Scheduled MaintenanceScheduled Maintenance . . . . . 11-2

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and PartsRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7

Maintenance ReplacementParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9

Maintenance RecordsMaintenance Records . . . . . . 11-10

General InformationNotice: Maintenanceintervals, checks, inspections,recommended fluids, andlubricants are necessary tokeep this vehicle in goodworking condition. Damagecaused by failure to followscheduled maintenance mightnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

As the vehicle owner, you areresponsible for the scheduledmaintenance in this section.We recommend having yourdealer perform these services.Proper vehicle maintenance helpsto keep the vehicle in good workingcondition, improves fuel economy,and reduces vehicle emissions forbetter air quality.

Because of all the different wayspeople use vehicles, maintenanceneeds vary. The vehicle might needmore frequent checks and services.Please read the information underScheduled Maintenance. To keepthe vehicle in good condition, seeyour dealer.

The maintenance schedule is forvehicles that:. Carry passengers and cargo

within recommended limits onthe Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑12.

. Are driven on reasonable roadsurfaces within legal drivinglimits.

. Use the recommended fuel.See Recommended Fuel onpage 9‑50.


11-2 Service and Maintenance

{ WARNING

Performing maintenance work canbe dangerous. Some jobs cancause serious injury. Performmaintenance work only if youhave the required know-how andthe proper tools and equipment.If in doubt, see your dealer tohave a qualified technician dothe work. See Doing Your OwnService Work on page 10‑4.

At your dealer, you can becertain that you will receive thehighest level of service available.Your dealer has specially trainedservice technicians, uses genuine

replacement parts, as well as,up‐to‐date tools and equipmentto ensure fast and accuratediagnostics.

The proper replacement parts,fluids, and lubricants to use arelisted in Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 11‑7 andMaintenance Replacement Parts onpage 11‑9. We recommend the useof genuine parts from your dealer.

Rotation of New Tires

To maintain ride, handling,and performance of the vehicle,it is important that the first rotationservice for new tires be performed.Tires should be rotated every12 000 km/7,500 miles. See TireRotation on page 10‑61.

ScheduledMaintenanceWhen the Change Engine OilSoon Message Displays

Change engine oil and filter.See Engine Oil on page 10‑9.An Emission Control Service.

When the CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message displays,service is required for the vehicleas soon as possible, within the next1 000 km/600 miles. If driving underthe best conditions, the engine oillife system might not indicate theneed for vehicle service for morethan a year. The engine oil and filtermust be changed at least once ayear and the oil life system mustbe reset. Your dealer has trainedservice technicians who will performthis work and reset the system.



If the engine oil life system is resetaccidentally, service the vehiclewithin 5 000 km/3,000 miles sincethe last service. Reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑13.

Every Engine Oil Change. Change engine oil and

filter. Reset oil life system.See Engine Oil on page 10‑9and Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑13. An EmissionControl Service.

. Engine coolant level check.See Engine Coolant onpage 10‑18.

. Engine cooling systeminspection. Visual inspectionof hoses, pipes, fittings, andclamps and replacement,if needed.

. Windshield washer fluid levelcheck. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑24.

. Windshield wiper bladeinspection for wear, cracking,or contamination and windshieldand wiper blade cleaning,if contaminated. See ExteriorCare on page 10‑92. Wornor damaged wiper bladereplacement. See Wiper BladeReplacement on page 10‑29.

. Tire inflation pressurescheck. See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑54.

. Tire wear inspection. See TireInspection on page 10‑61.

. Rotate tires if necessary.See Tire Rotation onpage 10‑61.

. Fluids visual leak check(or every 12 months, whicheveroccurs first). A leak in anysystem must be repairedand the fluid level checked.

. Engine air cleaner filterinspection. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 10‑15.

. Brake system inspection(or every 12 months,whichever occurs first).

. Steering and suspensioninspection. Visual inspectionfor damaged, loose, or missingparts or signs of wear.



. Body hinges and latches,key lock cylinders, foldingseat hardware, and sunroof(if equipped) lubrication.See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 11‑7.More frequent lubrication maybe required when the vehicleis exposed to a corrosiveenvironment. Applying siliconegrease on weatherstrips witha clean cloth makes them lastlonger, seal better, and notstick or squeak.

. Restraint system componentcheck. See Safety SystemCheck on page 3‑27.

. Fuel system inspection fordamage or leaks.

. Exhaust system and nearby heatshields inspection for loose ordamaged components.

Additional Required Services

Every 12 000 km/7,500Miles. Rotate tires. Tires should

be rotated every 12 000 km/7,500 miles. See Tire Rotationon page 10‑61.

At Each Fuel Stop. Engine oil level check.

See Engine Oil on page 10‑9.. Engine coolant level check.

See Engine Coolant onpage 10‑18.

. Windshield washer fluid levelcheck. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑24.

Once a Month. Tire inflation check. See Tire

Pressure on page 10‑54.. Tire wear inspection. See Tire

Inspection on page 10‑61.. Sunroof track and seal

inspection, if equipped.See Sunroof on page 2‑21.

Once a Year. See Starter Switch Check on

page 10‑27.. See Automatic Transmission

Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck on page 10‑28.

. See Ignition Transmission LockCheck on page 10‑28.

. See Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check onpage 10‑29.

. Accelerator pedal check fordamage, high effort, or binding.Replace if needed.

. Underbody flushing service.



. Hood/Decklid/Liftgate/LiftglassSupport Gas Strut Service:Visually inspect gas strut,if equipped, for signs of wear,cracks, or other damage. Checkthe hold open ability of the gasstrut. Contact your dealer ifservice is required.

First Engine Oil Change AfterEvery 40 000 km/25,000Miles. Passenger compartment

air filter replacement (or every24 months, whichever occursfirst). More frequent replacementmay be needed if you drivein areas with heavy traffic,areas with poor air quality,or areas with high dust levels.Replacement may also beneeded if you notice reducedair flow, windows fogging up,or odors. Your dealer can helpyou determine when it is theright time to replace the filter.

First Engine Oil Change AfterEvery 80 000 km/50,000Miles. Engine air cleaner filter

replacement. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 10‑15.

. Automatic transmission fluidchange (severe service)for vehicles mainly drivenin heavy city traffic in hotweather, in hilly or mountainousterrain, when frequently towinga trailer, or used for taxi,police, or delivery service.See Automatic TransmissionFluid on page 10‑15.

. All‐wheel drive only: Transfercase fluid change (severeservice) for vehicles mainlydriven when frequently towinga trailer, or used for taxi, police,or delivery service. Checkvent hose at transfer case forkinks and proper installation.Check to be sure vent hose isunobstructed, clear, and free ofdebris. During any maintenance,if a power washer is used toclean mud and dirt from theunderbody, care should be takento not directly spray the transfercase output seals. High pressurewater can overcome the sealsand contaminate the transfercase fluid. Contaminated fluidwill decrease the life of thetransfer case and should bereplaced.



. Evaporative control systeminspection. Check all fuel andvapor lines and hoses for properhook‐up, routing, and condition.Check that the purge valve,if the vehicle has one, worksproperly. Replace as needed.An Emission Control Service.The U.S. EnvironmentalProtection Agency or theCalifornia Air Resources Boardhas determined that the failureto perform this maintenanceitem will not nullify the emissionwarranty or limit recall liabilityprior to the completion ofthe vehicle's useful life.We, however, urge that allrecommended maintenanceservices be performed at theindicated intervals and themaintenance be recorded.

First Engine Oil Change AfterEvery 160 000 km/100,000Miles. Automatic transmission fluid

change (normal service).See Automatic TransmissionFluid on page 10‑15.

. All‐wheel drive only: Transfercase fluid change (normalservice). Check vent hoseat transfer case for kinks andproper installation. Check to besure vent hose is unobstructed,clear, and free of debris. Duringany maintenance, if a powerwasher is used to clean mudand dirt from the underbody,care should be taken to notdirectly spray the transfer caseoutput seals. High pressurewater can overcome the sealsand contaminate the transfercase fluid. Contaminated fluidwill decrease the life of thetransfer case and should bereplaced.

. Spark plug replacement andspark plug wires inspection.An Emission Control Service.

First Engine Oil Change AfterEvery 240 000 km/150,000Miles. Engine cooling system drain,

flush, and refill (or everyfive years, whichever occursfirst). See Cooling System onpage 10‑17. An EmissionControl Service.

. Engine drive belts inspectionfor fraying, excessive cracks,or obvious damage (or every10 years, whichever occursfirst). Replace, if needed.



Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil

The engine requires engine oil approved to the dexos specification.Oils meeting this specification can be identified with the dexos certificationmark. Look for and use only an engine oil that displays the dexoscertification mark of the proper viscosity grade. See Engine Oil onpage 10‑9.

Engine Coolant50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.See Engine Coolant on page 10‑18.

Hydraulic Brake SystemDOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 88862806,in Canada 88862807).

Windshield Washer Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

Hydraulic Power Steering System DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.



Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Key Lock Cylinders Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

Hood Latch Assembly,Secondary Latch, Pivots,

Spring Anchor, and Release Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 12346293, in Canada 992723)or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood and Door HingesMulti-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

Weatherstrip ConditioningWeatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 992887).



Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 55560894 A3128C

Engine Oil Filter

2.4L L4 Engine 12605566 PF457G

3.6L V6 Engine 89017525 PF63

Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element 13271191 CF176

Spark Plugs

2.4L L4 Engine 12620540 41–108

3.6L V6 Engine 12622561 41–109

Wiper Blades

Driver Side – 65 cm (25.6 in) 25892079 —

Passenger Side – 45 cm (17.7 in) 25882578 —



Maintenance RecordsAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

DateOdometerReading

Serviced By Services Performed



Maintenance Record (cont.)

Date OdometerReading




Maintenance Record (cont.)

Date OdometerReading



Technical Data 12-1

Technical Data

Vehicle IdentificationVehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Service Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Vehicle DataCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-4

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

This legal identifier is in the frontcorner of the instrument panel, onthe left side of the vehicle. It can beseen through the windshield fromoutside. The VIN also appears onthe Vehicle Certification and ServiceParts labels and certificates of titleand registration.

Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VINis the engine code. This codeidentifies the vehicle's engine,specifications, and replacementparts. See “Engine Specifications”under Capacities and Specificationson page 12‑2 for the vehicle'sengine code.

Service PartsIdentification LabelThis label, in the trunk, has thefollowing information:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN).. Model designation.. Paint information.. Production options and special

equipment.

Do not remove this label from thevehicle.


12-2 Technical Data

Vehicle Data

Capacities and Specifications

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134aFor the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant label located under the

hood. See your dealer for more information.

Engine Cooling System

2.4L L4 Engine 7.1 L 7.5 qt

3.6L V6 Engine 9.4 L 9.9 qt

Engine Oil with Filter

2.4L L4 Engine 4.7 L 5.0 qt

3.6L V6 Engine 5.2 L 5.5 qt

Fuel Tank

AWD 74.0 L 19.5 gal

FWD 70.5 L 18.6 gal


Technical Data 12-3

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Transmission Fluid* (Drain and Refill)

2.4L L4 Engine, 6–Speed Automatic 8.0 L 8.5 qt

3.6L V6 Engine, 6–Speed Automatic 9.0 L 9.5 qt

Wheel Nut Torque 150Y 110 lb ft

*See Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 10‑15 for information on checking fluid level.

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

Engine Specifications

Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

2.4L L4 Engine C Automatic 0.9 mm (0.035 in)

3.6L V6 Engine D Automatic 1.10 mm (0.043 in)


12-4 Technical Data

Engine Drive Belt Routing

2.4L L4 Engine(Electric Power Steering)

2.4L L4 Engine(Hydraulic Power Steering)

3.6L V6 Engines


Customer Information 13-1

CustomerInformation

Customer InformationCustomer SatisfactionProcedure (U.S. andCanada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Customer SatisfactionProcedure (Mexico) . . . . . . . . 13-3

Customer Assistance Offices(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Customer Assistance Offices(Mexico) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) Users (U.S.and Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6

Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-7GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram (U.S. andCanada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8

Roadside Assistance Program(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . 13-8

Roadside AssistanceProgram (Mexico) . . . . . . . . . 13-10

Scheduling ServiceAppointments (U.S. andCanada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11

Courtesy TransportationProgram (U.S. andCanada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11

Collision Damage Repair(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . 13-13

Service PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . 13-15

Reporting Safety DefectsReporting Safety Defects tothe United StatesGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16

Reporting Safety Defects tothe CanadianGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacyVehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18

Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-18OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19Navigation System . . . . . . . . . 13-19Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-19

Radio FrequencyStatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20

Customer Information

Customer SatisfactionProcedure(U.S. and Canada)Your satisfaction and goodwillare important to the dealer andto Buick. Normally, any concernswith the sales transaction or theoperation of the vehicle will beresolved by the dealer's sales orservice departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentionsof all concerned, misunderstandingscan occur. If your concern has notbeen resolved to your satisfaction,the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concernwith a member of dealershipmanagement. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at thatlevel. If the matter has alreadybeen reviewed with the sales,service, or parts manager, contactthe owner of the dealership orthe general manager.


13-2 Customer Information

STEP TWO: If after contacting amember of dealership management,it appears your concern cannotbe resolved by the dealershipwithout further help, in the U.S.,call 1-800-521-7300. In Canada,contact General Motors of CanadaCustomer Communication Centreat 1‐800-263-3777 (English) or1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call thetoll-free number in order to givethe inquiry prompt attention. Havethe following information availableto give the Customer Assistancerepresentative:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN). This is availablefrom the vehicle registration ortitle, or the plate at the top leftof the instrument panel andvisible through the windshield.

. Dealership name and location.

. Vehicle delivery date andpresent mileage.

When contacting Buick, rememberthat your concern will likely beresolved at a dealer's facility.That is why we suggest followingStep One first.

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners:Both General Motors and thedealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfiedwith the new vehicle. However,if you continue to remain unsatisfiedafter following the procedureoutlined in Steps One and Two,you can file with the Better BusinessBureau (BBB) Auto Line® Programto enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is anout-of-court program administeredby the Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotivedisputes regarding vehicle repairs orthe interpretation of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Although you maybe required to resort to this informaldispute resolution program priorto filing a court action, use of theprogram is free of charge and your

case will generally be heard within40 days. If you do not agree withthe decision given in your case,you may reject it and proceed withany other venue for relief availableto you.

You may contact the BBB AutoLine Program using the toll-freetelephone number or write themat the following address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better BusinessBureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100www.dr.bbb.org/goauto

This program is available inall 50 states and the District ofColumbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage, and otherfactors. General Motors reservesthe right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinueits participation in this program.



STEP THREE — CanadianOwners: In the event that youdo not feel your concerns havebeen addressed after following theprocedure outlined in Steps Oneand Two, General Motors of CanadaLimited wants you to be awareof its participation in a no-chargeMediation/Arbitration program.General Motors of CanadaLimited has committed to bindingarbitration of owner disputesinvolving factory-related vehicleservice claims. The programprovides for the review of thefacts involved by an impartial thirdparty arbiter, and may include aninformal hearing before the arbiter.The program is designed so that theentire dispute settlement process,from the time you file your complaintto the final decision, should becompleted in approximately 70 days.We believe our impartial program

offers advantages over courts inmost jurisdictions because it isinformal, quick, and free of charge.

For further information concerningeligibility in the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),call toll-free 1-800-207-0685,or call the General MotorsCustomer CommunicationCentre, 1-800-263-3777 (English),1-800-263-7854 (French),or write to:

Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer CommunicationCentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

The inquiry should be accompaniedby the Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

Customer SatisfactionProcedure (Mexico)

Did you get the Warranty ExtensionPlan? This plan is recommended byGeneral Motors to supplement thewarranty included with the newvehicle purchase.

See your dealer for details.



Customer AssistanceProcedure

Owner satisfaction and goodwill arevery important to your dealer andGeneral Motors.

Normally, any problem withthe transaction, sale, or usageof the vehicle must be handledby your dealer sales or servicedepartments. However, werecognize that despite the goodintentions of all parties involved,sometimes a misunderstandingmay occur.

If you have a problem that has notbeen satisfactorily handled throughthe normal means, we suggest thefollowing steps:

STEP ONE

Explain your case to the dealerservice agent, service manager,dealer sales agent, or salesmanager, depending on your case.

Make sure that they have allnecessary information. They areinterested in your continualsatisfaction.

STEP TWO

If you are not satisfied, pleasecontact the general manager or thedealership owner to ask for theirhelp. If they are not able to resolveyour case, ask them to contact theright people at General Motors forsupport, if needed.

STEP THREE

If your case is not resolvedin a reasonable amount of timeby your dealer, please call theGeneral Motors CustomerAssistance Center (CAC) andprovide the following information:. Name. Address. Phone number

. Model year

. Brand

. Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

. Mileage

. Delivery date

. Description of the problem

. Dealership name

. Dealership address

See Customer Assistance Offices(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑5or Customer Assistance Offices(Mexico) on page 13‑6 for moreinformation.



Customer AssistanceOffices (U.S. and Canada)Buick encourages customers to callthe toll-free number for assistance.However, if a customer wishes towrite or e-mail Buick, the lettershould be addressed to:

United States

Buick Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33136Detroit, MI 48232-5136www.Buick.com

1-800-521-73001-800-832-8425 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-252-1112

From Puerto Rico:

1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)

From U.S. Virgin Islands:

1-800-496-9994

Canada

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre,Mail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7www.gm.ca

1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-268-6800

All Overseas Locations

Please contact the localGeneral Motors Business Unit.

Mexico, Central America andCaribbean Islands/Countries(Except Puerto Rico andU.S. Virgin Islands)

General Motors de Mexico,S. de R.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterAv. Ejercito Nacional #843Col. GranadaC.P. 11520, Mexico, D.F.

01-800-466-0818Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0818



Customer AssistanceOffices (Mexico)To contact the Customer AssistanceCenter (CAC), use the phonenumbers listed in this section.Customer assistance is availableMonday through Friday, 08:00 to20:00 hours, and Saturdays from08:00 to 15:00 hours.

All e-mail inquiries to the CustomerAssistance Center (CAC) should besent to: [email protected].

Mexico

From Mexico City

5329-0818

From Other Mexico Locations

01-800-466-0818

United States and Canada

1-800-521-7300

Costa Rica

00-800-052-1005

Guatemala

1-800-999-5252

Panama

00-800-052-0001

Dominican Republic

1-888-751-5301

El Salvador

800-6273

Honduras

800-0122-6101

Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY)Users (U.S. and Canada)To assist customers who are deaf,hard of hearing, or speech-impairedand who use Text Telephones(TTYs), Buick has TTY equipmentavailable at its Customer AssistanceCenter. Any TTY user cancommunicate with Buick by dialing:1-800-832-8425. TTY users inCanada can dial 1‐800‐263-3830.



Online Owner Center

Buick Owner Center (U.S.)www.buickownercenter.com

Information and servicescustomized for your specificvehicle — all in one convenientplace.. Digital owner manual, warranty

information, and more.. Storage for online service and

maintenance records.. Buick dealer locator for service

nationwide.. Exclusive privileges and offers.. Recall notices for your specific

vehicle.. OnStar and GM Cardmember

Services Earnings summaries.

Other Helpful Links:

Buick — www.buick.com

Buick Merchandise —www.buickmerchandise.com

Help Center — www.buick.com/pages/mds/helpcenter/faq.do. FAQ (Frequently Asked

Questions). Contact Us

My GM Canada www.gm.ca

My GM Canada is apassword-protected section ofwww.gm.ca where you can saveinformation on GM vehicles, getpersonalized offers, and use handytools and forms with greater ease.

Here are a few of the valuabletools and services you will haveaccess to:. My Showroom: Find and save

information on vehicles andcurrent offers in your area.

. My Dealers: Save details suchas address and phone numberfor each of your preferred GMdealers.

. My Driveway: Access quicklinks to parts and serviceestimates, check trade-invalues, or schedule a serviceappointment by adding thevehicles you own to yourdriveway profile.

. My Preferences: Manage yourprofile and use tools and formswith greater ease.

To sign up, visit the My GM.casection within www.gm.ca.



GM MobilityReimbursement Program(U.S. and Canada)

This program is available toqualified applicants for costreimbursement of eligibleaftermarket adaptive equipmentrequired for the vehicle, such ashand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift for the vehicle.

For more information on the limitedoffer, visit www.gmmobility.com orcall the GM Mobility AssistanceCenter at 1-800-323-9935. TextTelephone (TTY) users, call1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canadaalso has a Mobility Program.Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)for details. TTY users call1-800-263-3830.

Roadside AssistanceProgram (U.S. andCanada)For U.S.‐purchased vehicles, call1-800-252-1112; (Text Telephone(TTY): 1‐888‐889‐2438).

For Canadian‐purchased vehicles,call 1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.

Calling for Assistance

When calling Roadside Assistance,have the following informationready:. Your name, home address, and

home telephone number.. Telephone number of your

location.. Location of the vehicle.. Model, year, color, and license

plate number of the vehicle.. Odometer reading, Vehicle

Identification Number (VIN),and delivery date of the vehicle.

. Description of the problem.



Coverage

Services are provided up to5 years/160 000 km (100,000 mi),whichever comes first.

In the U.S., anyone driving thevehicle is covered. In Canada, aperson driving the vehicle withoutpermission from the owner is notcovered.

Roadside Assistance is not a part ofthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.Buick and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tomake any changes or discontinuethe Roadside Assistance programat any time without notification.

Buick and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the rightto limit services or payment to anowner or driver if they decide theclaims are made too often, or thesame type of claim is made manytimes.

Services Provided. Emergency Fuel Delivery:

Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearestservice station.

. Lock‐Out Service: Serviceto unlock the vehicle if you arelocked out. A remote unlockmay be available if you haveOnStar®. For security reasons,the driver must presentidentification before thisservice is given.

. Emergency Tow from a PublicRoad or Highway: Tow tothe nearest Buick dealer forwarranty service, or if the vehiclewas in a crash and cannot bedriven. Assistance is also givenwhen the vehicle is stuck insand, mud, or snow.

. Flat Tire Change: Service tochange a flat tire with the sparetire. The spare tire, if equipped,must be in good condition andproperly inflated. It is the owner'sresponsibility for the repair orreplacement of the tire if it isnot covered by the warranty.

. Battery Jump Start: Service tojump start a dead battery.

Services Not Included inRoadside Assistance. Impound towing caused by

violation of any laws.. Legal fines.. Mounting, dismounting,

or changing of snow tires,chains, or other traction devices.

. Towing or services for vehiclesdriven on a non-public road orhighway.



Services Specific toCanadian‐Purchased Vehicles. Fuel delivery: Reimbursement

is approximately $5 Canadian.Diesel fuel delivery may berestricted. Propane and otherfuels are not provided throughthis service.

. Lock-Out Service: Vehicleregistration is required.

. Trip Routing Service: Detailedmaps of North America areprovided when requested eitherwith the most direct route orthe most scenic route. Thereis a six request limit per year.Additional travel informationis also available. Allow threeweeks for delivery.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: Must be over250 kilometers from whereyour trip was started to qualify.General Motors of Canada

Limited requirespre-authorization, originaldetailed receipts, and acopy of the repair orders.Once authorization hasbeen received, the RoadsideAssistance advisor will helpyou make arrangements andexplain how to receive payment.

. Alternative Service:If assistance cannot beprovided right away, theRoadside Assistance advisormay give permission to getlocal emergency road service.You will receive payment, up to$100, after sending the originalreceipt to Roadside Assistance.Mechanical failures may becovered, however any cost forparts and labor for repairs notcovered by the warranty are theowner responsibility.

Roadside AssistanceProgram (Mexico)Roadside Assistance is available24 hours a day, 365 days ofthe year.

For detailed information aboutRoadside Assistance, please seethe brochure provided with yournew vehicle or visit our websiteat: www.buick.com.mx. Navigatethe site and click on “Asistenciaen el Camino.” E-mailcorrespondence should be sentto: [email protected].

To contact Roadside Assistance byphone, use the following numbers:

Mexico

01-800-466-0818

United States

1-866-466-8197

Canada

1-800-268-6800



Scheduling ServiceAppointments(U.S. and Canada)When the vehicle requireswarranty service, contactthe dealer and request anappointment. By schedulinga service appointment andadvising the service consultantof your transportation needs,the dealer can help minimizeyour inconvenience.

If the vehicle cannot be scheduledinto the service departmentimmediately, keep driving it untilit can be scheduled for service,unless, of course, the problem issafety related. If it is, please callthe dealership, let them know this,and ask for instructions.

If the dealer requests you to bringthe vehicle for service, you areurged to do so as early in the workday as possible to allow for thesame day-repair.

Courtesy TransportationProgram (U.S. andCanada)To enhance your ownershipexperience, we and ourparticipating dealers are proudto offer Courtesy Transportation,a customer support program forvehicles with the Bumper-to-Bumper(Base Warranty Coverage periodin Canada), extended powertrain,and/or hybrid‐specific warrantiesin both the U.S. and Canada.

Several Courtesy Transportationoptions are available to assist inreducing inconvenience whenwarranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not apart of the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. A separate bookletentitled “Warranty and OwnerAssistance Information” furnishedwith each new vehicle providesdetailed warranty coverageinformation.

Transportation Options

Warranty service can generallybe completed while you wait.However, if you are unableto wait, GM helps to minimizeinconvenience by providing severaltransportation options. Dependingon the circumstances, the dealercan offer one of the following:

Shuttle Service

Shuttle service is the preferredmeans of offering CourtesyTransportation. Dealers may provideshuttle service to get you to yourdestination with minimal interruptionof your daily schedule. This includesone‐way or round‐trip shuttle servicewithin reasonable time and distanceparameters of the dealer's area.



Public Transportation or FuelReimbursement

If the vehicle requires overnightwarranty repairs, and publictransportation is used insteadof the dealer's shuttle service,the expense must be supportedby original receipts and can onlybe up to the maximum amountallowed by GM for shuttle service.In addition, for U.S. customers,should you arrange transportationthrough a friend or relative, limitedreimbursement for reasonablefuel expenses may be available.Claim amounts should reflectactual costs and be supported byoriginal receipts. See the dealer forinformation regarding the allowanceamounts for reimbursement of fuelor other transportation costs.

Courtesy Rental Vehicle

The dealer may arrange to provideyou with a courtesy rental vehicleor reimburse you for a rental vehiclethat you obtain if the vehicle is keptfor an overnight warranty repair.Rental reimbursement will be limitedand must be supported by originalreceipts. This requires that you signand complete a rental agreementand meet state/provincial, local, andrental vehicle provider requirements.Requirements vary and may includeminimum age requirements,insurance coverage, credit card,etc. You are responsible for fuelusage charges and may also beresponsible for taxes, levies, usagefees, excessive mileage, or rentalusage beyond the completion ofthe repair.

It may not be possible to provide alike vehicle as a courtesy rental.

Additional ProgramInformation

All program options, such asshuttle service, may not be availableat every dealer. Please contactthe dealer for specific informationabout availability. All CourtesyTransportation arrangements willbe administered by appropriatedealer personnel.

General Motors reserves theright to unilaterally modify,change, or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time andto resolve all questions of claimeligibility pursuant to the terms andconditions described herein at itssole discretion.



Collision Damage Repair(U.S. and Canada)If the vehicle is involved in acollision and it is damaged,have the damage repaired by aqualified technician using the properequipment and quality replacementparts. Poorly performed collisionrepairs diminish the vehicle resalevalue, and safety performance canbe compromised in subsequentcollisions.

Collision Parts

Genuine GM Collision parts arenew parts made with the samematerials and construction methodsas the parts with which the vehiclewas originally built. Genuine GMCollision parts are the best choice toensure that the vehicle's designedappearance, durability, and safetyare preserved. The use of GenuineGM parts can help maintain the GMNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Recycled original equipmentparts may also be used for repair.These parts are typically removedfrom vehicles that were total lossesin prior crashes. In most cases,the parts being recycled are fromundamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GMpart may be an acceptable choiceto maintain the vehicle's originallydesigned appearance and safetyperformance; however, the historyof these parts is not known. Suchparts are not covered by the GMNew Vehicle Limited Warranty, andany related failures are not coveredby that warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts arealso available. These are madeby companies other than GM andmay not have been tested for thevehicle. As a result, these partsmay fit poorly, exhibit premature

durability/corrosion problems,and may not perform properly insubsequent collisions. Aftermarketparts are not covered by the GMNew Vehicle Limited Warranty, andany vehicle failure related to suchparts is not covered by thatwarranty.

Repair Facility

GM also recommends that youchoose a collision repair facility thatmeets your needs before you everneed collision repairs. The dealermay have a collision repair centerwith GM-trained technicians andstate‐of‐the‐art equipment, or beable to recommend a collisionrepair center that has GM-trainedtechnicians and comparableequipment.



Insuring The Vehicle

Protect your investment in theGM vehicle with comprehensiveand collision insurance coverage.There are significant differencesin the quality of coverage affordedby various insurance policy terms.Many insurance policies providereduced protection to the GMvehicle by limiting compensationfor damage repairs by usingaftermarket collision parts.Some insurance companieswill not specify aftermarket collisionparts. When purchasing insurance,we recommend that you ensurethat the vehicle will be repaired withGM original equipment collisionparts. If such insurance coverageis not available from your currentinsurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If the vehicle is leased, the leasingcompany may require you to haveinsurance that ensures repairs withGenuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts orGenuine Manufacturer replacementparts. Read the lease carefully, asyou may be charged at the end ofthe lease for poor quality repairs.

If a Crash Occurs

If there has been an injury, callemergency services for help.Do not leave the scene of a crashuntil all matters have been takencare of. Move the vehicle only if itsposition puts you in danger, or youare instructed to move it by a policeofficer.

Give only the necessary informationto police and other parties involvedin the crash.

For emergency towing seeRoadside Assistance Program(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑8or Roadside Assistance Program(Mexico) on page 13‑10.

Gather the following information:. Driver name, address, and

telephone number.. Driver license number.. Owner name, address, and

telephone number.. Vehicle license plate number.. Vehicle make, model, and

model year.. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN).. Insurance company and policy

number.. General description of the

damage to the other vehicle.

Choose a reputable repair facilitythat uses quality replacement parts.See “Collision Parts” earlier in thissection.

If the airbag has inflated, see WhatWill You See After an AirbagInflates? on page 3‑35.



Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair Process

In the event that the vehiclerequires damage repairs, GMrecommends that you take anactive role in its repair. If youhave a pre-determined repairfacility of choice, take the vehiclethere, or have it towed there.Specify to the facility that anyrequired replacement collisionparts be original equipment parts,either new Genuine GM partsor recycled original GM parts.Remember, recycled parts willnot be covered by the GM vehiclewarranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair,but you must live with the repair.Depending on your policy limits,

your insurance company mayinitially value the repair usingaftermarket parts. Discuss this withthe repair professional, and insiston Genuine GM parts. Remember,if the vehicle is leased, you maybe obligated to have the vehiclerepaired with Genuine GM parts,even if your insurance coveragedoes not pay the full cost.

If another party's insurancecompany is paying for the repairs,you are not obligated to accepta repair valuation based on thatinsurance company's collisionpolicy repair limits, as you haveno contractual limits with thatcompany. In such cases, you canhave control of the repair and partschoices as long as the cost stayswithin reasonable limits.

Service PublicationsOrdering Information

Service Manuals

Service Manuals have thediagnosis and repair informationon the engines, transmission, axle,suspension, brakes, electrical,steering, body, etc.

Service Bulletins

Service Bulletins give additionaltechnical service informationneeded to knowledgeably serviceGeneral Motors cars and trucks.Each bulletin contains instructionsto assist in the diagnosis andservice of the vehicle.



Owner Information

Owner publications are writtenspecifically for owners and intendedto provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle.The Owner Manual includesthe Maintenance Schedulefor all models.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,Owner Manual, and WarrantyBooklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$35.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Without Portfolio: OwnerManual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Current and Past Models

Technical Service Bulletins andManuals are available for currentand past model GM vehicles.

ORDER TOLL FREE:1-800-551-4123 Monday - Friday8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Eastern Time

For Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visitHelm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.

Or write to:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Prices are subject to changewithout notice and without incurringobligation. Allow ample time fordelivery.

All listed prices are quoted inU.S. funds. Make checks payablein U.S. funds.

Reporting SafetyDefects

Reporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernmentIf you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which could causea crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediatelyinform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it findsthat a safety defect exists in agroup of vehicles, it may ordera recall and remedy campaign.



However, NHTSA cannotbecome involved in individualproblems between you, yourdealer, or General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you maycall the Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153);go to http://www.safercar.gov;or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain otherinformation about motorvehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernmentIf you live in Canada, and youbelieve that the vehicle has asafety defect, notify TransportCanada immediately, and notifyGeneral Motors of Canada Limited.Call them at 1-800-333-0510 orwrite to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch2780 Sheffield RoadOttawa, Ontario K1B 3V9

Reporting Safety Defectsto General MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (orTransport Canada) in a situation likethis, please notify General Motors.

Call 1-800-521-7300, or write:

Buick Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33136Detroit, MI 48232-5136

In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854(French), or write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre,Mail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7



Vehicle DataRecording andPrivacyThis GM vehicle has a number ofsophisticated computers that recordinformation about the vehicle’sperformance and how it is driven.For example, the vehicle usescomputer modules to monitor andcontrol engine and transmissionperformance, to monitor theconditions for airbag deploymentand deploy airbags in a crash, and,if so equipped, to provide antilockbraking to help the driver control thevehicle. These modules may storedata to help the dealer technicianservice the vehicle. Some modulesmay also store data about how youoperate the vehicle, such as rate offuel consumption or average speed.These modules may also retain theowner’s personal preferences, suchas radio pre-sets, seat positions,and temperature settings.

Event Data RecordersThis vehicle has an Event DataRecorder (EDR). The main purposeof an EDR is to record, in certaincrash or near crash-like situations,such as an airbag deployment orhitting a road obstacle, data thatwill assist in understanding howa vehicle's systems performed.The EDR is designed to recorddata related to vehicle dynamicsand safety systems for a shortperiod of time, typically 30 secondsor less. The EDR in this vehicle isdesigned to record such data as:. How various systems in the

vehicle were operating.. Whether or not the driver and

passenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened.

. How far, if at all, the driver waspressing the accelerator and/orbrake pedal.

. How fast the vehicle wastraveling.

This data can help provide a betterunderstanding of the circumstancesin which crashes and injuries occur.

Important: EDR data is recordedby the vehicle only if a non-trivialcrash situation occurs; no data isrecorded by the EDR under normaldriving conditions and no personaldata (e.g., name, gender, age,and crash location) is recorded.However, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, could combinethe EDR data with the type ofpersonally identifying dataroutinely acquired during acrash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR,special equipment is required, andaccess to the vehicle or the EDR isneeded. In addition to the vehiclemanufacturer, other parties, suchas law enforcement, that have thespecial equipment, can read theinformation if they have accessto the vehicle or the EDR.



GM will not access this data orshare it with others except: withthe consent of the vehicle owneror, if the vehicle is leased, with theconsent of the lessee; in responseto an official request by police orsimilar government office; as partof GM's defense of litigation throughthe discovery process; or, asrequired by law. Data that GMcollects or receives may also beused for GM research needs ormay be made available to others forresearch purposes, where a need isshown and the data is not tied to aspecific vehicle or vehicle owner.

OnStar®

If the vehicle is equipped withan active OnStar system, thatsystem may also record data incrash or near crash‐like situations.The OnStar Terms and Conditionsprovides information on datacollection and use and is availablein the OnStar glove box kit,at www.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada), orby pressing theQ button andspeaking to an advisor.

Navigation SystemIf the vehicle has a navigationsystem, use of the system mayresult in the storage of destinations,addresses, telephone numbers, andother trip information. Refer to thenavigation system operating manualfor information on stored data andfor deletion instructions.

Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID)RFID technology is used insome vehicles for functions suchas tire pressure monitoring andignition system security, as well asin connection with conveniencessuch as key fobs for remote doorlocking/unlocking and starting, andin-vehicle transmitters for garagedoor openers. RFID technology inGM vehicles does not use or recordpersonal information or link withany other GM system containingpersonal information.



Radio FrequencyStatementThis vehicle has systems thatoperate on a radio frequency thatcomply with Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and with Industry CanadaStandards RSS‐210/220/310.

Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. The device may not causeinterference.

2. The device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of thedevice.

Changes or modifications to anyof these systems by other than anauthorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.


INDEX i-1

AAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24Adaptive ForwardLighting (AFL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Add-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-62

AdjustmentsLumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-15Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Air Filter, PassengerCompartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

Air Intake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8Airbag SystemCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-43How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34

Airbag System (cont.)What Will You See Afteran Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . .3-35

When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32

Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-31AirbagsAdding Equipment to theVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-42

Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-15Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14Servicing Airbag-EquippedVehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-41

System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29Alarm SystemAnti-Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14

All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12AntennaSatellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-20

Anti-TheftAlarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Alarm System Messages . . . . .5-38

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21

Appearance CareExterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-92Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-97

Assistance Program,Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8, 13-10

Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-20CD/DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-23

Audio SystemBackglass Antenna . . . . . . . . . . .7-19Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-19Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2

AutomaticClimate Control System . . . . . . . . 8-1Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . 9-28Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30Shift Lock ControlFunction Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . 7-31, 7-34


i-2 INDEX

BBattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33

Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-29Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . 7-46, 7-48, 7-53Brake System Warning Light . . . 5-19Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33

Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-16Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33Headlamps, Front TurnSignal and ParkingLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34

High Intensity Discharge(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33

License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-36Taillamps, Turn Signal,Stoplamps, andBack-Up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64

CCalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5CaliforniaFuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-51Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3Camera, Rear Vision . . . . . . . . . . 9-46Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . ivCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Carbon MonoxideEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

Cautions, Danger, andWarnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .v


INDEX i-3

CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-1Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69ChargingSystem Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16

CheckEngine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17IgnitionTransmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-28

Child RestraintsInfants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-46

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-52

Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-44Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-61, 3-63Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-49

Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39

CleaningExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-92Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-97

Climate Control SystemsAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Dual Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5, 5-6Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 13-13Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-85Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34

Compressor Kit, TireSealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72

Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2CoolantEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Engine TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34

Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-6Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-5, 13-6Text Telephone (TTY)Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-6

Customer InformationService PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . 13-15

Customer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1, 13-3


i-4 INDEX

DDamage Repair, Collision . . . . . 13-13Danger, Warnings, andCautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .v

Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-18Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Devices, Auxiliary . . . . . . . 7-31, 7-34Differential, Limited-Slip . . . . . . . 9-38Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5DoorAjar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Rear Seat Pass-Through . . . . .3-13

Drive SystemsAll-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31

Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25

DrivingCharacteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-56

Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-8If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . 9-11Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-12Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

Driving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23

Dual Automatic ClimateControl System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

DVDRear Seat EntertainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-36

DVD/CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23

EElectric Parking Brake Light . . . 5-20Electrical Equipment,Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-62

Electrical SystemEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39


Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42

Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Rear Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44

Electronic Stability Control . . . . . 9-37Electronic Stability Control(ESC)/Traction ControlSystem (TCS) IndicatorWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22


INDEX i-5

Electronic Stability ControlIndicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15Check and Service EngineSoon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17

Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-6Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17Cooling System Messages . . .5-35Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23Overheated ProtectionOperating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22

Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-28Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20

Engine OilLife System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35

Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-61Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-18Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-27Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . 6-2

FFeaturesMemory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

Filter,Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-15

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-4Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79

Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-100

FluidAutomatic Transmission . . . . 10-15Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24

Fog LampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Front Fog LampsLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25

Front SeatsAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Heated and Ventilated . . . . . . . .3-10

Front Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-52Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-54

Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-53Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . .9-52Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-51


i-6 INDEX

Fuel (cont.)Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . .5-24Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-50Requirements, California . . . . .9-51System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36

Fuel EconomyDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23

FusesEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39


Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42

Rear Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44

GGarage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . 5-45Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45

GasolineSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-51

GaugesEngine CoolantTemperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Warning Lights andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

General InformationService and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-55Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2

Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8

HHalogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-4Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Head Up Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29HeadlampsAdaptive ForwardLighting (AFL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-33Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2High Intensity Discharge(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33

High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-24High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2

HeatedSteering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3


INDEX i-7

Heated and Ventilated FrontSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17HeaterEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23

Heating and Air Conditioning . . . 8-1High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 9-8Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . 9-35Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17

IIgnition Positions . . . . . . . . 9-17, 9-19Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Infants and Young Children,Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46

Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

JJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86

KKey and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-36Keyless EntryRemote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-4

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-48Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37LampsDaytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-3Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lamps OffReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Headlamps, Front TurnSignal and ParkingLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34

License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-17Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Sun Visor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22


i-8 INDEX

LATCH SystemReplacing Parts After aCrash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-61

LATCH, Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-52

LightElectronic Stability Control(ESC)/Traction ControlSystem (TCS) IndicatorWarning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22

LightingAdaptive Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

LightsAirbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21

Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-19Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . .5-20Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-23

Lights (cont.)Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .5-14Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24Taillamp Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Traction Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21

Limited-Slip Differential . . . . . . . . 9-38LocksDelayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12

Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . 5-24Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52

Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

MMaintenanceRecords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-10

Maintenance ScheduleRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7

Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 11-2Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-17Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30Mass Storage Media (MEM) . . . 7-27Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7MessagesAnti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . .5-38Battery Voltage andCharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33

Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-35Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36


INDEX i-9

Messages (cont.)Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37Object Detection System . . . . .5-37Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-37Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39

MirrorsFolding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18Park Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16

Monitor System, TirePressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56

NNavigationVehicle Data Recordingand Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19

Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-16

OObject Detection SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37

Object Detection, Side BlindZone Alert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44

Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Off-RoadRecovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

OilEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-13Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23

Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-44Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-7OnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24Operation, InfotainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

OutletsPower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Overheated EngineProtectionOperating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-21Overview, InfotainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3, 7-5

PParkShifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26

Park Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17ParkingAssist, Ultrasonic . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-29

Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-27Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

Passenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-37Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements, California . . . . . 10-3

PersonalizationVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . 7-46, 7-48, 7-53


i-10 INDEX

PowerDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-24Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19

Pregnancy, Using SafetyBelts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27

PrivacyRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-19

ProgramCourtesy Transportation . . . . .13-11

Proposition 65 Warning,California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

RRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-19Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20

RadiosAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-23Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-19Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15

Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Rear Seat EntertainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36

Rear SeatPass-Through Door . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 9-46Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7

Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50RecordsMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-10

Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89

Reimbursement Program,GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3, 2-4

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37Replacement PartsAirbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-43Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9

Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-43Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61


INDEX i-11

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts After aCrash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28

Reporting Safety DefectsCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-17General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16

RestraintsWhere to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-51

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24

Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . . 9-37Electronic Stability (ESC) . . . . .9-37Enhanced TractionSystem (ETS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-38

Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37Selective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-38

RoadsDriving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8, 13-10

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21

Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-4Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28

SSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14Replacing After a Crash . . . . . .3-28Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-27

Safety Defects ReportingCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-17General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16

Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-27Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . 11-2Scheduling Appointments . . . . . 13-11Sealant Kit, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72SeatsAdjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Heated and VentilatedFront . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10

Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-7Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-5Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Securing ChildRestraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61, 3-63

SecurityLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14

Selective Ride Control . . . . . . . . . 9-38


i-12 INDEX

ServiceAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-4Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-10Maintenance, GeneralInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1Publications OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15

Scheduling Appointments . . . .13-11Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck, AutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

ShiftingInto Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26

Side Blind Zone Alert . . . . . . . . . . 9-44Signals, Turn andLane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Spare TireCompact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-85

Specifications andCapacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Start Assist, Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-27Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Heated Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Stoplamps and Back-Up LampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-35

StorageMass Media (MEM) . . . . . . . . . . .7-27

Storage AreasCenter Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Storing the Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . 10-79

Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11Sun Visor Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .vSystemInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1


INDEX i-13

TTachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Taillamp Indicator Light . . . . . . . . 5-25TaillampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-35

Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-6Theft-DeterrentSystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14, 2-15Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14

Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5, 5-6TiresBuying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-85Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-70Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-57Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38

Tires (cont.)Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-56Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72

Sealant and CompressorKit, Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79

Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-68When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63

Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47TowingDriving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-56Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-61General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-55

Towing (cont.)Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-89Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-60Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89

TractionControl System (TCS) . . . . . . . .9-36Limited-Slip Differential . . . . . . .9-38Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Selective Ride Control . . . . . . . .9-38

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-60TransmissionAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38

Transportation Program,Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11

Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Turn SignalBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-35


i-14 INDEX

UUltrasonic Parking Assist . . . . . . 9-42Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66

Universal Remote System . . . . . 5-45Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-48Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45

Using this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

VVehicleCanadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ivControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1

Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89

Vehicle CareStoring the Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit . . . . . . . 10-79

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54Vehicle IdentificationService Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1

Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20

WWarningBrake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-19

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .vCautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . . vHazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24

WheelsAlignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68

Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68

When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63

Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-51Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19

WindshieldWiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-29

Documents

2011 Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual M - General Motors · PDF fileBuick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (1,1) 2011 Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual M ... Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual